Nissan - Titan - Workshop Manual - 2006 - 2006

Page 12709 Page 824 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 7053 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 380 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11402 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST. Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Basic Operation CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Page 4583 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8689 31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool. 32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40. 33. Remove the rear door panel. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. Page 2638 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 13921 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8956 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14261 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 12405 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9294 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3687 WARNING: Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 5509 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 682 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 5906 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 2407 Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 4733 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 13618 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13695 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8973 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 597 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5175 Case 11 Case 12 Page 13889 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8415 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13411 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1026 Page 9837 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13665 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview ECM Circuit Inspection Page 1937 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5769 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 4495 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12749 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 8148 Repair Flow Chart Page 14303 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 10989 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13221 Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection Optical Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The optical sensor is located in the center of the defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the front air control. OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in detected sunload. For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 1) Page 5925 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3016 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. ^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Page 12957 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2392 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5) Page 4266 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13097 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1187 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.) Page 9 Optional Splice Page 443 Body Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2586 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 7107 Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch Page 1957 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12388 Headlamp (For USA) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4255 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2907 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 14433 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12543 Compass: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13250 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 472 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 13982 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5598 Page 11345 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1038 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12367 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 7944 3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1). 4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed. ^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body. 5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service. Page 6432 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. Page 10471 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11817 Power Mirror Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7042 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1923 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4055 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4030 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11588 FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. 5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1190 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 14439 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 52 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6426 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6919 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2196 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to "Removal" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Page 137 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 2725 Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: 2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Classification: BT05-003a Reference: NTB05-010a Date: February 7, 2008 NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates have been updated. No other changes have been made. APPLIED VEHICLES APPLIED VINs / DATES IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat lifter. ACTIONS: ^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom. ^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information). NOTE: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 10480 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 2285 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5121 Case 4 Page 11824 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12896 Page 5656 Page 1842 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 346 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6998 Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection Checking of A/T Position NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers. 1. Place selector lever in "P" position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure selector lever can be shifted to other than "P" position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make sure selector lever can be shifted from "P" position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the transmission body 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the figure. 6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the "R" position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against "R" position in the "P" or "N" position. 7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. 8. Make sure transmission is locked completely in "P" position. Page 8442 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10318 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6328 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3066 Main Bearing Oil Clearance Main Bearing Clearance Page 3366 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Page 2815 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3768 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster. 3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. Installation Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 12348 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9608 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 23 - 25) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR Air Mix Door Motor Circuit Air Mix Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Discharge air temperature does not change. - Air mix door motor does not operate. Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10825 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7220 Page 2530 the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 7854 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console or center seat as required. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 1903 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) With reservoir ...................................................................................................................................... .......................... 3 1/4 gal. (2 5/8 Imp gal, 12.2 L) Page 826 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 5019 System Diagram - Type 3 System Diagram - Type 4 Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5585 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 4863 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 8579 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5300 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 13852 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2181 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Windshield Washer Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Classification: EL06-009 Reference: NTB07-002 Date: January 9, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank. ACTION Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5622 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 7874 CAUTION: ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Adjust the steering angle sensor. ^ Calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 13703 LT-T/TOW-03 Page 8792 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console Power Socket Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console Power Socket REMOVAL 1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6465 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 4093 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 13731 Page 5693 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7724 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8911 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12736 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied - to combination meter terminal 15 - through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 - through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 - from combination meter terminal 16. Page 13496 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6890 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 674 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 10575 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 857 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12887 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 8804 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6664 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9896 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the radiator. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. - Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary. 5. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - Replace the grommets as necessary. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 11759 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10537 SRS Inspection (For Side And Rollover Collision) Part 1 Page 13959 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12150 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2029 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 14072 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6763 Page 14345 1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly. ^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM. 2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal. ^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal. 3. Replace washer pump seal. NOTE: Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation. 4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank. 5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Page 9999 Figure E-3 3. Disconnect the white connector circled in Figure E-3. - This is connector E120. - This connector has 6 terminal slots with only 5 filled. Figure E-4 4. Remove the green wire from connector E120. - Use pin terminal tool J-38751-305 from Pin Tool Set J-38751-3, or equivalent. Rear Sonar System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12418 Page 489 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Classification: EM-08-002 Reference: NTB08-058 Date: June 6, 2008 TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt. ACTION A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this Service Procedure. B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it. C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs. D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 10279 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14070 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2529 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find Page 10049 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 685 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 5449 - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: - Ignition switch - Key switch (insert) - Hazard switch - Main door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab) - Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Part 1 Page 5088 Case 2 Page 6210 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 4489 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3887 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 10025 Page 5699 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2020 Engine Control Component Parts Location Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 8552 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only) - Front wipers - Tail, parking, and license lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab) INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE - When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto Page 12776 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13628 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3151 Page 12556 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13500 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 310 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9823 Page 1547 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 9 - 12) Page 1925 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9503 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 1168 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2952 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 5253 Case 6 Page 10857 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 19 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 2987 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. Wheel nut ................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.) Page 9044 13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then 14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape. ^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness. ^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap. ^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in position. ^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube. ^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left. 15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9. Page 142 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2355 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3394 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. ^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Page 12143 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6131 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 10563 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6000 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 7608 Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2333 9. Remove side bearing caps. 10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8211 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13130 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 354 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5105 Case 4 Page 3933 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 4551 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 14397 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 392 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10475 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 13518 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12780 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7056 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 231 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3034 ^ Remove No. 1 camshaft bracket. NOTE: The bottom and front surface of bracket will be stuck because of liquid gasket. ^ <-: Engine front ^ B: Exhaust ^ D: Intake 11. Remove the camshaft. 12. Remove the valve lifters if necessary. ^ Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up. INSTALLATION 1. Install the valve lifters if removed. ^ Install removed parts in their original locations. 2. Install the camshafts. Refer to the table for identification of the RH and LH, and intake and exhaust. ^ Install so that the RH bank (B) dowel pins (A) and LH bank (C) dowel pins (A) at the front of the camshaft face are in the direction shown. Page 13839 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 936 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12574 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1101 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6889 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5841 Optional Splice Page 12516 Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 1 Page 13007 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Page 5316 Case 17 Case 18 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 3516 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 14213 Wiper Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4885 Page 12681 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair WEATHERSTRIP Visually check weatherstrip for any damage, deterioration, or flattening. - In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour water around it to find the damaged or gaped portion, remove glass lid assembly. - If any damage is found, replace glass lid assembly. CAUTION: Do not remove the weatherstrip. Page 8693 ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the harness. 46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 47. Reset the radio station presets. 48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 49. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only) 51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side. Page 4938 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Page 13840 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8654 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9874 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 13 - 17) Page 8840 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12600 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216 Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN Reference: NTBO7-009 Date: February 16, 2007 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616 NHTSA # : 06V-459 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471 2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226 2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805 NOTE: Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety exists. In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio speakers. If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type cover will be installed and rerouted. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and Page 8841 Page 636 Page 10586 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4270 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14483 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6183 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 867 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14221 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12080 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5614 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 6187 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6468 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2439 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 2807 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7826 * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]. 5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems: IMPORTANT: You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all DTC(s) are erased. ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIR BAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) 6. After all DTC(s) are erased: ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. ^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector. ^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle. ^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the instrument panel. 7. Continue with Part 4. Part 4 Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. 1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming card. 2. Go to the ASIST terminal. 3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II. ^ Use ID Code 050602. ^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. END Page 1099 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6099 Fuel: Service Precautions Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended) Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) may only be used in vehicles specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models.) CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Do not use E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) unless the vehicle is specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV Models). Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Page 1868 Specifications Camshaft: Specifications INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the camshaft. 2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading). Camshaft runout: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Cam Height ^ Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard cam height (intake & exhaust): 44.465 - 44.655 mm (1.7506 - 1.7581 inch) Cam wear limit (intake & exhaust): 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ^ If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Journal Clearance Camshaft Journal Diameter ^ Measure the diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard diameter: 25.953 - 25.970 mm (1.0218 1.0224 inch) Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter Page 9582 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4579 Page 4243 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8547 - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus Page 12494 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1057 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14034 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14181 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6950 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 11149 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14174 Page 14322 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14201 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12218 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6955 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10236 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Page 2076 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 13664 Optional Splice Page 8998 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 8910 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Valve Lifter Page 5037 Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication Line CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)". Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Page 6511 ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. ^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures ^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Power Mirror Motor: Customer Interest Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Classification: BT06-005 Reference: NTB06-074 Date: October 30, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced. ACTION ^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly. ^ Replace only the door mirror actuator. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11212 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 739 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4724 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 6055 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 11909 Optional Splice Page 3080 service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available). ^ Refer to EM-97, "Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)" for the values for each grade at the plant. See: Specifications/Service Limits & General Specifications PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE Cylinder Bore Diameter ^ Measure the cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper at six different points on each cylinder ("X" and "Y" directions at "A", "B" and "C"). NOTE: When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at "B" position. Standard diameter: 98.000 - 98.030 mm (3.8583 - 3.8594 inch) Wear limit: 0.20 mm (0.0079 inch) Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): Limit: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Taper limit (Difference between "A" and "C"): Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) ^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone or bore the inner wall. ^ An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston, hone the cylinder so that the clearance between the piston and cylinder satisfies the standard. Piston oversize Grade No. 0 (Service): 0.20 mm (0.0079 inch) ^ If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston rings. Piston Skirt Diameter ^ Measure piston skirt diameter using suitable tool. Standard: 97.980 - 98.010 mm (3.8575 - 3.8587 inch) Page 10219 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Checking for Refrigerant Leaks PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). NOTE: Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. - Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. - Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg-sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. 3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. Page 14247 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 8963 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12915 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 8924 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Page 2326 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 76 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 773 Optional Splice Page 10208 8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6. ^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900 Page 5197 Case 3 Page 1668 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5999 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 4386 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 8941 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 759 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 12296 Disclaimer Service Procedure 1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place. 2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate. ^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. CAUTION: The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with the lids snapped closed. 3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. Page 361 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5390 Component Parts Location Page 7999 IMPORTANT: If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform. Page 11036 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4010 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12542 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10226 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Contaminated Refrigerant Contaminated Refrigerant If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: - Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. - Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. - Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. - If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. - If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Page 3566 Page 2750 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Changing Engine Oil WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer. CAUTION: ^ Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 7. Refill with new engine oil. CAUTION: ^ The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ^ Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Page 991 Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 5411 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4454 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12790 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8238 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12652 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 8093 b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6). c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402. d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad. ^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7). Page 11453 9. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly. 10. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. 11. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. Page 816 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 10313 Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7832 Page 10978 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11291 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Service and Repair Console Lamp: Service and Repair CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped) Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the map lamp assembly (2). Refer to INTERIOR ROOM LAMP. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to INTERIOR HEADLINER. 3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from map lamp assembly (2) to remove. Page 3842 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 10122 2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3). 3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3). 4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3. ^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness. Page 4556 Component Parts Location Page 13432 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Side Marker Lamp (Rear) Bulb Replacement SIDE MARKER LAMP (REAR) Removal 1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Turn side marker lamp (rear) bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13161 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5523 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 11816 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12882 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5152 Case 5 Page 471 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12499 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11342 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6478 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 5239 Case 11 Page 6449 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 681 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 12986 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5457 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 2081 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10465 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13734 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8884 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9768 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 530 Page 13145 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1949 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13729 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3700 Component Parts Location Page 5718 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 2376 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 10070 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 676 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 8773 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 9069 b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove. c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly. Use plastic trim tool as shown. d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5314 Case 14 Page 10864 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4497 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10509 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12962 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 7516 2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. 3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 5502 Page 6341 Engine Control Component Parts Location Service and Repair Valve Cover: Service and Repair ROCKER COVER Image Symbols REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 3. Move the harness on the upper rocker cover and its peripheral aside. 4. Remove the electric throttle control actuator, loosening the bolts diagonally (for LH only). 5. Remove the ignition coils. Page 1473 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD Brake Switch ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Page 2283 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12799 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 7986 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9010 Page 2332 CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. ^ Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts. 5. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. 6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). 7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ^ Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. ^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 8. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 10423 Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 1817 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8027 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove brake hose from cylinder body. INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose (1) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to specification. ^ (2): Bolt ^ (3): Rear cylinder body NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Page 14371 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front Wiper Arms REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 2. Remove front RH wiper arm and front LH wiper arm. 3. Remove front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly. Installation 1. Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop). 2. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 3. Install front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly. 4. Install front RH wiper arm and front LH wiper arm. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install wiper arm covers. Front wiper arm nuts : 23.6 N.m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb) 6. Ensure that wiper blades stop within proper clearance. Refer "FRONT WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT". Page 748 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 9766 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12998 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2005 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11205 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9935 Figure D-8A - Make sure the harness is routed through the harness hole in Protector 3 (refer to Figure D-8A). Figure D-9 7. Fold and stick protector 3 to the top of the fan motor as shown. Fold and stick the flap shown in Figure D-9 to the side of the fan motor. Figure D-10 8. Wrap the long strip of protector 3 completely around the motor. Diagram Information and Instructions Compass: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1194 Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 712 Page 13913 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4034 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12137 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2737 3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification. Drain plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket. 2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Fluid grade and capacity. CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approximately 3 minutes.) 3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 11334 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 12711 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7330 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 969 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 13140 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3750 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Page 2495 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front lower link (2). CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components". Toe-In TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. Page 1085 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8691 38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips. 39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body. 40. Pull the harness through the body. For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51 Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or differential lock 41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall. 42. Disconnect the control unit(s). 43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall. Page 1773 Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Steps 2 - 4) Page 2385 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 4393 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 13626 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7839 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 11923 Power Mirror Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7887 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5391 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10307 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8440 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13271 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: November 22, 2006 COMPONENT: Electrical System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500 SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear audio speakers are also contained in the harness. CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 13678 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5135 Case 4 Page 7699 Optional Splice Page 5560 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 12251 Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 9066 57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console. 58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place. 59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening. CAUTION: Page 1897 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Diagram Information and Instructions Power Mirror Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12956 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10834 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2277 Optional Splice Page 8962 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 843 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Page 12511 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 3 - 4) Page 7059 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Removal and Installation A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation Page 13091 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 14262 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13619 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5075 Case 2 Page 5258 Case 11 Page 2163 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13554 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 8781 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4887 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10927 ^ Refer to Table A shown above for Speaker Adaptation applicability. b. Use Table A to determine the correct Speaker Adaptation instructions to be used. c. Have the customer perform Speaker Adaptation. NOTE: This will enhance the recognition rate of commands spoken by the customer. Phone "Re-Pairing" 1. An incident or incidents may occur after a phone has been updated, or settings have been changed. 2. A given incident or incidents may be resolved by pairing a phone a second time. 3. For "re-pairing" procedure, the steps below can be followed: a. Turn off the phone, and then remove its battery. b. Delete the phone from the current paired phone list on the vehicle Bluetooth(R) phone system. c. Reinstall the phone battery, and then turn on the phone. d. Follow the phone pairing instructions found in the device page of the www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth webpage. e. Test the phone. f. If the incident(s) still occurs, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. Customer Information Inform the customer of the website www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ for future reference. Page 8783 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13499 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1976 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 8537 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9870 Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the ambient temperature, refer to the table. Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 1 - 2) Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Hydraulic System Incomplete air bleeding causes the following. When this happens, bleed air again. ^ Air bubbles in reservoir tank. ^ Clicking noise in oil pump. ^ Excessive buzzing in oil pump. NOTE: When vehicle is stationary or while steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may be heard from oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system. 1. Stop engine, and then turn steering wheel fully to right and left several times. CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and add fluid as needed. 2. Run engine at idle speed. Turn steering wheel fully right and then fully left, hold for about three seconds. Then check for fluid leakage. 3. Repeat step 2 several times at about three second intervals. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. Check for air bubbles or cloudy fluid. 5. If air bubbles or cloudiness still exists, stop engine, perform steps 2 and 3 again until air bubbles or cloudiness does not exist. 6. Stop engine, check fluid level. Page 11060 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 4332 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11338 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 12982 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1279 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 616 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 7207 2. Inspect all six flange bolts (see Figures 1 and 2). a. If all six bolts are OK, loosen the flange bolts approximately half-turn and re-torque the bolts to 73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb). Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Do NOT use an air tool to loosen the flange bolts. b. If one or more flange bolts, ^ are missing ^ can be turned using a hand tool using minimal force ^ has a visible gap between the bolt head and the flange (see Figure 3) Continue with step 3. 3. Remove the flange bolts. NOTE: Make sure you mark the drive shaft (axle) and mating differential side flange for proper re-assembly. 4. Inspect the following items for damage: ^ both drive shaft (axle) flange and differential side flange mating surfaces ^ bolt holes and bolt hole threads See below examples of OK and NG conditions. a. If no damage is found, replace all flange bolts and torque bolts to 73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb). Submit a claim for the repair and return the Page 8818 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2319 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 11303 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9858 After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 4 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Page 5150 Case 3 Page 9890 Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : - (J-38873-A) 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. Navigation System Component Parts Location Page 6687 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 13543 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 11731 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 3829 Page 6549 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8137 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 7900 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components" (front disc brake), "Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. Page 14266 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9915 Figure B-7 - The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud. 9. Measure the fan motor speed (RPM) and the fan motor voltage as follows: a. Turn the Fan Motor Tester ON. NOTE: In the ON position, the LED light on the switch will illuminate yellow. b. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer. WARNING: Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes (including your own). b. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan. c. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade. Figure B-8 Page 2507 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 3931 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 83 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 9719 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 608 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 11030 Optional Splice Page 4999 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 2830 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 12094 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12226 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5137 Case 6 Page 5323 Case 4 Page 12747 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 12374 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6545 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10022 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3398 Available Valve Lifter Page 13920 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1622 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13929 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5) Page 9712 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4753 Page 6685 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 10268 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Technician Safety Information Information Bus: Technician Safety Information Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems. WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? - If YES, GO TO 2. - If NO, GO TO 5. 2. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? - If YES, GO TO 3. - If NO, GO TO 4. 3. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. 4. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results. 5. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-5, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW". See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Strategies/Work Flow Page 9342 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8486 Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Page 6637 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2483 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 9829 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Locations Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 829 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 214 Repair Flow Chart Specifications Page 13548 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3207 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Changing Engine Oil WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer. CAUTION: ^ Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 7. Refill with new engine oil. CAUTION: ^ The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ^ Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Page 12420 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13074 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6327 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2086 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11040 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12777 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1503 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6799 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13874 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11015 AV-DVD-02 Page 63 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1499 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6552 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10587 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6253 Page 6236 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 1075 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9193 Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. - Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as necessary. Page 12993 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9937 Figure D-12, Figure D-13 - Align the protector along the 5 o'clock rib as shown. - Don't cover up the bolt hole. - Fold and stick the protector under the shroud. Page 1327 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4) Page 5064 Case 4 Page 2473 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 7439 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2096 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 769 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11831 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1892 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 6397 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10002 Medium Strength Thread-lock is available from the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Claims Information Submit a CM line claim using the following claims coding: Page 13668 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-004 Reference: NTB09-071 Date: August 4, 2009 TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) with V8 engine. IF YOU CONFIRM The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason; ACTION: Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin. CAUTION ^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs. CLAIMS INFORMATION Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Page 1754 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5004 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7001 Column Shift Models REMOVAL Floor shift 1. Remove A/T finisher. 2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. 3. Disconnect selector control cable. 4. Remove control device assembly. Column shift 1. Remove the column shift control. 2. Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin. INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. ^ After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position. Page 10988 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4975 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13491 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 10421 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3205 Engine Oil: Vehicle Damage Warnings SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). ^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. Page 2779 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Page 7966 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 11000 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8034 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 3235 CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 5. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by (star). b. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side. c. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown. M6 × 30 mm (1.18 inch): No. 15, 16 Page 10648 Page 4577 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3460 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12936 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 13997 Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9922 Figure C-8 a. Remove 3 screws from the front of the fender protector. - Driver side only. Figure C-9 b. Remove 2 bumper to fender screws. - Driver side only. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11217 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 6565 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14396 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4127 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13853 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4490 Page 16 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2798 Page 1748 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6613 Location of Electrical Parts Page 9821 Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9347 Page 3697 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8531 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 14293 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Specifications Fuel: Specifications Fuel Requirements Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (research octane number 91). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 8994 - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus Page 8759 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9909 Figure A-1 1. Look in the lower bumper area and locate the condenser fan motor. Figure A-2 Page 5242 Case 14 Page 13581 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2666 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 4945 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 8517 Page 3939 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 12058 Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 11108 Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11050 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 12678 Page 8395 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14275 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13090 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2063 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7915 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 13682 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 9497 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Page 14435 Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8725 k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown. l. Remove the center console from the vehicle. 9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit. 10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle: a. Move the jack out of the way. b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt. c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts. Page 6505 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 1097 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Power Seat Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Classification: BT05-052a Reference: NTB05-105a Date: October 31, 2008 FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest (V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)* ^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat). ^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat). APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*) 7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209 D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before: 15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates IF YOU CONFIRM: The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason. NOTE: Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include: - The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward. - While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked (crooked) on the seat tracks. - Noise from the slide motor or gears. ACTION: Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat adjuster assembly. IMPORTANT: Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 14312 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11820 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14160 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10874 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13692 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 5108 Case 7 Page 1811 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1397 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Mirror Adjustment Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Classification: BT06-005 Reference: NTB06-074 Date: October 30, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced. ACTION ^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly. ^ Replace only the door mirror actuator. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 7263 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Snap Ring Snap Ring - Model 2F1310 Snap Ring - Model 2S1350/3S1350 Page 4911 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4778 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 1055 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3821 Page 4343 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12596 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Resistor: Testing and Inspection DROPPING RESISTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector. 3. Check resistance between dropping resistor terminals as 1 and 2. Page 4653 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 10809 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8932 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing Cap Page 440 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10599 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12985 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Page 13648 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 13172 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9711 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 2937 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 10999 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12184 SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. Preliminary Steps NOTE: ^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags. ^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see Figure 1). 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with step 4 below. Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer 4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor. ^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2). ^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat. 6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2. ^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position. Page 8632 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 12361 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1536 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Ambient Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ambient Sensor The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a value which is then input into the front air control. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33 degree C (0.6 degree F) per 100 seconds. This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 14032 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 4860 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 754 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 8550 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results Display Item List Page 12071 9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for reassembly. Page 567 Page 11316 LT-T/TOW-03 Page 11317 LT-T/TOW-04 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 7987 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 9697 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 36 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8593 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12154 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3633 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13269 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12147 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4674 Page 7556 3. Remove companion flange self-lock nut, using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 ( - ) 4. Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with the mark on the companion flange. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive shaft. Do not damage the front drive shaft. 5. Remove companion flange, using suitable tool. 6. Remove front oil seal from front case, using Tool. Tool number: KV381054S0 (J-34286) CAUTION: Do not damage the front case. INSTALLATION Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3025 1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. 2. Install the camshaft sprocket to the camshaft. 3. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout. Runout: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^ If any damage is found, replace the valve lifter. ^ Select the thickness of the head so that the valve clearance is within the standard when replacing. Valve Lifter Clearance Valve Lifter Diameter ^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter. Standard: 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch) Valve Lifter Hole Diameter ^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool. Standard: 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch) Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) - (valve lifter diameter) Page 12548 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7702 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13348 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 859 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11910 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5042 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced 1. Put a check mark to "No indication" if some of unit names listed on the column of diagnosis system selection screen of a check sheet table are not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen attached to the check sheet. NOTE: Put a check mark to "No indication" of AUTO DRIVE POS. because AUTO DRIVE POS. is not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed from the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen of "ENGINE" attached to the check sheet, and then put a check mark to the check sheet table. NOTE: In "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen, "UNKWN" is displayed on "VDC/TCS/ABS", "METER/M&A;", "BCM/SEC" and "IPDM E/R". Put a check mark to it. 3. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed on the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen of "A/T" as well as "ENGINE". And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table. Page 10638 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4218 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 717 Page 7568 4. Remove bolts and detach control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply petroleum jelly. 2. Install transfer control device. a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod. b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. Page 2769 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Contaminated Refrigerant Contaminated Refrigerant If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: - Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. - Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. - Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. - If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. - If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Page 13621 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13966 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 13317 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1199 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 913 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12562 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 6947 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 11825 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4481 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1906 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 5097 Case 11 Page 14030 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8163 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 784 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 657 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification Seat Belt Tensioner: Recalls Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: November 22, 2006 COMPONENT: Electrical System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500 SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear audio speakers are also contained in the harness. CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3742 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 758 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 6717 Page 41 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1771 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 6454 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10502 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14313 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7744 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 6781 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 10917 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 6876 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11734 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) (Step 1) Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) (Step 2) Page 5322 Case 3 Page 10227 Page 5559 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 11165 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2668 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 3621 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3031 Camshaft: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers. 2. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder. 3. Remove the RH bank and LH bank timing chain case cover. 4. Paint alignment marks on the RH bank (A) timing chain links (C) LH (B) timing chain links (D) and aligning with the camshaft sprocket alignment marks (E) and (F). 5. Remove the LH bank timing chain tensioner using the following steps. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. Page 8450 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1566 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy. 5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical connector. 6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal. Page 10484 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1032 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9103 31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool. 32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40. 33. Remove the rear door panel. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. Page 10352 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9741 Optional Splice Page 14475 Page 14378 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1439 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 12479 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8333 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10418 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 321 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9988 Figure D-4 3. Install Protector 1 around the fan harness: - Wrap / roll the protector tightly around the harness. - While holding the protector rolled tightly, remove the adhesive backing and secure the protector. NOTE: The protector should slide on the harness. Figure D-5 4. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 2 and install it around protector 1: - Fingers / slits on protector 2 must be facing the fan motor. - Align the bottom of protector 2 fingers with the end of protector 1. Page 3520 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4813 Exploded View Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exploded View EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Exploded View Page 94 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9055 d. Take the harness branch loose from the body. 17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt. 18. Remove the lower side finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt. 20. Remove the harness ground bolt. 21. Remove the floor mat holder. Page 12727 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2347 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Step 3) Page 12660 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 13077 Tachometer: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9060 34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure. NOTE: The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown). 35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract; remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt. ^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt. NOTE: Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and state regulations. 36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points. 37. Pull the harness out of the door. Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) Locations Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Classification: EM-08-002 Reference: NTB08-058 Date: June 6, 2008 TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt. ACTION A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this Service Procedure. B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it. C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs. D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2456 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 4248 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1447 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4986 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3070 ^ Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft. ^ Measure at No. 3 journal using suitable tool. ^ While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer. ^ Half of the movement shows the runout. Limit: Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft. Page 5219 Case 8 Page 923 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 307 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5279 Case 13 Page 479 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6660 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11198 Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5629 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 7339 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 2799 Page 13764 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 4) Page 12434 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 9037 ^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors. ^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the Update Kit. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. ^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories. NOTE: ^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed. ^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. Page 10212 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. 3. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 4. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipes from the expansion valve. 5. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 6. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 7. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair 8. Remove the steering column. 9. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to "Harness Layout". 10. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. Page 1033 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2977 8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring retainer to remove it. CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press. 10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press. Tool number: ST30031000 CAUTION: ^ Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft. ^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 12. Remove the wheel bearing cage. NOTE: ^ If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. ^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Axle Shaft ^ Clean and remove all nicks and burrs. ^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary. ^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary. ^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch) Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^ Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Housing ^ Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary INSTALLATION 1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. 2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 9634 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 5 - 8) Locations Location of Electrical Parts A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 5061 Case 1 Page 8760 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5633 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 9623 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 16 - 18) Page 14168 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1183 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3529 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12423 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 14073 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3602 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6870 Page 9694 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 576 Page 6948 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 14147 condition. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches) ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons. ^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it. Page 3177 Disclaimer Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and confirm: ^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt and ^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming. 4. Remove intake duct and engine cover. 5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6. 6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual for removal procedure. 7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist. 8. Remove front right wheel. 9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure. 10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts). 11. Check the pulley alignment as follows: Brake Booster Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster With ABS or ABLS BRAKE BOOSTER REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. ^ Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. ^ Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads. ^ Attach the check valve in the correct direction. 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove engine air duct assembly. 3. Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. 5. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. 6. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 7. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 8. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection 1. Using a suitable vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) to brake booster. 2. Check output rod length. Standard dimension when vacuum -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg): 15.6 - 15.9 mm (0.614 0.626 inch) Page 9129 Page 8922 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only) - Front wipers - Tail, parking, and license lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab) INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE - When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto Page 4515 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Page 6765 Page 7317 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7589 Components REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device. Page 7167 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake cleaner. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. Page 10190 2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3). 3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3). 4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3. ^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness. Page 10573 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12429 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5124 Case 7 Page 1301 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11305 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5511 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5410 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13249 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-004 Reference: NTB09-071 Date: August 4, 2009 TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) with V8 engine. IF YOU CONFIRM The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason; ACTION: Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin. CAUTION ^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs. CLAIMS INFORMATION Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Page 13866 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13498 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6402 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13164 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Specifications Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications Valve Lifter Available Valve Lifter Page 8021 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Drain and Refill Drain and Refill CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. ^ Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out. Bleed air. Page 13870 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10827 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6990 Shifter A/T: Adjustments Adjustment of A/T Position 1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in "P" position. 3. After pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 Nm (1 kg-m, 2.2 ft. lbs.), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut: 14.5 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Page 12377 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 9835 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7963 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 14486 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Automatic Air Conditioner Air Duct: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner DUCTS AND GRILLES Page 12051 19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8). 20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8). 21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of Figure 8). Figure 9 22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9). 23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the seat frame and move both seat tracks back into position on top of the seat track mounting tabs. Figure 10 CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is operated. Figure 11 Page 1501 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14158 Optional Splice Page 5384 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 3995 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1165 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12934 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14233 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8058 Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position. 1. Remove the rear disc rotor. 2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Disconnect the rear cable from the toggle lever, if necessary. ^ Remove pin retainer and withdraw cable end from toggle lever. 5. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to PB-6, "COMPONENTS" and apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly. Page 13577 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14339 1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly. ^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM. 2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal. ^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal. 3. Replace washer pump seal. NOTE: Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation. 4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank. 5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Page 6607 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3178 A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the pump pulley. See Figure 2. B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See Figure 3. NOTE: The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the crankshaft pulley. ^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17. ^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12. Page 13625 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5573 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 10251 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54± 0.11 lb) Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS", or see "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 6320 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 574 Page 1534 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6530 c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 811 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 6841 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid Checking A/T Fluid 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any fluid leaks. 3. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt. 4. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30° to 50°C (86° to 122°F) using the "COLD" range on the ATF level gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the "P" position. c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the ATF level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. CAUTION: When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a cloth. e. Re-insert the ATF level gauge into the charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe as shown. CAUTION: To check fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position. f. Remove the ATF level gauge and note the fluid level. If the fluid level is at low side of range, add fluid to the transmission through the charging pipe. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with fluid. 5. Drive the vehicle to increase the ATF temperature to 80°C (176°F). Page 4559 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12472 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5153 Case 6 Page 7391 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9727 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14354 1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly. ^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM. 2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal. ^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal. 3. Replace washer pump seal. NOTE: Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation. 4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank. 5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Page 14163 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7746 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 3901 Page 10972 8. Re-install (2) 10 mm screws. Torque to 3.6 Nm (0.37 Kg-m, 32 in-lb.) 9. Raise DVD screen. Disclaimer Page 11146 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13739 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14035 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1195 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5481 Page 3571 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 3735 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8500 Engine Control Component Parts Location Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding Brake System Image Symbols Page 1438 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3136 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Cowl: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Classification: BT07-011 Reference: NTB07-034 Date: may 9, 2007 2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed. NOTE: If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see NTB05-112. ACTIONS 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. 3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak. 4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate warranty claims coding. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. ^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine wall. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. ^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor. Page 1691 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 6724 Page 10000 Figure E-5 5. Take the wire you removed from connector E120 and put it into the Maxi Fuse connector. Make sure to put it in the correct slot as shown in Figure E-5. 6. Insert the wire from the Maxi Fuse into the slot of connector E120 (see Figure E-5). NOTE: - The terminals will not snap in upside down. - If the terminal won't snap-in, you are trying to put it in upside down; turn it over. 7. Reconnect connector E120. 8. Connect the Maxi Fuse connector. Page 9943 - Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations as needed. 17. Return to Procedure C (step 10) for fan assembly installation. Procedure E - Install Maxi Fuse (Install the Maxi Fuse only when a new fan is installed) Figure E-1 NOTE: Maxi Fuse is installed only when replacing the fan motor assembly with a new one. The battery should already be disconnected and the radio station presets should have been recorded before removing the fan motor at the beginning of procedure C. Figure E-2 1. Remove the IPDM E/R upper cover. - IPDM E/R = Intelligent Power Distribution Module, Engine Room. 2. Remove the relay and fuse cover. Page 10918 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 2052 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5040 ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II Attach the data acquired by CONSULT-II on the check sheet determined according to CAN system type.(For display control unit, transfer the data from the display screen of the vehicle to the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet "CAN Communication Line Check".) Page 13065 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6673 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9176 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 9776 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13988 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 5695 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 128 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7188 2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 423 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 1262 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Page 4099 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Page 7334 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12559 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13895 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13478 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8614 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7168 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 8726 d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. NOTE: Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle. 11. Remove the front kick plate. Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. 12. Remove the rear kick plate; ^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. Page 89 Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. Remove the rear panel. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the sonar control unit. 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the sonar control unit bolts and remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 937 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3299 Image Symbols Page 9522 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 4335 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Service and Repair Carpet: Service and Repair FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove front seats. 2. Remove rear seats. 3. Remove lower seat belt anchors. 4. Remove lower body side trim. 5. Remove center console, if equipped. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 6. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet. Page 14254 Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4915 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Page 6013 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13135 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5407 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9239 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 3156 Drive Belt: Specifications DRIVE BELTS Page 9761 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 2803 Optional Splice Page 973 ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 6273 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 4449 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 12311 13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert. ^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench. ^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece. CAUTION: Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer. 14. Make sure the organizer sides freely. ^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose: a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the end of the plastic insert. Page 8451 Page 236 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 1109 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6786 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 4908 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 858 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4870 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 598 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 5691 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3065 MAIN BEARING MAIN BEARING Undersize Undersize Page 10633 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5157 Case 10 Page 2119 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 596 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 5603 Page 8833 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6931 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6300 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8855 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Page 1955 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5243 Case 15 Case 16 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 193 5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3). Page 9663 Removal and Installation AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) Removal 1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) Removal 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. Installation Page 8775 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1041 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11356 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4400 Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 8882 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 6991 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation Floor Shift Models Page 13004 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2195 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation Occupant Classification System (OCS) The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-II can be used to confirm the passenger air bag status (readiness). Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions Page 2978 4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. ^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch). ^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and seat. CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct direction. 5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. ^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point. 6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. 10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor. Axle Bearing Removal and Installation The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 13265 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 11287 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1516 Page 5043 NOTE: For "A/T", "UNKWN" is displayed on "VDC/TCS/ABS", "METER/M&A;", "ICC/e4WD" and "AWD/4WD". But put a check mark to "VDC/TCS/ABS" and "METER/M&A;" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table. 4. Display control unit reads the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B) "CAN Communication Line Check" transferred from the display screen (A). The transferred CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet is copied to the Check sheet, and conversed according to the Display control unit Translation Sheet (C). And then put a check mark to the check sheet table. Page 2578 17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves. ^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush. ^ Do not use a power tool. 18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy. 19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for installation procedure. 20. Connect harness clips. 21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure. 22. Install front right wheel. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first. 25. Start engine. 26. Confirm the issue is resolved. 27. Reprogram the radio presets. 28. Reinitialize the power sunroof. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5896 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10258 Page 511 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 873 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6503 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8352 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5408 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1016 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 58 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1789 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8402 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 774 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9779 Blower speed control system components are: - Front air control - Variable blower control - Front blower motor relay - Front blower motor - In-vehicle sensor - Ambient sensor - Optical sensor - Intake sensor System Operation Automatic Mode In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control and variable blower control based on input from the in-vehicle sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor, and potentio temperature control (PTC). When the air flow is increased, the blower motor speed is adjusted gradually to prevent a sudden increase in air flow. In addition to manual air flow control and the usual automatic air flow control, starting air flow control, low water temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting control are available. Starting Blower Speed Control Start up from cold soak condition (Automatic mode). In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 50 degrees C (122 degrees F), the blower will not operate at blower speed 1 for a short period of time (up to 210 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the ambient and engine coolant temperatures. In the most extreme case (very low ambient temperature) the blower starting delay will be 210 seconds as described above. After the coolant temperature reaches 50 degrees C (122 degrees F), or the 210 seconds has elapsed, the blower speed will increase to the objective blower speed. Start up from usual operating or hot soak condition (Automatic mode). The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO switch is pushed. The blower speed will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective blower speed). Blower Speed Compensation - Sunload When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low speed. The speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of low or no sunload, the blower operates at low speed. During high sunload conditions, the front air control causes the blower speed to increase. Page 5631 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 10032 Page 8082 Repair Flow Chart Page 7704 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4394 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 14018 Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13828 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13152 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10302 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 2954 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding Brake System Image Symbols Page 818 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 4283 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 204 4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18). NOTE: If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *. * This is found in ASIST under: CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info. CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING: ^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur. ^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming. ^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during reprogramming. * You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1. 5. Press [START]. See Figure 18. ^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear. ^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF. ^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started. Page 12409 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 14422 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6817 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3808 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque Technical Service Bulletin # 06-012 Date: 060214 Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque Reference: NTB06-012 Date: February 14, 2006 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN FRONT AXLE FLANGE BOLTS (4WD) CAMPAIGN I.D. # : PB014 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 Titan (A60) - 4WD ONLY 2006 Armada (TA60) - 4WD ONLY APPLIED VINS: Titan: 1N6*A0*B*6N500000 - 541440 Armada: 5N1AA08B*6N700001 - 721614 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION On some 2006 model year Nissan Titan and Armada four-wheel drive equipped vehicles, there is the possibility that the bolts attaching the front drive shafts to the front final drive assembly may not have been tightened properly. This may result in the front drive shafts coming loose and cause a vibration or noise in the vehicle front end. If the front drive shaft becomes disconnected, it may be damaged or cause damage to other vehicle components. However, the ability to control the vehicle will not be affected. Nissan is conducting a Service Campaign to retighten the front drive shaft bolts to the proper specification. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PBO14 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is 22,100. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (PBO14) which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Page 374 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9815 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8817 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5848 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10501 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Page 12006 19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8). 20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8). 21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of Figure 8). Figure 9 22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9). 23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the seat frame and move both seat tracks back into position on top of the seat track mounting tabs. Figure 10 CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is operated. Figure 11 Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1860 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 3732 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4569 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 8906 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13804 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7208 vehicle to the customer. b. If damage is found, go to step 5. 5. Replace damaged parts as needed. ^ Refer to the applicable service manual for replacement procedures. ^ Make sure all mating surfaces and parts are clean before re-assembly. ^ Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Do NOT use an air tool to install the bolts. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2688 2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. 3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the cooling system. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. 5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ^ Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level Vacuum gauge reading 0 - 100 m (328 ft.): 28 inches of vacuum 300 m (984 ft.): 27 inches of vacuum 500 m (1,641 ft.): 26 inches of vacuum 1,000 m (3,281 ft.): 24 - 25 inches of vacuum 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. Page 931 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5853 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4291 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 8627 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results Display Item List Page 812 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Page 1888 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7217 Repair Flow Chart SERVICE PROCEDURE Inspect the six flange bolts that hold the front drive shaft (axle) to the front differential side flange as follows. NOTE: Perform this procedure on both the LH and RH front drive shafts (axles). 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Page 1572 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 13950 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 2371 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 633 Page 1720 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 804 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1883 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1896 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 1445 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 408 - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus Specifications Page 10486 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5499 Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1082 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 11926 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14268 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 11153 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1314 Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3) Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection Page 11009 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13964 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Service and Repair Tailgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair GAS STAY Removal WARNING: The gas stay is under high pressure. Remove the gas stay only with the tailgate fully closed. Injury may result if the gas stay is removed when the tailgate is open. 1. Remove the RH rear combination lamp assembly. 2. Remove the gas stay. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10643 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 2462 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4571 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1786 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9036 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Required Special Tools Page 1508 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3879 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 1759 - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : -- (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. Page 1268 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2072 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 13875 Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 3 - 4) Automatic Air Conditioner Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Mode Door Motor Circuit Mode Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Air outlet does not change. - Mode door motor does not operate normally. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Page 9249 Components REMOVAL Page 3221 EM-3 Page 198 CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE (SEE FIGURE 10). ^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer (download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur. ^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK". Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6. 9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II. a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8). b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK". ^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration. Page 2166 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5309 Case 9 Page 6679 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 12941 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10001 Figure E-6 9. Position the Maxi Fuse, wires, and connector into the IPDM E/R box as shown in Figure E-6. 10. Reinstall the IPDM E/R cover and the relay / fuse cover. 11. Connect the negative battery cable. 12. Reprogram the radio presets and set the clock. 13. Go to Procedure F. Procedure F - Confirm Fan Operation 1. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Select START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) > ENGINE > ACTIVE TEST > COOLING FAN 4. Use CONSULT-II to turn the condenser fan ON and then make sure the condenser fan is running. 5. Turn CONSULT-II OFF, turn the ignition OFF, and disconnect CONSULT-II from the vehicle. Parts Information Page 1675 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Step 1) Page 13381 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3263 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the engine coolant. WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine coolant when the engine is hot. 2. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 3. Release the fuel pressure. 4. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube quick connector on the engine side. Page 373 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 6155 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 14127 FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. 5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10653 Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 180 2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then a. Press [VDC] b. Review all precautions C. Press [NEXT] 3. Select the program data (see Figure 17). Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 5337 Case 19 Case 20 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 5373 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Heater Core Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Classification: HA07-002 Reference: NTB07-017 Date: March 8, 2007 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason, ACTION Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point. NOTE: In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 6721 Page 8261 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 4227 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8434 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1156 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9867 Compressor Clutch: Specifications Manual Air Conditioner Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance .............................................................................................................................................. 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) Page 8139 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9889 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. 5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. 6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. INSPECTION Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10725 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal - Bucket Seat 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher. 3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. 4. Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector. Installation - Bucket Seat CAUTION: - Passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. - On passenger seat during installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they were originally in. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1435 Optional Splice Page 5748 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Page 11204 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8711 ^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors. ^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the Update Kit. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. ^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories. NOTE: ^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed. ^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. Page 9806 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 454 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8982 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 10504 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12990 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12883 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Page 2834 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 3608 Page 7303 Optional Splice Service and Repair Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components CAUTION: ^ Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ^ After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lbs.), replace key interlock cable with new one. Removal 1. Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable. 2. Remove casing cap from bracket. Page 8692 44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. NOTE: The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near the sonar control unit. 45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown in the figure below. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. Page 10207 5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice. 6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach. 7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape. Page 10769 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. Page 10603 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 7089 2. Remove carrier cover. ^ Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover. ^ Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover. 4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Page 3145 17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves. ^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush. ^ Do not use a power tool. 18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy. 19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for installation procedure. 20. Connect harness clips. 21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure. 22. Install front right wheel. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first. 25. Start engine. 26. Confirm the issue is resolved. 27. Reprogram the radio presets. 28. Reinitialize the power sunroof. Page 4737 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 14175 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1694 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 265 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 789 Page 14193 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5794 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 68 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13464 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5179 Case 1 Page 14496 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10413 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 287 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13403 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6295 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM) Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased. Page 6771 Page 5416 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9979 Figure C-12 7. Remove 2 nuts from the air bag sensor. - Position the sensor out of the way. WARNING: Do not drop or otherwise impact the air bag sensor. 8. Remove the condenser fan mounting bolt. Figure C-13 9. Pull the bumper forward and remove the fan. If your fan motor tested OK in Procedure B: a. Go to Procedure D to install the Fan Motor Protective covers. - Protective Covering Kit is listed in the Parts Information. b. Return here for installation of the fan assembly. If your fan motor tested NG in Procedure B: Page 11550 7. Remove three 10 mm door panel bolts, behind arm rest (see Figure 3). NOTE: Bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove. 8. Remove seatbelt retractor cover (see Figure 4) 9. Remove door panel. a. Start at the lower left corner, where the seatbelt retractor cover was. b. From there, "pop" the clips off working around the panel in a counter-clockwise direction. Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12049 - Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the underside of the seat. Figure 3 10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame. 11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears". Figure 4 12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4). 13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4). Figure 5 14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5). 15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this bolt first" in Figure 5). Page 12075 Power Seat Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1238 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 10308 Page 5295 Case 12 Page 13933 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 4267 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 9240 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Page 8513 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2012 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Classification: HA07-002 Reference: NTB07-017 Date: March 8, 2007 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason, ACTION Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point. NOTE: In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1573 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 7 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FENDER PROTECTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove front mudguard. 2. Remove screws. 3. Remove plastic clips. 4. Remove pushpins. 5. Remove front fender protector. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6789 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 11228 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11142 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 13502 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 803 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 9637 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 16 - 19) Page 14133 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 11796 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 245 Optional Splice Page 6642 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1640 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove cluster lid A. 2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13513 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 4111 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9885 5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. 6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. INSPECTION Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. INSTALLATION Page 8394 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6197 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Page 12794 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 9651 Intake Doors Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motor The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Page 4493 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 10024 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5654 On-Board Inspection Brake Fluid: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection On-board Inspection LEVEL CHECK ^ Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is within the standard (between MAX and MIN lines). ^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. ^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. ^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake system for fluid leakage. Page 8439 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7859 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 13324 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1738 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5740 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 7022 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14410 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1805 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 8679 d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws. ^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also. 1 screw on each side. e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise. f. Lift and remove the shift finisher. ^ Disconnect electrical connectors. g. Disconnect the shift cable. ^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park. Page 406 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional/Related Diagrams For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power and Ground Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution/Wiring Diagram Index IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 10886 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 9496 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2561 ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with white arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC Page 8418 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14400 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10071 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3848 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 4051 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5080 Case 7 Page 10487 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5331 Case 12 Page 4584 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12632 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14399 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6333 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12963 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 7793 e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay". 8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8): a. Make sure: ^ CONSULT-II is OFF. ^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II. ^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II. ^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port. b. Turn CONSULT-II ON. c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN". NOTE: If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8. d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC. Page 6546 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13949 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14059 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 264 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7162 CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake cleaner. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 1623 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3754 - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: - Ignition switch - Key switch (insert) - Hazard switch - Main door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab) - Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Part 1 Page 9518 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 13067 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 2178 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11826 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11041 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12830 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 14123 immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the glass in case of an accident. CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 3663 10. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below. - Arrow indicates Front - A: Exhaust manifold (LH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Remove the oil level gauge guide. . e. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as shown using power tool. f. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B). INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion - Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) - If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. Page 3853 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking Classification: RA09-005 Reference: NTB10-032 Date: February 26, 2010 2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6406 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6158 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4837 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 3257 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ^ Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position. 1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure sensor. 5. Install Tools. Tool number : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2) 6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load. CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. 8. After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows: a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running. Page 3632 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Testing and Inspection Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12706 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8306 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10838 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11934 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11989 Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 3468 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 5092 Case 6 Page 9617 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 19 - 22) Page 12206 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Power Window System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4697 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 10816 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9977 Figure C-8 a. Remove 3 screws from the front of the fender protector. - Driver side only. Figure C-9 b. Remove 2 bumper to fender screws. - Driver side only. Page 6880 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6883 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 2304 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7705 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 50 Optional Splice Page 2083 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 4758 Page 10191 5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice. 6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach. 7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape. Page 4274 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7838 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5125 Case 8 Page 5145 Case 15 Case 16 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 14146 ^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less than 1 mm in diameter. NOTE: A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the crack "branches out". Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass. ^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty. 2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface. Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone, and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on the same scale). Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily scratched by: ^ Fine sand particles ^ Hard metal ^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry Page 6392 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8927 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 6256 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6412 Page 12981 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6419 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5639 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 756 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 12468 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2667 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Low-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Low-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe Page 13690 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2435 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 7557 1. Install new front oil seal until it is flush with end face of front case, using Tool. Tool number: KV38100500 CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. 2. Align the matching mark of the front drive shaft with the matching mark of the companion flange, then install the companion flange. 3. Tighten new self-lock nut to the specified torque, using Tool. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Tool number: KV40104000 CAUTION: Do not reuse self-lock nut. 4. Install front propeller shaft. 5. Refill the transfer fluid and check fluid level and for fluid leakage. Page 2365 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11364 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4163 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 14092 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1) Page 7906 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from the dash lower panel using Tool. Tool number: - (J-46532) 2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forwardmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. Brake Pedal Specifications ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. Page 1205 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11002 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5858 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5417 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5089 Case 3 VDC/TCS/ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 13711 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10658 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Center Speaker Speaker: Service and Repair Center Speaker CENTER SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D. 3. Remove the center speaker screws and remove the center speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3904 Page 2761 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a) Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 6733 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 11168 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13798 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1076 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3512 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8668 Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors) 1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back). 2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts. NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side. OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2. Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored) Automatic Air Conditioner Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the evaporator. 3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve bolts : 4 N.m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb) A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : Refer to "Components" CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 13914 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13088 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5168 Case 4 Page 831 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 10980 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 4047 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Valve Lifter Rear Sonar System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11388 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 10811 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11365 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1418 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 2494 Components Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 9489 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 7998 3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1). 4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed. ^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body. 5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service. Page 6766 Page 12573 Optional Splice Page 8283 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 8492 Component Parts Location Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 13259 Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14200 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6695 2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 11353 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5352 DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Page 8291 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9584 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4220 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3701 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11886 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 6239 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10657 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 7621 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13333 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 5342 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 7622 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6475 Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5260 Case 13 Page 1607 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14295 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 6469 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4686 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 13743 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13811 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6641 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12053 Figure 15 28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure the distance has not changed (see Figure 15). - If N/G, adjust. Figure 16 29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16). - Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm) Figure 17 30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17). Page 11583 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair OIL FILTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number: KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ^ The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. ^ Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. ^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.) 4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. 5. Install the engine front undercover using power tool. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required. Page 6988 A/T Electrical Parts Location Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12966 - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : -- (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. Page 9987 Figure D-2A NOTE: You may see clips (fan balance weights) on the fan blades. DO NOT move or remove the fan balance weights. Figure D-3 In the next few steps you will be installing these four self adhesive protectors. NOTE: Make sure your hands are completely clean. Dirt and oil on your hands can contaminate adhesive material and reduce its adhesion. Page 8269 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 13386 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7791 ^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE ^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY! ^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure. 7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows: a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5). Page 14067 Page 13085 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 370 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6543 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4680 Attachment General Procedure Page 13633 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13127 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5601 Page 1061 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4568 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14161 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7427 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 3211 ^ Confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler or oil pan. ^ Tighten the connecting bolt after aligning the stopper on the oil pan side with protrusion of the oil cooler. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check levels and add engine oil and engine coolant. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil and engine coolant. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level again. Page 5851 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8699 b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove. c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly. Use plastic trim tool as shown. d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers. Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1513 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 7099 Location of Electrical Parts Page 4752 Page 13331 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 12297 4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate. 5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows: CAUTION: Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the plastic panel. a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic insert. b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as shown in Figure 4. c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the tube. NOTE: If the insert is difficult to remove: Page 13948 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9770 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8717 ^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the tube. ^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6. 10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7). ^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch). Page 13847 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8819 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1143 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 4106 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM) Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased. Page 5155 Case 8 Page 6568 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 11183 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12870 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 782 Page 8119 ^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see Figure 10). c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8). ^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically. d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II. Procedure Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card CAUTION: ^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections. ^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5. Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s). Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input". Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming. Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTCs. Section 1 Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp "trickle charge"). IMPORTANT You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't. Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain: ^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II battery is low. ^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on during reprogramming. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure 11). Page 11942 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12638 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8990 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 174 e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay". 8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8): a. Make sure: ^ CONSULT-II is OFF. ^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II. ^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II. ^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port. b. Turn CONSULT-II ON. c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN". NOTE: If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8. d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC. Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 13560 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Display Item List - Data Monitor With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 194 6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4). Page 6425 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 465 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13280 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 9632 System Operation The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the defroster switch. When the defroster switch is depressed, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts. In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines defroster door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Defroster door motor The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The front air control sends a voltage to rotate to the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door. Page 13534 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1608 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5632 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 11806 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 4434 ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder. 12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. Page 9165 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 8293 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Step 1) Page 9465 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 12485 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5274 Case 8 Page 7219 vehicle to the customer. b. If damage is found, go to step 5. 5. Replace damaged parts as needed. ^ Refer to the applicable service manual for replacement procedures. ^ Make sure all mating surfaces and parts are clean before re-assembly. ^ Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Do NOT use an air tool to install the bolts. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 8609 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 7787 3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released. IMPORTANT: Do not push the brake pedal until step 6. 4. Start the engine and let it idle. ^ Keep the transmission in Park. 5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor. 6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release. NOTE: 2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height". 7. Repeat step 6 ten times. ^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step. 8. Repeat steps 2 though 7. ^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Part 2 Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. This part of the procedure involves two general steps: ^ Setting up ^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card). SETTING UP: 1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1). CAUTION: Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card. Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Page 10976 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2268 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Page 8278 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3673 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated/missing band clamp(s). ^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed. Page 8586 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1054 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11699 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 12248 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 5745 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 10721 FRONT RH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove RH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM for removal procedure. 2. Remove screw and seat cushion outer finisher. 3. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle. Page 13561 Page 4629 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Body - Soft Tonneau Cover Retrofit Kit Truck Bed Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Soft Tonneau Cover Retrofit Kit Classification: BT05-055 Reference: NTB06-002 Date: January 11, 2006 TITAN; SOFT TONNEAU COVER RETROFIT KIT APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Titan (A60), Crew Cab, King Cab IF YOU CONFIRM Any part of the soft tonneau cover (minus frame) needs to be replaced. ACTION Install the complete retrofit kit listed below. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE INFORMATION Remove the original soft tonneau cover and install the complete soft tonneau cover retrofit kit as per the instructions included with the kit. Note: The soft tonneau cover retrofit kit is intended to fit slightly looser (not as taut) than the original. Disclaimer Page 3824 A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 11147 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5912 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1186 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13279 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7179 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove brake calipers and rotors. 4. Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times. 5. Record the rotating torque. 6. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 7. Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. 8. Remove companion flange using a suitable tool. 9. Remove front oil seal using Tool. Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. INSTALLATION Page 13086 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9192 Alignment: Service and Repair The Alignment Process THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. Page 2646 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 12081 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Locations Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1405 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2520 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 8553 active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. Part 1 Part 2 - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 9784 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 15 - 18) Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Page 10003 "CM" I.D.: PB081 - 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM to confirm the correct campaign ID #. Page 2152 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4474 Optional Splice Page 13991 Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 1) Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 2) Page 10252 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3428 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7308 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3830 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 3932 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 13757 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 970 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 7232 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 1604 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2720 COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Page 162 Repair Flow Chart Page 13063 Optional Splice Page 1459 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13050 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13814 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1116 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 300 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10365 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4850 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 9080 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Required Special Tools Page 12991 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10083 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5058 Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Depending on the control unit which performs CAN communication, "U1010" may be indicated as the result of self-diagnosis. Replace the control unit if "U1010" is indicated. Page 82 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 12091 Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 8828 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 7068 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 12010 - Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment NOTE: You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset. Disclaimer Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 4783 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Step 3) Page 9614 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 9 - 12) Page 7872 CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 7794 CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE (SEE FIGURE 10). ^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer (download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur. ^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK". Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6. 9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II. a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8). b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK". ^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration. Page 8245 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 141 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 8675 16. Attach the new body clip to the body. Final Quality Check 17. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition ON. b. Look at the air bag light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) NOTE: ^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim, connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on. ^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly. Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side) ^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle (under the carpet) and inside the rear door. ^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image. 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full forward and full rearward). 3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position. 4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first. 5. Remove the front seat. a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts. b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors. Page 9357 5. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 6. Remove lower link cam bolts (1) and nuts, then the lower link (2). NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lower Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Lower Link Bushing Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation ^ After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Page 8502 Engine Control Component Parts Location A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 4442 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 1710 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12017 NOTE: - Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. - The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations. If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor. 1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP. 2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the connector, harness side, between the following color wires: NOTES: For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM). If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment. Figure 2 Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle you are working on may be different. - This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected. - If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward" positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor. - If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide motor. Remove Old Seat Slide Parts 3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure. 4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2). - Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access the seat mounting bolts. - Don't remove the seat yet. 5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle. - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 6. Turn the ignition key "OFF". 7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes. - This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front seat side air bags. 8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors. 9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface. Page 7030 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11332 Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Light Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For Children) System Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For Children) System LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. Page 801 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7109 9. Remove side bearing caps. 10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Page 6483 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3988 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4630 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 5697 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12914 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12424 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12473 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13083 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Front Suspension Page 14292 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13642 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4347 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 631 Page 8281 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4349 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5846 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2213 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7165 CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake cleaner. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-032 Date: 100226 Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking Classification: RA09-005 Reference: NTB10-032 Date: February 26, 2010 2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table. Page 7371 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 7278 2. Install the center support bearing on the propeller shaft tube using a suitable pipe pressing on the inner race. 3. Install the dust shield. 4. Install a new clamp over the boot on the slip yoke. 5. Align the matching marks and install the slip yoke on the propeller shaft tube. 6. Clean the surfaces and position the boot over the propeller shaft tube and tighten the clamp. 7. Install the center support bearing bracket, then install the rear propeller shaft assembly in the vehicle. Page 1328 Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 912 Page 6930 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7027 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11062 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 7436 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Automatic Air Conditioner Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 3. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 6. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipes from the expansion valve. 7. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair 8. Remove the steering column. 9. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". 10. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. Page 5159 Case 12 Page 5220 Case 9 Page 1850 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Description and Operation Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. Page 5413 Page 13383 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 5425 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2831 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10233 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Name:................................................................................................................................................ Nissan A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Page 7546 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine. Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD" position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6. Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 510 not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 8002 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 6835 Disclaimer Page 4704 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 787 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4922 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 4719 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 13408 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5490 Page 7745 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Classification: HA07-002 Reference: NTB07-017 Date: March 8, 2007 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason, ACTION Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point. NOTE: In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3266 NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lbs.). 5. Install the quick connector cap on the quick connector joint (on engine side only). 6. Install the fuel hose and tube to hose clamps. 7. Refill the engine coolant. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ After installing fuel tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps. ^ Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. ^ Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at the connections. ^ Perform procedures for "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ^ If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for "Idle Air Volume Learning" after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-85, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 13497 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10079 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3623 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9364 Components REMOVAL Page 9343 Lot Number Locations. Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation The optical sensor is located in the top center of the instrument panel. Page 2836 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11827 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 1172 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 8441 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 12732 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1910 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 13940 Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Label Description Page 9630 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 8 - 11) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Defroster Door Motor Circuit Defroster Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Defroster door does not change. Page 5689 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4757 Page 602 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 13274 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10720 7. Install seat belt buckle and bolt. 8. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on the seat pan. 9. Install seat cushion outer fininsher. 10. Install seat in reverse order of removal. Page 1646 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8235 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 744 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 12605 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6311 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1802 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5807 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2562 ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder. 12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. Page 3934 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 80 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 486 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 13736 Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6925 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10270 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8322 Optional Splice Page 7269 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the front propeller shaft or flange yoke. 2. Remove the snap ring. 3. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or yoke hole. 4. Remove the bearing at the opposite side in above operation. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. ASSEMBLY Journal Page 8240 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8397 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 390 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Testing and Inspection Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 6029 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 12825 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5204 Case 10 Page 11937 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6417 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 932 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12092 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 14398 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6304 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6472 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3180 17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves. ^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush. ^ Do not use a power tool. 18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy. 19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for installation procedure. 20. Connect harness clips. 21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure. 22. Install front right wheel. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first. 25. Start engine. 26. Confirm the issue is resolved. 27. Reprogram the radio presets. 28. Reinitialize the power sunroof. Page 8367 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7429 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9145 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 10649 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12826 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4455 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1912 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 1828 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12778 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 4015 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 5163 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 9523 Disclaimer Page 249 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10182 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. 5. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11697 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13047 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 849 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14381 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 4587 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Automatic Air Conditioner Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. Page 13893 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8188 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 10269 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8227 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10508 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13222 Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Steps 2 - 4) Page 6809 4. Remove bolts and detach control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply petroleum jelly. 2. Install transfer control device. a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod. b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. Page 12728 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10206 2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3). 3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3). 4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3. ^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness. Page 506 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 6249 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10981 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10349 Page 7035 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5191 Case 13 Case 14 Page 6846 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Drain A/T fluid. 2. Remove oil pan and gasket. 3. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, has some burned smell, or contains foreign particles, friction material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. CAUTION: If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair. 4. Remove magnets from oil pan. Installation 1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown. 2. Install the oil pan and new oil pan gasket. CAUTION: Page 8580 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10366 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8755 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 883 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3605 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8512 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1196 Page 3362 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: - Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. - Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 2620 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins. Page 13480 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11990 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 9813 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10228 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 14409 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12339 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 315 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6764 Page 2276 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 14298 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1111 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 7674 Location of Electrical Parts Page 5347 DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR BCM Page 10177 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 3 - 4) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE Page 6277 - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : -- (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. Page 4502 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 11006 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7618 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2066 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 10973 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H" and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds. 2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. ^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. ^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table. Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern 1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. Page 2228 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6482 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11164 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Automatic Air Conditioner Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2074 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4147 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9646 air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door. Air Mix Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motor (Front) The front air mix door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. This motor rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motor (front). Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Step 1) Page 12465 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. Page 8685 d. Take the harness branch loose from the body. 17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt. 18. Remove the lower side finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt. 20. Remove the harness ground bolt. 21. Remove the floor mat holder. Page 9151 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 8825 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4351 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5690 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 372 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10356 Page 8879 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6461 Optional Splice Page 13615 Optional Splice Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 11580 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 6302 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12601 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12309 A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown. B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube. C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert. D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the rubber o-ring. E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5. F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant. 6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer. ^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube. 7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies. ^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base. 8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks. Page 5393 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9350 PARTS INFORMATION Page 5334 Case 15 Page 12362 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5048 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Inspection Between TCM And Differential Lock Control Unit (Steps 1 - 2) Page 488 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7122 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly or around it. 2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Changing Final Drive Oil Changing Final Drive Oil Page 2809 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1485 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Page 736 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 7312 Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Seat Track: Customer Interest Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Classification: BT05-003a Reference: NTB05-010a Date: February 7, 2008 NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates have been updated. No other changes have been made. APPLIED VEHICLES APPLIED VINs / DATES IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat lifter. ACTIONS: ^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom. ^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information). NOTE: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 275 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 7886 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 13972 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1062 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) SRS Components Parts Location Page 5602 Page 13891 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13003 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 10714 8. Remove center seat belt retractor. 9. Remove center anchor bracket cover. 10. Remove push pins from center seat belt webbing sleeve. 11. Remove bolts from anchor bracket and remove center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 12. Remove center belt bracket from floor. 13. Remove seat belt buckles. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bracket bolts before seat installation. - Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bolt after seat installation with the seat cushion raised. Page 6882 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10982 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5572 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 3032 a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. b. Secure plunger using stopper pin. Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and the timing chain tensioner. NOTE: ^ Stop plunger in the fully extended position using return-proof clip 1 if stopper pin is removed. ^ Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using stopper pin 3. 6. Remove the RH bank timing chain tensioner cover from the front cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Remove the RH bank timing chain tensioner using the following steps. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. b. Secure plunger using stopper pin. ^ Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) in diameter. Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 928 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11315 LT-T/TOW-02 Page 3417 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary before installing the vented reservoir cap. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the "MAX" line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Page 525 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 8904 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12192 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 7813 6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4). Page 1831 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4135 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8004 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 10092 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 3604 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1287 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5025 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Page 3921 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 3152 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 6715 Page 1444 Page 13555 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14394 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6066 the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 5494 Locations Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 5522 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 3722 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change .......................................................................................................................................................... 6 1/2 qt. (5 1/2 Imp qts., 6.2 L) Without oil filter change ...................................................................................................................................................... 6 1/4 qt. (5 1/4 Imp qts., 5.9 L) Page 12546 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4336 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14226 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 6093 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 5000 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12629 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13575 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3654 ^ Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). ^ Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number : J-43879-12 : J-43897-18 CAUTION: ^ Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 11488 Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 1) Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 2) Page 1440 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 8779 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Page 6335 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14182 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5283 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 13784 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Step 3) Page 6537 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12330 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14471 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11396 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 915 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13667 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12725 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12551 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12547 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 11462 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 13930 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2061 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9907 Phototach (OTC 3660) Digital Tachometer: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for Phototach - 3660 WARNING: Do not shine or point the red light beam from this tool into anyone's eyes (including your own). Reflective Paint: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for reflective paint - 550197 Applicator: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for Applicators (100 pack) - 550223 Page 10298 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case Classification: TF10-003 Reference: NTB10-047 Date: March 19, 2010 TITAN, FRONTIER, XTERRA, AND PATHFINDER; OIL LEAKING FROM TRANSFER CASE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2005 - 2007 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED TRANSFER CASES: TX15A and TX15B assemblies IF YOU CONFIRM: Oil is leaking from one or a combination of three bolts at rear of the transfer case (See Figure 1). ^ Figure 1 shows the transfer case viewed from the rear. ACTION: Refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE on Page 3 of this bulletin. ^ If the bolts are not missing, do NOT replace the transfer case, transfer control device, or transfer control unit for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 12878 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 13089 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8975 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8811 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1548 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Step 13) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2578 or B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 30, 31 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION In-vehicle Sensor Page 8951 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3050 ^ If measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. ^ If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the Table for Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Factory installed parts grading: ^ Only grade 0 is available. CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE Method of Measurement ^ Install connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and cap. Tighten connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Measure inside diameter of connecting rod bearing. (Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod bearing) - (Crankshaft pin diameter) Standard: 0.020 - 0.039 mm (0.0008 - 0.0015 inch) Limit: 0.055 mm (0.0022 inch) ^ If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized bearing. Method of Using Plastigage ^ Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and surfaces of each bearing completely. ^ Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in the crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. ^ Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Page 6716 Page 12272 Sunroof Switch System Check Page 12407 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14186 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1476 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 6444 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 12373 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 9563 Optional Splice Page 6267 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS ANTENNA Removal 1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D. 3. Remove defroster grille. 4. Disconnect GPS antenna connector. 5. Remove GPS antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1832 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3236 M8 × 25 mm (0.98 inch): No. 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13 M8 × 45 mm (1.77 inch): No. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14 M8 × 123 mm (4.84 inch): No. 9, 12 2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper). 3. Install the oil pan (lower). a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. b. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown. 4. Install the oil pan drain plug. 5. Install engine assembly. ^ Do not fill the engine oil for at least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and add engine oil if necessary. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again. Page 916 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Component Parts Location Page 5728 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation ISC SYSTEM Description The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11405 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster. 3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. Installation Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 7817 CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE (SEE FIGURE 10). ^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer (download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur. ^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK". Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6. 9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II. a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8). b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK". ^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration. Page 10436 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the cluster lid D. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor from cluster lid D. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13071 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6769 Page 4781 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 13054 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11288 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12964 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. Page 3567 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 2719 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly or around it. 2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Changing Final Drive Oil Changing Final Drive Oil Page 12645 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 1852 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Service and Repair Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. 3. Disconnect steering wheel switches. 4. Remove the steering wheel center nut. 5. Remove the steering wheel using Tools. Tool number: A: J-1859-A B: J-42578 CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. 6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. ^ Remove steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. ^ If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-146, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" for steering angle sensor adjustment. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Steering Angle Sensor/Adjustments ^ After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures ^ Tighten steering wheel center nut to specification. CAUTION: ^ The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. ^ With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable Page 3767 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 5749 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 5556 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 5139 Case 8 Page 5171 Case 7 Page 11310 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3970 Attachment General Procedure Page 2958 Disclaimer Page 6741 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 6321 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8557 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 13542 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6714 Page 4672 Page 3627 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13211 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 2736 Components Replacement DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and gasket. Drain the fluid. Page 11496 After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 5392 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3317 EM-12 Page 5871 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 8646 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11363 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11617 Removal 1. Open window fully. 2. Remove door mirror. 3. Remove molding. - Remove hole cover and screw. - Lift molding from rear side. - Disconnect clips from flange. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal 1. Open window fully. 2. Remove molding. - Remove hole cover and screw. - Lift molding from rear side. - Disconnect clips from flange. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2067 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11340 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3858 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4131 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5156 Case 9 Page 6927 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 9877 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 24 - 25) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. Page 6330 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5428 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11398 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic Page 7100 Control Unit: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 13928 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1) Page 6680 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 13504 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1129 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12087 Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 4928 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 13912 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6399 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing Page 13132 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14013 Page 5876 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9147 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 1655 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8776 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11391 - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: - Ignition switch - Key switch (insert) - Hazard switch - Main door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab) - Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Part 1 Page 269 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9759 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5640 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 9598 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5844 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12885 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 1799 Page 12386 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11) Page 5645 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 13673 Page 8584 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 583 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support CAN Communication Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3877 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 971 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 8229 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 14077 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5378 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst Page 14165 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 11359 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 11549 4. Remove upper and lower seatbelt anchor trim (see Figure 1). 5. Remove upper seatbelt anchor bolt (see Figure 2). 6. Remove arm rest. Locations Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control REMOVAL 1. Remove the front grill. 2. Remove the front fender protector (LH). 3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hoodledge. 4. Remove the bolt and the hood opener. 5. Remove the grommet from the dash lower, and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable. INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the hole in dash lower panel into the engine room. Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or more. 2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and from inside the vehicle, push the grommet into the dash lower hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at (*) mark. Page 14076 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12648 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 12634 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Mirror Adjustment Cable: Customer Interest Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Classification: BT06-005 Reference: NTB06-074 Date: October 30, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced. ACTION ^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly. ^ Replace only the door mirror actuator. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13737 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1059 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13397 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4875 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Page 3918 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 1015 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8487 [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14028 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 1184 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1522 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 5977 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 3584 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4563 Optional Splice Page 5922 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4329 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12019 16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5. - Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes. Figure 6 17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes, all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6). CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation. 18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor. Figure 7 - To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7). Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit Figure 8 Page 5729 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 13858 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11280 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6557 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 4872 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1029 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11925 Page 10221 specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". NOTE: At temperatures below 16 degrees C (61 degrees F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure. 4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a"to evaporator inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (evaporator drain hose "g" to compressor shaft seal "k"). Refer to "Components". Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal - Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, and relief valve - Check the liquid tank - Check the refrigerant pressure sensor - Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. 5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d. Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower fan speed to HIGH 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment. 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment. 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to "Operational Check". Page 3247 c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Then install the front cover. d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All except the above e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. 4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: - Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown. D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C) that cannot be seen after attaching the cover. b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. - A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) Page 5003 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3984 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1869 Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 6261 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6554 Page 11818 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5291 Case 8 Page 11229 Component Parts Location Page 8808 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 5671 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6712 Page 1927 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1667 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 2158 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5662 Page 13904 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7625 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4024 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8190 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 8455 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8133 Page 11883 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 4) Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 4232 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3718 Page 312 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11741 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Power Window System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 760 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3615 Page 6178 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7701 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 11163 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 445 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11935 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 191 3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released. IMPORTANT: Do not push the brake pedal until step 6. 4. Start the engine and let it idle. ^ Keep the transmission in Park. 5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor. 6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release. NOTE: 2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height". 7. Repeat step 6 ten times. ^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step. 8. Repeat steps 2 though 7. ^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Part 2 Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. This part of the procedure involves two general steps: ^ Setting up ^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card). SETTING UP: 1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1). CAUTION: Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card. Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 5007 LAN-CAN-02 Page 3878 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Lubricant Capacity Total in System ............................................................................................................................................................ 200 ml (6.8 US fl oz, 7.0 Imp fl oz) Page 8762 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1861 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 478 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4249 Page 398 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 359 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11939 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 9950 Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8653 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10877 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 2522 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 6470 Page 2105 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 9575 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1103 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9615 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 13 - 15) Page 2455 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 11522 Disclaimer Service Procedure 1. Record all radio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first) and wait for at least 3 minutes. Page 9832 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4566 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6932 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1138 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6175 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12239 Power Seat Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7604 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4071 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 4985 Page 10878 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 9932 Figure D-2A NOTE: You may see clips (fan balance weights) on the fan blades. DO NOT move or remove the fan balance weights. Figure D-3 In the next few steps you will be installing these four self adhesive protectors. NOTE: Make sure your hands are completely clean. Dirt and oil on your hands can contaminate adhesive material and reduce its adhesion. Page 10911 Page 8113 5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3). Description and Operation Air Register: Description and Operation Page 5679 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10990 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 452 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 722 Attachment General Procedure Page 9966 Figure A-4 2. Use the photos to identify the fan type. Procedure B - Cooling Fan Motor Inspection/Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Volt. RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen". 1. Inspect the wires near the condenser fan motor: - Make sure there is no damage to the wire insulation and the wires are in good condition. Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: ^ Do not overfill. ^ Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. ^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Page 6665 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 12210 Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 8311 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Specifications Page 13153 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Diagram Information and Instructions Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6859 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11360 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4271 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 5154 Case 7 Page 8623 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Parking lamps - Tail and license lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table. IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Page 4044 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8761 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13503 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 1079 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13873 Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 2475 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807 Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Classification: BT09-004 Reference: NTB09-074 Date: August 7, 2009 2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer. ACTION Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information. NOTE Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 9944 Figure E-3 3. Disconnect the white connector circled in Figure E-3. - This is connector E120. - This connector has 6 terminal slots with only 5 filled. Figure E-4 4. Remove the green wire from connector E120. - Use pin terminal tool J-38751-305 from Pin Tool Set J-38751-3, or equivalent. Page 10652 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3828 Page 11162 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1864 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12148 Page 10175 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 8 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE Page 10069 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4431 Available Valve Lifter Page 4268 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1043 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1656 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9307 can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 11210 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5262 Case 15 Page 5101 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 6696 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing without tightening to specification. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. 10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact. 12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16. Refill rear final drive oil. Page 10339 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3607 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Locations Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 11124 Remote Control: Service and Repair REAR AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. Carefully remove the rear audio remote control unit from the rear roof console assembly. CAUTION: Wrap removal tool with clean shop cloth to prevent damage to the headliner. 2. Disconnect connector and remove the rear audio remote control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 2781 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 06-032A Date: 060425 Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect Reference: NTB06-032A Date: April 25, 2006 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN PASSENGER SIDE DOOR UPPER LATCH This bulletin amends NTB06-032 and includes revised Claims Information. Please discard all previous copies of NTB06-032. CAMPAIGN I.D. # /NHTSA #: PB017/06V-064 APPLIED VEHICLE: 2006 Titan (A60) - King Cab Models only APPLIED VINS: 1N6*A06**6N543640-546599 INTRODUCTION Nissan has determined that some 2006 model year Nissan Titan King Cab vehicles fail to conform to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 206 - Door Locks And Door Retention Components. FMVSS 206 specifies strength requirements for door locks, hinges and latches in vehicles. The upper latch assembly of the right side rear door in some Titan King Cab vehicles does not meet one of the requirements in this standard. This may result in the right side doors coming partially open in the case of certain crashes and increasing the risk of injury to occupants. To prevent this condition from occurring, Nissan will replace the upper latch assemblies with ones that meet the standard. All other requirements under FMVSS 206 and other standards are met. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PB017 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 480. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to delivery under a sale or lease. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 11528 14. Remove latch switch connector from door (see Figure 9). 15. Remove three bolts from upper door latch. Page 8225 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 10420 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sunroof Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 292 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4962 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 30 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2218 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5584 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 12897 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 5861 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Testing and Inspection Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Inspection After Installation CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the damaged part. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any damage parts. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lbs.) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leakage from each part. Page 13676 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 3444 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5940 ^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration. Page 1845 Page 9886 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : (J-38873-A) 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Tool number : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. Page 8234 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1818 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1406 Page 1529 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2146 Page 8417 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4330 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7686 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine. Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD" position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6. Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Page 10498 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1756 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 3461 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 14170 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10832 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8604 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11279 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4652 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 13586 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 7144 Location of Electrical Parts Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 4640 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 4627 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 11526 10. Remove handle release cable from upper door latch white cable clip on door (see Figure 5). 11. Remove upper door latch gray cable clip from door (see Figure 6). Page 4537 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14015 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8094 e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay". 8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8): a. Make sure: ^ CONSULT-II is OFF. ^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II. ^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II. ^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port. b. Turn CONSULT-II ON. c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN". NOTE: If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8. d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC. Page 318 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 4035 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11848 4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary). NOTE: Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3. 5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s). 6. Remove the old actuator motor. 7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal. Page 13722 Optional Splice Page 12392 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9794 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 11 - 14) Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Step 15) Page 2069 Page 4947 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 14425 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1766 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10256 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 11075 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10539 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt Inspection After A Collision Seat Belt Inspection AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: - The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). - The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). - The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. - Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. - The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten drivers seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. 2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. 5. Check retractor operation: a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. Page 3415 Coolant: Service and Repair Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: ^ To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only). CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts. 4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown. 5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for engine removal or repair. ^ The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ^ Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Radiator drain plug: Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR". See: Radiator/Service and Repair RH cylinder block drain plug: Refer to EM-78, "CYLINDER BLOCK". See: Engine/Cylinder Block Assembly/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly Page 8926 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Part 1 Part 2 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored. 5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch STOP. Page 8903 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 51 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14100 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2457 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 1521 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13816 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12054 Figure 18 31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). 32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely. 33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make sure they all snap together securely. 34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first. 35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.). - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information. 36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should. 37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal operation, procedure A or B must be performed. Procedure A: 1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".) 2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ). 3. End Procedure B: 1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH). 2. End 38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed: - Power Window Initialization - Power Sunroof Initialization - Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning - Throttle Valve closed Position Learning - Idle Air Volume Learning - Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment Page 7335 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 4206 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10610 CAUTION: - The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. - With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 5138 Case 7 Page 3124 Disclaimer Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and confirm: ^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt and ^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming. 4. Remove intake duct and engine cover. 5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6. 6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual for removal procedure. 7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist. 8. Remove front right wheel. 9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure. 10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts). 11. Check the pulley alignment as follows: Page 11185 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8601 Page 2302 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5674 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9110 57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console. 58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place. 59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening. CAUTION: Page 1559 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Page 12793 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Classification: HA10-004 Reference: NTB10-044 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally: ^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions. Page 7732 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7799 2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then a. Press [VDC] b. Review all precautions C. Press [NEXT] 3. Select the program data (see Figure 17). Page 6823 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Specifications Shift Cable: Specifications Floor Shift Models Page 585 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 9250 1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. ^ Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and bearing assembly for this procedure. 2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. ^ Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. 4. Support lower link using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint and discard the cotter pin. 6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. ^ Perform ball joint inspection. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components" for tightening torques. CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut. Page 13596 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 12425 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12498 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 57 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5233 Case 5 Page 13524 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7801 NOTE: This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes. CAUTION: You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data": ^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or ^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit. For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped with VDC are listed below. ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS 6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete: Page 11371 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1987 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Power Window System Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 251 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 12785 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 14218 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 797 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12582 Page 8081 Page 5461 not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 13020 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1453 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10511 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7730 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9219 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 6343 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 13574 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4014 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 1509 Page 8740 57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console. 58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place. 59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening. CAUTION: Page 9001 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Page 13048 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4063 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3961 Page 9704 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10740 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Page 2221 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4098 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 554 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 7905 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut (A). CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. Lock nut (A): 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.) 3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in until threaded ends contact pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the bracket and switch ends are within specification. 5. Check the pedal play. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 9701 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13377 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6621 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9566 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11248 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 3248 - B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) 5. Install the crankshaft pulley. - Install the key of the crankshaft. - Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. - Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt. - Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb) Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening) 7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. Page 8976 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6192 Reference value: 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lbs.) d. Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns. ^ After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube. 2. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below. CAUTION: ^ Upper and lower O-ring are different. Standard model Fuel tube side: Blue Nozzle side: Brown FFV model Fuel tube side: Black Nozzle side: Green ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it. 3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube. a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. ^ Insert clip so that lug "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one. ^ Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ^ Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ^ Insert fuel injector so that lug "B" of fuel tube matches notch "B" of the clip. ^ Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. ^ Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. 4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. Page 7420 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8496 Component Parts Location Page 13257 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10078 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10372 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1722 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 5782 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 11894 Page 14039 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7154 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. Page 4084 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 6125 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 836 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Control Panel Buttons (if so equipped) 1. Press the "TRIP" button and the following modes will display: Warning Messages (if any) Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Maintenance OFF 2. Choose Maintenance on the display by using the joystick and push "ENTER" Reset Procedure Use the reset procedure in the above image. Page 1036 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 23 Alarm Horn Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12967 - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 12560 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 651 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 5288 Case 5 Page 8895 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3562 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6094 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 8520 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6262 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5424 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1935 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4588 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2367 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9792 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 13898 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5304 Case 4 Page 11136 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Subwoofer (Premium System) SUBWOOFER (PREMIUM SYSTEM) Removal 1. Remove front driver seat. 2. Remove the subwoofer bolts. 3. Disconnect subwoofer connector and remove the subwoofer. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 10285 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. Page 12813 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. Page 11584 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair King Cab REAR DOOR - KING CAB Removal 1. Remove upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt". 2. Release clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove armrest. 4. Remove screws behind armrest. 5. Release clips and remove rear door finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12931 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12545 Page 6810 c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 9635 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 9 - 12) Page 5543 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 201 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF. 6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded into it (see Part 1). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13). ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF". * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14). This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during reprogramming. CAUTION: DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below. 9. Continue with Section 3. Section 3 Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input" 1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE] Page 11311 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4896 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1909 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 13919 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 7069 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Electrical Units Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 3450 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 14111 Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Window Glass and Regulator REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the sealing screen. 3. Lower the window and remove the rear window glass bolts. 4. Raise the window and hold it in place with tape. 5. Disconnect the rear window defogger harness connector. 6. Remove the rear window glass assembly. 7. Disconnect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. Page 12146 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13260 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5232 Case 4 Page 5165 Case 1 Page 664 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 4207 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8916 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Parking lamps - Tail and license lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table. IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Page 4180 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1308 Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 5643 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 7719 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13158 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12310 9. Reinstall both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. 10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. 11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. 12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight. Page 7703 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Windshield Washer Pump: Customer Interest Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Classification: EL06-009 Reference: NTB07-002 Date: January 9, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank. ACTION Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 12803 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 14038 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 11206 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5599 Page 11347 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4655 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 2379 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1294 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 4. CAUTION: Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle it with care. 4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body. 5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench. 6. Remove the lower flap cover. Page 8526 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Navigation System Component Parts Location Page 14432 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 12437 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8784 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 2358 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 14421 Optional Splice Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8101 4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18). NOTE: If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *. * This is found in ASIST under: CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info. CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING: ^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur. ^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming. ^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during reprogramming. * You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1. 5. Press [START]. See Figure 18. ^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear. ^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF. ^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started. Page 3985 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 10183 Heater Core: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner HEATER CORE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Manual Air Conditioner 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. Page 10431 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 1 - 4) Page 8596 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3154 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 11134 Speaker: Service and Repair Center Speaker CENTER SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D. 3. Remove the center speaker screws and remove the center speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Door Speaker FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove front door finisher. 2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect connector and remove front door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door Speaker REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove rear door finisher. Page 11471 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harness connectors. 2. Remove pull handle cover. - Remove screws behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove pull handle escutcheon. - Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove armrest. - Remove screw behind armrest. 6. Remove memory seat switch (if equipped). - Disconnect harness connector. 7. Remove step lamp. - Disconnect harness connector. 8. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Refer to "FRONT DOOR LOCK". 9. Remove door lock knob. Page 85 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3938 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 9618 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 23 - 25) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10830 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Electrical Units Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 14492 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1844 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10189 1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2. ^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing. Page 4350 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8310 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 5066 Case 6 Page 378 Page 738 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 2723 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly or around it. 2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Changing Final Drive Oil Changing Final Drive Oil Page 7957 Image Symbols WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. 3. Suspend cylinder body using suitable wire and remove pads, shims, and pad retainers from torque member. INSTALLATION 1. Push pistons in so that pad is firmly installed and mount cylinder body to torque member. CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of reservoir tank. NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes it easier to push in piston. 2. Attach pad retainers, pads and shims to torque member. - Apply Molykote M-77 grease to pad retainer where brake pad contacts and between pad and shim. CAUTION: - When attaching pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it is seated fully in the torque member as shown. - Do not get grease on the brake rotor friction surface. 3. Install lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". 4. Check brake for drag. 5. Install tires to the vehicle. Page 4447 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4020 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 3674 Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 10005 Page 1671 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 11507 7. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts 6.0 N.m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb) 8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle bracket and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the outside handle cable. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. STRIKER ADJUSTMENT 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. Striker Bolts: 16.6 N.m (1.7 kg-m, 12 ft-lb) Page 7465 2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 8921 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 12646 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6784 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 2609 Drive Belt: Adjustments DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the auto tensioner. Page 4520 Part 2 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication Page 8865 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7271 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Propeller Shaft Propeller Shaft Vibration PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION NOTE: If vibration is present at high speed, check propeller shaft runout first, then check mounting between propeller shaft and companion flange. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Propeller shaft runout limit: 1.02 mm (0.0402 inch) or less 2. If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° and reconnect propeller shaft. 3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly Removal and Installation Removal and Installation Page 13111 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12329 Cowl: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove right and left wiper arms. 2. Remove cowl top seal. - Release plastics clips on cowl top seal which go through cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension. 3. Remove cowl top covers LH and RH. - Release plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge. - Disconnect washer tubes from washer nozzles. 4. Remove cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH. - Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of wiper motor and connecting rod assembly. 5. Remove wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. 6. Disconnect windshield washer tube. 7. Remove A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to "REFRIGERANT LINES". 8. Remove drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove cowl top extension. Page 10004 "CM" I.D.: PB077-2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM to confirm the correct campaign ID #. Page 7026 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 564 Page 9942 Figure D-22 Figure D-23 Figure D-24 - Refer to Figures D-22 through D-24 for tie-wrap locations. - Use the large 11 o'clock rib for reference. Page 5868 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 9149 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 3102 2nd step: 8.3 Nm (0.85 kg-m, 73 inch lbs.) CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck. 3. Install the PCV hoses. NOTE: ^ Remove foreign materials from inside the hose using compressed air. ^ The inserted length is within 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 inch) [Target: 25 mm (0.98 inch)]. 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 512 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster. 3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. Installation Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 772 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9696 Page 8504 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8241 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: ^ Do not overfill. ^ Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. ^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Page 7519 3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification. Drain plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket. 2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Fluid grade and capacity. CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approximately 3 minutes.) 3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 1329 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 1887 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6184 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14481 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2971 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. Page 1606 Page 9086 8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4. 9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness. ^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the direction shown in Figure B5. Page 2802 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 338 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 14474 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1313 Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 13205 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 3686 ^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are located (see Figure 1 and 2 above). > The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield. > If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply. 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for example). Page 13752 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 11351 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3581 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 293 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1836 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Calibration of Decel G Sensor Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor Calibration of Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 5724 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 13527 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6871 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2835 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5535 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 9962 Phototach (OTC 3660) Digital Tachometer: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for Phototach - 3660 WARNING: Do not shine or point the red light beam from this tool into anyone's eyes (including your own). Reflective Paint: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for reflective paint - 550197 Applicator: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for Applicators (100 pack) - 550223 Page 11838 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2297 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10030 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 147 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4379 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 404 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5128 Case 11 Case 12 Page 4988 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13012 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12447 Page 5077 Case 4 Page 9520 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 13688 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 14004 Optional Splice Page 11346 Optional Splice Page 1145 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7931 Image Symbols Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle. 3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body. NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and caliper from torque member. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts if removed and tighten to specified torque. Refer to BR-24, "Components". Page 10932 Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. Remove the rear panel. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the sonar control unit. 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the sonar control unit bolts and remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7635 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2829 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 490 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1) Page 3714 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8315 Alternator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the fan shroud. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Remove lower bracket, using power tools. 5. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools. 6. Remove/disconnect the generator harness connectors. 7. Remove the generator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the generator and check the tension of the drive belt. CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully. Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Step 3) Page 4058 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5983 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. Page 5275 Case 9 Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5924 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Headlamp (For USA) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 485 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 11253 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ((King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Oil Pan: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Classification: EM10-011 Reference: NTB10-099 Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Page 12612 Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 10146 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Page 8940 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12523 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2631 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 8399 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10704 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 8820 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2110 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 8000 Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 4756 Page 2233 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9591 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 2426 Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3753 Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status - When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 1967 Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13841 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14393 Page 8039 Page 9578 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11552 10. Remove handle release cable from upper door latch white cable clip on door (see Figure 5). 11. Remove upper door latch gray cable clip from door (see Figure 6). Page 8558 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512 Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Classification: BR06-007 Reference: NTB06-040 Date: May 12, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) equipped with VDC IF YOU CONFIRM A customer reports: ^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking. * This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated. ACTIONS ^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. Page 5255 Case 8 Page 10028 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11811 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13134 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 890 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13836 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1401 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2030 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 6736 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 8057 Parking Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lining Thickness Inspection ^ Check thickness of lining. Standard thickness "A": 3.79 ± 0.21 mm (0.149 ± 0.008 inch) Wear limit thickness "A": 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) Disc Rotor Inner Diameter Inspection ^ Check inner diameter inside drum area of disc rotor. Standard inner diameter: 205 ± 0.13 mm (8.07 ± 0.01 inch) Wear limit of inner diameter: 205.7 mm (8.10 inch) Other Inspections ^ Check shoe sliding surface on back plate for excessive wear and damage. ^ Check anti-rattle pins for excessive wear and corrosion. ^ Check return springs for sagging. ^ Check adjuster for rough operation. ^ When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the threads. ^ Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside drum area of disc rotor. Automatic Air Conditioner Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Water Valve Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front and rear heater cores to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 11981 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3513 Page 5001 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2144 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1124 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1411 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3454 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2165 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1500 Optional Splice Page 5558 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 7057 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 3727 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) CARRIER COVER COMPONENTS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain gear oil. Page 6176 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8630 active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. Part 1 Part 2 - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 2607 Drive Belt: Specifications DRIVE BELTS Page 5336 Case 17 Case 18 Page 5012 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems. WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 10621 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to "Removal" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Page 6138 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 1415 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 571 Page 13106 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 656 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 9675 Air Duct: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner DUCTS AND GRILLES Page 13037 Page 727 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 12145 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13838 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13702 LT-T/TOW-02 Page 3763 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 4920 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Page 5142 Case 11 Page 967 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 3327 12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) INSTALLATION 1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. 2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed). - Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. 3. Install the front cover as follows: a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block. b. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Page 6466 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair WIND DEFLECTOR Removal 1. Open the sunroof. 2. Remove screws from the left, center, and right side wind deflector holders. 3. Remove the wind deflector from the sunroof frame assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5036 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3 Input/output signal chart Page 12721 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3052 Page 5084 Case 12 Case 13 NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 8965 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 12365 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4977 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14211 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8115 ^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE ^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY! ^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure. 7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows: a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5). Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 11192 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2432 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 12713 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3840 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 5015 - Models with VDC - Models with electronic locking rear differential - Models with automatic drive positioner - Models with navigation system TYPE 1 System diagram Page 13740 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Fuse and Relay Box Page 6487 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9101 25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor. 26. Take the harness loose from along the floor. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's located on the rocker panel (see figure above). 27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt. NOTE: For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the seat belt. Page 3944 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5843 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7634 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Electrical Specifications Page 2290 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216 Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN Reference: NTBO7-009 Date: February 16, 2007 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616 NHTSA # : 06V-459 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471 2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226 2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805 NOTE: Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety exists. In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio speakers. If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type cover will be installed and rerouted. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and Page 12798 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6551 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 11933 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8012 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation Image Symbols Page 207 * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]. 5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems: IMPORTANT: You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all DTC(s) are erased. ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIR BAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) 6. After all DTC(s) are erased: ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. ^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector. ^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle. ^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the instrument panel. 7. Continue with Part 4. Part 4 Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. 1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming card. 2. Go to the ASIST terminal. 3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II. ^ Use ID Code 050602. ^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. END Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 9573 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4392 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 13738 Page 757 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Operation CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic Page 14477 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13817 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11059 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Evaporative System Service Port: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7108 CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. ^ Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts. 5. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. 6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). 7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ^ Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. ^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 8. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 7938 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. - Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. Page 4678 Page 3624 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9346 Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14318 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 8323 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3313 EM-7 Page 11361 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14297 Page 1072 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7895 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console or center seat as required. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 10317 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13029 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5184 Case 6 Page 5652 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4358 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1466 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8729 d. Take the harness branch loose from the body. 17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt. 18. Remove the lower side finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt. 20. Remove the harness ground bolt. 21. Remove the floor mat holder. Page 3710 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13864 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2057 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 12443 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 13867 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Component Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7241 8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring retainer to remove it. CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press. 10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press. Tool number: ST30031000 CAUTION: ^ Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft. ^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 12. Remove the wheel bearing cage. NOTE: ^ If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. ^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Axle Shaft ^ Clean and remove all nicks and burrs. ^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary. ^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary. ^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch) Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^ Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Housing ^ Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary INSTALLATION 1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. 2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 13906 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11803 Optional Splice Page 11166 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12712 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9251 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-35, "Front Disc Brake". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Specifications ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 9226 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 8404 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8469 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 9112 64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin. 65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows: a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. King Cab Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair King Cab CAB AND REAR BODY Body Mounting, King Cab When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). Testing and Inspection Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection Hood Lock Control Inspection CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood opener returns to the original position. 3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown in the figure. Page 11049 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5866 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1283 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 14494 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6259 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9048 c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle. 8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console: a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly. b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then c. Remove the glove box assembly. Page 9070 e. Remove the front pillar finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. NOTE: With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts. f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body. Page 66 Page 1468 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10200 O-Ring Part Number And Specifications Page 7431 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10248 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9836 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 17 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14304 Page 4527 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 419 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5713 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5206 Case 12 Page 1455 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2961 c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance) Page 13529 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12089 Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3) Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 12916 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 7507 Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) ^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 10435 After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 4 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Removal and Installation Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank. 2. Remove air duct assembly. 3. Remove power steering reservoir tank. 4. Remove serpentine drive belt from auto tensioner and power steering pump. 5. Disconnect pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove high pressure and low pressure piping from power steering oil pump. 7. Remove bolts, then remove power steering pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation, bleed air. NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment. Page 8913 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13761 Page 13535 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9088 13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then 14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape. ^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness. ^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap. ^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in position. ^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube. ^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left. 15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9. Upper Link Control Arm: Service and Repair Upper Link Removal and Installation Components REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. Fuse and Relay Box Page 10564 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 14025 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4115 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1760 - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 13404 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Specifications Parking Brake Page 2389 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9620 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 5 - 8) Page 10131 4. Remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Page 2296 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7683 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12003 NOTE: - Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. - The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations. If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor. 1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP. 2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the connector, harness side, between the following color wires: NOTES: For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM). If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment. Figure 2 Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle you are working on may be different. - This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected. - If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward" positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor. - If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide motor. Remove Old Seat Slide Parts 3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure. 4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2). - Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access the seat mounting bolts. - Don't remove the seat yet. 5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle. - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 6. Turn the ignition key "OFF". 7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes. - This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front seat side air bags. 8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors. 9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface. Page 5625 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4262 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2957 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9652 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 1 - 3) Page 5615 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 3414 Coolant: Service Precautions SAE Viscosity Number ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: ^ When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. ^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Page 922 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12633 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1926 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 446 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12804 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3826 Page 3440 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10043 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 11985 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4187 Page 7277 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Propeller shaft joint flex effort: 2.26 Nm (0.23 kg-m, 20 inch lbs.) or less Center Support Bearing 1. Apply a thin coat of multi-purpose grease to both the propeller shaft tube and the inside surface of the center support bearing. Page 14495 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10276 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13072 Page 11277 Optional Splice Page 7422 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10783 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation Occupant Classification System (OCS) The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-II can be used to confirm the passenger air bag status (readiness). Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions Page 9809 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9740 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1210 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 2079 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8731 25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor. 26. Take the harness loose from along the floor. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's located on the rocker panel (see figure above). 27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt. NOTE: For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the seat belt. Page 6209 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 14301 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6272 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6208 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 7657 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 12592 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2170 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3330 - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. Page 5971 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 14135 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker. SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification Seat Belt Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: November 22, 2006 COMPONENT: Electrical System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500 SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear audio speakers are also contained in the harness. CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 10237 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) OIL Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition - Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: MAX position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77 degrees to 86 degrees F)] - Intake position: Recirculation - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Page 5045 NOTE: For "BCM", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM". Put a check mark to it. - For "HVAC", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM". Put a check mark to it. - For "ABS", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM", "TCM", "METER/M&A;", "ICC" and "AWD/4WD". But put a check mark to "ECM" and "TCM" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table. - For "IPDM E/R", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM". Put a check mark to it. 6. Perform system diagnosis for possible causes identified. 7. Perform diagnosis again after inspection and repair. Make sure that repair is completely performed, and then end the procedure. Start CAN system trouble diagnosis if this procedure can be confirmed. Page 9495 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 8237 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 357 Component Parts Location Page 491 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2) Page 10123 5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice. 6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach. 7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape. Page 3090 Available Valve Lifter Page 1617 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7416 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14241 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6732 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 26 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 473 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4794 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 9769 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6595 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 7958 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Brake Pad REMOVAL 1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. 2. Remove mounting bolt from the top mount. 3. Swing cylinder body open, and remove pads. INSTALLATION 1. Push piston in so that pad is firmly attached and mount cylinder body to torque member. NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of reservoir tank. 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to knuckle slide where brake pad contacts. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake rotor friction surface. 3. Install pads to cylinder body. 4. Install top mounting bolt and tighten to specification. 5. Check brake for drag. 6. Install tires to the vehicle. Page 2528 Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 13727 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12178 ^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it. Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation 7. Reinstall the seat, making sure: ^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing. ^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.) 8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2). 9. Check the power seat controls, making sure: ^ They operate correctly. ^ The incident noise is fixed. 10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in step 2). 11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the Electronic Service Manual as needed. Disclaimer Page 3406 Water Pump: Service and Repair WATER PUMP CAUTION: ^ When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt. ^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump. ^ Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below. CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane. ^ Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. ^ Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Page 44 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 494 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Page 4264 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13267 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4174 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13465 Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection Optical Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The optical sensor is located in the center of the defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the front air control. OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in detected sunload. For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 1) Page 902 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1104 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11191 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3580 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3126 12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips). 13. Unbolt alternator and set aside. 14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts). NOTE: ^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise. ^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the pulleys are equal. 15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts). ^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb) 16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal. Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Seat Bottom Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Classification: BT05-003a Reference: NTB05-010a Date: February 7, 2008 NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates have been updated. No other changes have been made. APPLIED VEHICLES APPLIED VINs / DATES IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat lifter. ACTIONS: ^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom. ^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information). NOTE: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13481 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7329 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11276 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 13812 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 8396 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1574 Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. If NG, replace intake sensor. Page 12902 Rear Sonar System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12576 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 889 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 8723 d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws. ^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also. 1 screw on each side. e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise. f. Lift and remove the shift finisher. ^ Disconnect electrical connectors. g. Disconnect the shift cable. ^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park. Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 14361 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Fluid Reservoir REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove side washer fluid reservoir screw. 2. Remove front and rear washer motor connector. 3. Remove washer fluid level sensor connector. 4. Disconnect front and rear washer hoses. 5. Remove front washer fluid reservoir screw (2). 6. Remove washer fluid reservoir from the vehicle (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet and check for water leaks. Page 14469 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13511 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3766 not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 5241 Case 13 Page 7441 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14392 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8285 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8837 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 8577 Engine Control Component Parts Location Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 5151 Case 4 Page 9655 Defroster door motor The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. The front air control sends a voltage to rotate the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door. Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Step 1) Page 3467 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 3570 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12598 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7276 4. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or yoke hole. 5. Remove the bearing at the opposite side of above operation. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. Center Support Bearing 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. 2. Put matching marks on the propeller shaft tube and the slip yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the propeller shaft tube or slip yoke. 3. Remove and discard the clamp near the center support bearing, then slide the slip yoke off of propeller shaft tube. 4. Lift the dust shield off of the center support bearing. 5. Press the center support bearing off the propeller shaft tube using Tool and suitable hydraulic press. Tool number: 205-D002 ASSEMBLY Journal Page 3027 Camshaft: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the camshaft. 2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading). Camshaft runout: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Cam Height ^ Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard cam height (intake & exhaust): 44.465 - 44.655 mm (1.7506 - 1.7581 inch) Cam wear limit (intake & exhaust): 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ^ If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Journal Clearance Camshaft Journal Diameter ^ Measure the diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard diameter: 25.953 - 25.970 mm (1.0218 1.0224 inch) Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation ISC SYSTEM Description The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). Page 8286 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4836 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 8713 1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light: ^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3. ^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2). ^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the warning light before proceeding. 2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge) 1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area. 2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube: ^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits. Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H" and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds. 2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. ^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. ^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table. Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern 1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. Page 13552 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13907 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10641 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11318 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation TRAILER TOW System Description Power is supplied at all times - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and - through 50 A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and - to 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box) - through 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box) - to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 5, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 61 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and - through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) - to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and - to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 30 A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and - through 40 A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) - to BCM terminal 38, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67 - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 and - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and - to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2 - to trailer connector terminal 2 - to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 2 - through grounds E9, E15 and E24. TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1. With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied - through the tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R - through 10 A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) - to IPDM E/R terminal 49 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1. When energized, trailer tow relay 1 supplies tail lamp power to trailer connector terminal 6. TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION The trailer turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM through trailer turn relays (LH and RH). If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer turn relays (LH and RH) to make them cycle on and off. Trailer turn relay LH output is supplied - through BCM terminal 52 - to trailer turn relay LH terminal 1. Trailer turn relay RH output is supplied Page 56 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1674 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 12039 Figure 15 28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure the distance has not changed (see Figure 15). - If N/G, adjust. Figure 16 29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16). - Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm) Figure 17 30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17). Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 13886 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5329 Case 10 Page 5345 Information Bus: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor Page 10844 Optional Splice Page 4168 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 3752 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Page 7590 4. Remove bolts and detach control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply petroleum jelly. 2. Install transfer control device. a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod. b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Front Axle Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Axle Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 5. For 4WD model, perform the following: ^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. ^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. 6. Remove wheel sensor. ^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness. 7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6648 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8334 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9786 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 23 - 26) ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 7024 Page 2827 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6376 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13010 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1154 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14020 Page 8694 52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side. ^ Remove the clip. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side. ^ 1 screw on each side. 54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side. ^ 1 screw for each coat hanger. Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 5721 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 6902 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 6838 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid: ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Page 2368 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2833 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5297 Case 14 Case 15 Page 3446 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 8521 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6867 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10262 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3229 EM-12 Page 14499 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11828 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 865 Page 13937 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 2956 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 11300 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 714 Page 6384 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8639 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 95 Component Parts Location Page 4670 Page 3839 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 13677 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10898 Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 4074 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 11495 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker. SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting Page 12404 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Automatic Air Conditioner Control Assembly: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the five control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. 3. Remove the four screws securing the front air control unit to cluster lid C. 4. Remove the front air control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Page 2073 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 3506 Page 11763 Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 397 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 783 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 9335 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5055 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 3) Page 7733 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6885 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1253 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 7907 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut (A). CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. Lock nut (A): 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.) 3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in until threaded ends contact pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the bracket and switch ends are within specification. 5. Check the pedal play. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 14187 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Service and Repair Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair GPS ANTENNA Removal 1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D. 3. Remove defroster grille. 4. Disconnect GPS antenna connector. 5. Remove GPS antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 746 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 796 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1853 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Classification: EL07-038B Reference: NTB08-039B Date: January 19, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only IF YOU CONFIRM The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch. WARNING: ^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip of the seat bottom cover. ^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. ^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure Page 3463 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5090 Case 4 Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.) Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Locations Page 12555 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Seatback Trim and Pad Seat Back: Service and Repair Seatback Trim and Pad Disassembly and Assembly SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD NOTE: Only complete outboard seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags. NOTE: Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position. 1. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback. 2. Remove the retainer. 3. Remove the headrest. 4. From inside of the seatback, squeeze the headrest holder tabs at the base of the stay pipe and pull the up to remove. NOTE: Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/rear and right/left). Page 4881 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11837 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2307 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 7173 REMOVAL 1. Remove front final drive. 2. Drain gear oil. 3. Remove rear cover. INSTALLATION Page 1601 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Specifications Page 13339 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 809 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Testing and Inspection Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 2111 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 5953 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 6476 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1436 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5686 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3225 EM-7 Page 12398 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10977 Optional Splice Page 8460 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3726 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6671 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Automatic Air Conditioner Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system. Page 13150 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1078 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7337 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8574 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3957 Page 10650 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3576 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12159 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 12918 Page 6072 Accelerator Pedal: Vehicle Damage Warnings PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems. WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3. Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8478 Technician Safety Information Accelerator Pedal: Technician Safety Information PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems. WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 405 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1171 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6427 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8324 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3291 NOTE: ^ The above figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that of the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. ^ To install the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure for installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the RH bank. 1. Make sure the crankshaft key and RH bank camshaft dowel pin and LH bank camshaft dowel pin are facing in the direction shown. Page 9709 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13046 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14027 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 7606 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Page 13741 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2939 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 12533 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11380 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6316 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13855 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 3991 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 6620 Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13367 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement CAUTION: - Turn headlamp switch OFF before disconnecting headlamp harness connector. - Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. - Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to replace it with a new one. HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM Removal 1. Position fender protector aside. 2. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 3. Disconnect headlamp electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect headlamp electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 11641 2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest. 3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly. 4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool. b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4. Page 5213 Case 2 Page 2380 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11203 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8863 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11421 7. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5222 Case 11 Page 6502 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1785 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8226 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5828 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 228 Repair Flow Chart Page 2058 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 195 ^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE ^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY! ^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure. 7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows: a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5). Page 904 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11930 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8810 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 10263 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3717 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11064 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13245 Optional Splice Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3483 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 3 - 4) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE Page 24 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13591 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 9186 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 7306 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3561 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3352 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 6081 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14054 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12167 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11403 not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 383 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5148 Case 1 Page 12491 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3523 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12038 Figure 12 24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat track (see Figures 11 and 12). Figure 13 25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13). Figure 14 26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85 in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm). 27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). Page 12496 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5341 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection ABS Actuator Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection Page 8465 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 3503 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6245 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6433 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. 4. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 7. Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 13. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. Page 3795 Page 2207 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area CAN Communication Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7409 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8301 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7623 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5225 Case 15 Case 16 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 4675 Page 10266 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1734 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 768 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3142 Disclaimer Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and confirm: ^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt and ^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming. 4. Remove intake duct and engine cover. 5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6. 6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual for removal procedure. 7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist. 8. Remove front right wheel. 9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure. 10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts). 11. Check the pulley alignment as follows: Page 6853 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 10813 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3498 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2763 The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. 3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to "SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F). If less than Page 9822 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13900 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2476 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 9914 Testing Condenser Fan Motor CAUTION: Make sure there are no objects in the way of the fan blades. Keep all objects away from directly contacting the fan blades when the fan motor is running. 7. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to ON, observe the fan operation for 3 to 4 seconds and then turn the Fan Motor Tester OFF: - If the fan turned and operated freely; go to step 8. - If the fan did not operate freely; this indicates the fan motor is NG and must be replaced. No further testing is needed; go to Procedure C 8. Prepare the Fluke 73 and the Phototach Digital Tachometer for the next test as follows. a. Switch the Fluke 73 to read DC Volts. b. Remove the Phototach Digital Tachometer from its case and have it ready to check the fan RPM. Figure B-5, Figure B-6 NOTE: It is important that readings from these two meters be read and recorded at the same time in the next test. c. Practice using the Phototach Digital Tachometer as follows: 1. Do not turn the fan motor tester ON at this time. 2. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer. WARNING: Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes (including your own). 3. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan. 4. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade. Page 12585 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1934 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1517 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4121 Page 3958 Page 10129 4. Remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Page 695 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 9888 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch Magnet Clutch Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. 2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown. Tool number : J-44614 3. Remove the clutch disc. Page 906 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 4440 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2496 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B". Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment, (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front Suspension 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length "L": Refer to "Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket". See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Lock nut: Refer to "Disassembly and Assembly". See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly Front Wheel Turning Angle FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level.. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front Suspension Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear - Steering column - Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Page 2838 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3127 17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves. ^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush. ^ Do not use a power tool. 18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy. 19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for installation procedure. 20. Connect harness clips. 21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure. 22. Install front right wheel. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first. 25. Start engine. 26. Confirm the issue is resolved. 27. Reprogram the radio presets. 28. Reinitialize the power sunroof. Page 11613 1. Heat molding to between 30 degrees and 40 degrees C (86 degrees to 104 degrees F) with a heat gun. 2. Raise end of molding and cut away tape to remove molding. Remove all traces of tape. INSTALLATION - On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200, C-100 or equivalent. - The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape. - To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new double-faced tape to the molding. 1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30 degrees to 40 degrees C (86 degrees to 104 degree F). 3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface. - Align the locating pin into the hole in the outer door. - Continue aligning the pins into their corresponding holes in the outer door during installation. 4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface. - Apply even pressure along molding to insure proper wet out. CAUTION: To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation. Page 14467 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6538 Optional Splice Page 8539 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12879 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5435 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14209 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 407 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Parking lamps - Tail and license lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table. IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Page 4931 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 12090 Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 8814 Page 11156 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4884 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13303 Page 1618 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 7950 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 416 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. VDC/TCS/ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4913 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value Page 7512 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent. Page 298 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11170 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13553 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14037 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1727 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11916 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 199 ^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see Figure 10). c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8). ^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically. d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II. Procedure Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card CAUTION: ^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections. ^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5. Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s). Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input". Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming. Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTCs. Section 1 Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp "trickle charge"). IMPORTANT You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't. Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain: ^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II battery is low. ^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on during reprogramming. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure 11). On-Vehicle Check Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Check SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. 3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 8674 13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then 14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape. ^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness. ^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap. ^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in position. ^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube. ^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left. 15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9. Page 3612 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12590 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5890 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4192 Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13395 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 710 Page 2931 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Page 13109 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 9847 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins. Page 7928 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 2673 ^ Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed. ^ To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification. Page 12144 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3987 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 2062 Testing and Inspection Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE CAUTION: Before starting work, confirm belt tension is proper. 1. Connect Tool between oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose and then bleed air from the hydraulic circuit. 2. Start engine. Allow engine to run until tank temperature reaches 50 80°C (122 - 176°F). CAUTION: ^ Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in power steering pump increases to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature excessively. ^ Be careful not to contact hose with belt when engine is started. 3. With engine at idle, close shut-off valve and read the relief oil pressure. Relief oil pressure: 9.0 - 9.8 mPa (91.77 - 99.93 kg/cm2, 1305.34 - 1421.37 psi) CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve of pressure gauge for more than 10 seconds. 4. After measurement, open shut-off valve slowly. ^ If relief oil pressure is outside the specification, disassemble and repair oil pump. 5. After inspection, disconnect oil pressure gauge and oil pressure gauge adapter from hydraulic circuit, Connect oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose. Add fluid and bleed air from hydraulic circuit thoroughly. Service and Repair Seat Cushion: Service and Repair SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD CAUTION: - Front passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. - Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly. - When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage. - During installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they were originally in. Do not add additional clips. - The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly. NOTE: If the vehicle has been involved in a collision the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS". 1. Remove the power seat switch knobs and power seat switch escutcheon (or recline knobs on manual seat). 2. Remove the front seat cushion finisher (inner). 3. Remove the power seat switch screws (or lift knobs on manual seats). 4. Remove four bolts and the seat cushion assembly. 5. Remove the retainer on the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater. 6. On the drivers seat only, after removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to separate the trim cover from the pad and seat cushion heater unit. Page 6946 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 870 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1461 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6566 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 11043 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3761 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic Page 5340 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) BCM Circuit Inspection Page 9606 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 15 - 18) Page 10397 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10626 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. 2. Disconnect side curtain air bag module connector. - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". 3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag module. CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90 degree C (194 degree F). - Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. 1. Side curtain airbag module connector - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Lubricant Capacity Total in System ............................................................................................................................................................ 200 ml (6.8 US fl oz, 7.0 Imp fl oz) Page 6165 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9352 Page 3715 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10835 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 3794 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 1173 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7502 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1878 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12384 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Service and Repair Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair VANITY MIRROR LAMP Removal The vanity mirror lamp is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the tabs and remove the vanity mirror lamp lens (1). 3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight out to remove. Vanity mirror lamp bulb: 12 V - 1.8 W CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around tool to protect the housing and lens. Page 8400 Page 8576 Page 14290 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8344 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3353 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 13953 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 133 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 3521 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 775 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6903 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 2405 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 1815 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 9062 44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. NOTE: The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near the sonar control unit. 45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown in the figure below. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. Page 14395 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 4973 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1745 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3747 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2) Page 6163 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14248 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6718 Page 11917 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 569 Page 11368 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2278 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9533 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 5343 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection Front Aie Control Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 8102 NOTE: This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes. CAUTION: You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data": ^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or ^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit. For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped with VDC are listed below. ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS 6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete: Page 4545 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13002 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 131 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9753 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4138 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1651 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4013 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 1808 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11058 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13483 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2454 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 13521 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 10488 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4658 Page 8466 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8562 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 4338 Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6177 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8354 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 8355 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14068 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change .......................................................................................................................................................... 6 1/2 qt. (5 1/2 Imp qts., 6.2 L) Without oil filter change ...................................................................................................................................................... 6 1/4 qt. (5 1/4 Imp qts., 5.9 L) Page 743 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 4811 Page 6423 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10831 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 14227 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 6952 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6684 ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 7798 2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15). NOTE: ^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery. ^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.) 3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15). ^ A reading above 12 volts confirms; a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle, b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following may be the cause: a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it is not working). b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight). c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins). d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11). CAUTION: ^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts. ^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15). 4. Continue with Section 4. Section 4 Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming 1. Press [BACK] two times. Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Control Panel Buttons (if so equipped) 1. Press the "TRIP" button and the following modes will display: Warning Messages (if any) Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Maintenance OFF 2. Choose Maintenance on the display by using the joystick and push "ENTER" Reset Procedure Use the reset procedure in the above image. Page 3631 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5024 System Diagram - Type 7 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 2153 Page 9934 Figure D-6 - Wrap protector 2 around protector 1 and fold the fingers back as shown. Figure D-7 5. Slide protector 2 against the fan motor and press / stick the fingers to the fan motor as shown. - Make sure to press and smooth the fingers so they are completely stuck to the fan motor. Figure D-8 6. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 3 and stick it to the fan motor as shown. Page 13413 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9718 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14171 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 11912 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3920 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 5215 Case 4 Page 8309 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12158 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12588 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9742 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5335 Case 16 Page 317 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1084 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5292 Case 9 Page 8823 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9795 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Blower Motor Relay Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. Front Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. - Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit. - Apply 12 volts to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 and verify that the motor operates freely and quietly. Page 9702 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7814 ^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE ^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY! ^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure. 7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows: a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5). Page 3622 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 3504 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1416 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4593 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12550 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10321 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1086 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5673 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 172 ^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE ^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY! ^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure. 7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows: a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5). Page 12514 Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) (Step 3) All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate Page 5875 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 13346 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 745 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 3875 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 362 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12477 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5120 Case 3 Page 9169 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 12731 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Sunroof Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12149 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6978 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9771 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12965 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). Page 10588 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 7714 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12412 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6152 Optional Splice Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 13967 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13175 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1169 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 764 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3028 ^ Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque. ^ Measure the inner diameter of the camshaft bracket. Standard: 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 1.0244 inch) Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (camshaft journal diameter) Standard: 0.030 - 0.068 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 inch) ^ If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly. Camshaft End Play ^ Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) ^ If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again. ^ If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head. ^ Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008 - 1.2027 inch) - Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal Standard: 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953 - 1.1963 inch) ^ If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head. Camshaft Sprocket Runout Page 8330 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9572 Page 13327 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 129 Page 5582 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Locations Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8449 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14081 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair OIL COOLER WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil and engine coolant are hot. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Disconnect water hoses, pinching hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling. CAUTION: Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt. 3. Remove oil filter. CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on the drive belts. 4. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly. Relief Valve Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove the valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: Page 5926 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9402 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 14119 After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 13156 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3582 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Basic Operation CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216 Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN Reference: NTBO7-009 Date: February 16, 2007 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616 NHTSA # : 06V-459 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471 2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226 2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805 NOTE: Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety exists. In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio speakers. If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type cover will be installed and rerouted. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Contaminated Refrigerant Contaminated Refrigerant If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: - Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. - Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. - Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. - If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. - If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Page 5189 Case 11 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 8665 vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS REPAIR OVERVIEW SERVICE PROCEDURE Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed. Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67 campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being serviced. Page 4081 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 823 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10706 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 13078 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1938 Page 1750 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 7450 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11054 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6808 Components REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device. Page 6313 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13466 Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Steps 2 - 4) Page 6145 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5054 Inspection Between Driver Seat Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 3) Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 1 - 2) Page 879 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10994 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7781 Repair Flow Chart Page 12376 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 699 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 10306 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 235 CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 10823 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5908 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident ABLS/ABS Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 12639 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3723 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5757 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 4504 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 11017 DVD Player: Description and Operation DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM System Description Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times - through 20 A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to DVD player terminal 16. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to DVD player terminal 15. Power is also supplied - from DVD player terminals 31 and 32 - to video monitor terminals 11 and 12. Ground is supplied - to DVD player terminal 22 - through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Audio signals are supplied - through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 - to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37. Video signals are supplied - through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29 - to video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8. Page 3071 CYLINDER BLOCK CYLINDER BLOCK Page 12495 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Service and Repair Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA Removal 1. Lower headliner. 2. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector. 3. Remove satellite radio antenna nut. 4. Remove satellite radio antenna. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11219 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13125 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6920 Optional Splice Page 11746 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock System Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 10849 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1721 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1518 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 53 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 135 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 938 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4987 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3626 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5561 Page 4578 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12609 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation ASCD INDICATOR Component Description ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. - CRUISE indicator is illuminated. - SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. See: Cruise Control/Description and Operation Page 13382 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1275 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 3) Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4) Page 14225 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12201 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Page 5287 Case 4 Page 1625 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7066 Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 5234 Case 6 Page 4838 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 3479 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 4) Page 13641 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13671 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10996 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7626 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13968 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7052 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512 Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Classification: BR06-007 Reference: NTB06-040 Date: May 12, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) equipped with VDC IF YOU CONFIRM A customer reports: ^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking. * This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated. ACTIONS ^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. Page 1315 Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 8782 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13095 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 9629 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 4 - 7) Page 12552 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8239 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 13643 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1872 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Combination Switch Reading Function Combination Switch Reading Function For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Description and Operation Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List - Data Monitor Display Item List Page 12238 19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb). 20. Re-connect the battery cables. 21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details. 22. Re-program the radio presets. 23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for details. Page 6662 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 2361 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13263 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10048 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 415 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Page 4849 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 1598 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3234 WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 1. Remove the engine. 2. Remove the oil pan (lower) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts using power tool. b. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Slide (1) the Tool by tapping (2) its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan. 3. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 4. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts a shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown, using suitable tool. Page 13351 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6359 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 14406 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13564 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 4) Page 4782 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 12328 NOTE: The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak in a different location, and it may have more than one leak. 3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer: ^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent. ^ Follow product application instructions. 4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks. ^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking). ^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak. Disclaimer Page 6153 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 637 Page 8993 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Parking lamps - Tail and license lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table. IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12064 Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 696 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 10400 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11863 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 7848 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 13322 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13319 Door Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10601 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4791 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 9945 Figure E-5 5. Take the wire you removed from connector E120 and put it into the Maxi Fuse connector. Make sure to put it in the correct slot as shown in Figure E-5. 6. Insert the wire from the Maxi Fuse into the slot of connector E120 (see Figure E-5). NOTE: - The terminals will not snap in upside down. - If the terminal won't snap-in, you are trying to put it in upside down; turn it over. 7. Reconnect connector E120. 8. Connect the Maxi Fuse connector. Page 5762 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 5855 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12994 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 3249 - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. Page 8971 Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing Page 907 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 10826 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4085 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 4160 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2930 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 1362 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 10645 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5372 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 7413 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8757 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12356 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1381 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7880 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4871 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2237 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2823 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5725 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. Page 4867 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8519 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7707 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8907 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2308 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 12723 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5005 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams CAN Communication Schematic LAN-CAN Page 10571 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7124 and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids 2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Page 9734 5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice. 6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach. 7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape. Page 6858 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13340 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 12635 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1056 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11376 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10506 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10593 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4054 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10856 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5711 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Adjustments Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments Washer Nozzle Adjustment - This vehicle is equipped with non-adjustable washer nozzles. - If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed correctly. - If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory, replace washer nozzle. Page 4162 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 7189 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing without tightening to specification. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. 10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact. 12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16. Refill rear final drive oil. Page 638 Page 12997 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2225 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13149 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12655 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 11649 5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage. ^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found. 6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt. 7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal. ^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft) Page 11915 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9042 8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4. 9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness. ^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the direction shown in Figure B5. Page 12259 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 3295 b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch, put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1: 93.1 Nm (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft. lbs.) Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening) 14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 15. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal. Page 11354 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4342 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4565 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2846 Page 1605 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6318 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7748 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 1966 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9658 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 10 - 12) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Page 12643 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 5549 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 10415 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1628 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 5678 Optional Splice Page 8457 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9973 If the fan motor is No Good: a. Replace the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C. b. Install the Max Fuse - Procedure E. c. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F. Procedure C - Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable. - Wait at least 3 minutes before working with any airbag components. 3. Remove the front grill. Figure C-1 a. Use a long screwdriver to twist and release 7 clips shown in Figure C-1. Page 11943 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8787 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11189 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4901 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5065 Case 5 Page 4124 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12252 Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 4735 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 6243 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5307 Case 7 Page 4137 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7948 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 10102 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Manual Air Conditioner COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor (front), mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature control dial are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air conditioner system. Page 4883 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3558 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 414 active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. Part 1 Part 2 - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 3430 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12366 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 14314 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14217 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2324 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 2320 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 3832 Automatic Air Conditioner Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Low-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Low-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe Page 126 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 455 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9947 Medium Strength Thread-lock is available from the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Claims Information Submit a CM line claim using the following claims coding: Page 12139 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4079 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Page 184 * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]. 5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems: IMPORTANT: You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all DTC(s) are erased. ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIR BAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) 6. After all DTC(s) are erased: ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. ^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector. ^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle. ^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the instrument panel. 7. Continue with Part 4. Part 4 Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. 1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming card. 2. Go to the ASIST terminal. 3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II. ^ Use ID Code 050602. ^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. END Page 8067 ^ Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads. ^ Attach the check valve in the correct direction. 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove engine air duct assembly. 3. Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. 5. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. 6. Disconnect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors from brake booster assembly. 7. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 8. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 9. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection 1. Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) to brake booster. 2. Check output rod length. Standard dimension when vacuum -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg): 15.6 - 15.9 mm (0.614 0.626 inch) INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length "B" (in the figure) satisfies the specified value. Length "B": 151 mm (5.94 inch) 2. After adjusting "B", temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle. ^ Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel. 3. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod. 4. Install pedal bracket mounting nuts and tighten them to the specified torque. 5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 6. Connect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors to brake booster assembly. 7. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 8. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. 9. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. 10. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. 11. Install engine air duct assembly. 12. Install engine room cover. 13. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Page 6598 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 11503 2. Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole. Torx bolt 5.3 N.m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) 3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon. 4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove. 5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 6. Remove the inside handle screws. Page 662 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 6713 Page 1185 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2478 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 5495 Page 9708 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1505 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11132 Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Door Speaker REAR DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove rear door finisher. 2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove rear door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7021 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Classification: EL07-038B Reference: NTB08-039B Date: January 19, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only IF YOU CONFIRM The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch. WARNING: ^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip of the seat bottom cover. ^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. ^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12691 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 7410 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14320 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5884 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2811 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9912 Figure B-1 - If the wires are damaged (cracked or missing insulation), STOP; no more testing is needed. Go to Procedure C and replace the condenser fan assembly. 2. Disconnect the condenser fan electrical connector. IMPORTANT: Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector. 3. Shake the bottle of reflective paint and open an applicator. - Reflective paint and applicator are included with special tool kit J-49489. - Additional reflective paint and applicators can be ordered from TECH-MATE. Figure B-2 4. Paint a "dime sized" area on the outer portion of one fan blade. - Make sure the painted area is completely filled in (no unpainted spots or thin paint in the dime sized area). - Allow the paint to dry-about 5 minutes Page 14309 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9597 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2555 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. ^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Page 9315 NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Turning torque "B" ................................................................................................................................ 0.5 - 6.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 inch lbs.) VERTICAL END PLAY Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play "C" ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 0 mm (0 inch) Non-Trouble Code Procedures Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Non-Trouble Code Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 7007 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 10283 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4960 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Replaced Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 10481 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8249 Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Step 3) Page 12482 Page 12538 Page 12021 Figure 12 24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat track (see Figures 11 and 12). Figure 13 25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13). Figure 14 26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85 in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm). 27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9429 4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. ^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch). ^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and seat. CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct direction. 5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. ^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point. 6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. 10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor. Axle Bearing Removal and Installation The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 1798 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 457 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7119 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F) Rear final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 gear oil Page 7661 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 3318 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Service Data Update Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Exploded View Removal and Installation Page 14167 Page 11056 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7038 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Diagram Information and Instructions Tachometer: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9049 d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws. ^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also. 1 screw on each side. e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise. f. Lift and remove the shift finisher. ^ Disconnect electrical connectors. g. Disconnect the shift cable. ^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park. Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) Checking Final Drive Oil Checking Final Drive Oil COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. Page 9967 Figure B-1 - If the wires are damaged (cracked or missing insulation), STOP; no more testing is needed. Go to Procedure C and replace the condenser fan assembly. 2. Disconnect the condenser fan electrical connector. IMPORTANT: Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector. 3. Shake the bottle of reflective paint and open an applicator. - Reflective paint and applicator are included with special tool kit J-49489. - Additional reflective paint and applicators can be ordered from TECH-MATE. Figure B-2 4. Paint a "dime sized" area on the outer portion of one fan blade. - Make sure the painted area is completely filled in (no unpainted spots or thin paint in the dime sized area). - Allow the paint to dry-about 5 minutes Page 4122 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5072 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 1166 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 5548 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 11037 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13181 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: - Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS- 20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 4491 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4344 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10595 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2312 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9068 64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin. 65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows: a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. Page 12564 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14050 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1751 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1312 Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 5478 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 7797 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF. 6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded into it (see Part 1). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13). ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF". * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14). This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during reprogramming. CAUTION: DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below. 9. Continue with Section 3. Section 3 Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input" 1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE] Page 11436 NOTE: The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak in a different location, and it may have more than one leak. 3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer: ^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent. ^ Follow product application instructions. 4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks. ^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking). ^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak. Disclaimer Page 9648 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Steps 6 - 9) Page 2622 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins. Page 11382 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 3764 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 11167 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5455 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List - Work Support Display Item List CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 13572 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4834 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 9505 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 12299 9. Reinstall both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. 10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. 11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. 12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight. Page 4083 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16) Diagnostic Procedure Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 2812 Page 6467 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1122 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 12654 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 1064 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13632 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1884 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9107 ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the harness. 46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 47. Reset the radio station presets. 48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 49. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only) 51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side. Page 6768 Page 12509 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 4) Page 6193 CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts. ^ Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts "a" to "b" in illustration and in two steps. 1st step: 12.8 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.) 2nd step: 24.5 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18 ft. lbs.) 5. Install fuel hose assembly. ^ Refer to precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring. ^ Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent O-ring from being damaged. ^ Tighten bolts evenly in several steps. ^ Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts. 6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections using the following steps. 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on hidden points. CAUTION: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot. Page 11190 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4025 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11294 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5742 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 4067 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3293 ^ Insert the oil pump drive spacer according to the directions of the crankshaft key and the two flat surfaces of the oil pump inner rotor. ^ If the positional relationship does not allow the insertion, rotate the oil pump inner rotor to allow the oil pump drive spacer to be inserted. 8. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. 9. Install the chain tensioner cover. ^ Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. 10. Install the front cover as follows: a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block. b. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Then install the front cover. d. Install the bolts in the numerical order shown. Page 13806 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 788 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14385 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11551 NOTE: Clip locations are shown as dots in the picture. Page 14407 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1) Page 6167 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14438 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6265 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1285 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 6602 ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 12036 16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5. - Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes. Figure 6 17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes, all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6). CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation. 18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor. Figure 7 - To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7). Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit Figure 8 Page 11781 CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator. 2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror. NOTE: ^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors. ^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7. 3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s). Page 8983 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 8279 Optional Splice Page 9808 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14411 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 713 Page 11686 Headliner: Service and Repair King Cab Removal and Installation Page 6023 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. Page 10470 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 618 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 430 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1150 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8040 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation With ABS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Disconnect harness connector for fluid level sensor. 3. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refill brake fluid and bleed air. CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Adjust brake pedal. With ABLS or VDC REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ^ Before removing brake brake master cylinder, depress the brake pedal 5-6 times with the key OFF to deplete vacuum in the booster. 1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Disconnect harness connectors for fluid level sensor and pressure sensors. 3. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refill brake fluid and bleed air. CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Adjust brake pedal. Page 10634 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11710 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 5717 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Page 13021 Optional Splice Page 5702 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 4754 Page 5746 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 813 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 7792 b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6). c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402. d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad. ^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7). Page 10253 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13687 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Classification: EM-08-002 Reference: NTB08-058 Date: June 6, 2008 TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt. ACTION A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this Service Procedure. B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it. C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs. D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1945 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12930 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11773 CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator. 2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror. NOTE: ^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors. ^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7. 3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s). Page 173 b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6). c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402. d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad. ^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7). Page 13380 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 584 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 5177 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 8270 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 5006 LAN-CAN-01 Page 1857 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6754 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 13345 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 13952 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5865 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Locations Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 4198 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3733 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5519 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 2231 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6661 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9906 TABLE OF CONTENTS Required Special Tools........................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................3 Repair Overview (flow chart).......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........3 Service Procedure (Armada / Titan)........................................................................................ ................................................................................................5 Procedure A: Identify Fan Type............................................................................................................ ..............................................................................5 Procedure B: Cooling Fan Motor Inspection........ .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Voltage.................................................................................... .....................................................................15 Procedure C: Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly ................................................................................................................... 17 Procedure D: Install Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness ..............................................................................................................................30 Procedure E: Install Maxi Fuse................................................................................................................................... ......................................................41 Procedure F: Confirm Fan Operation........................................ ........................................................................................................................................45 Parts Information.................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................46 Claims Information.......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......48 Owner's Letter.......................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................49 Required Special Tools: - Any of these special tools can be ordered from TECH-MATE. Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter and Test Leads (Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter is part of the J-48602 QR25 Engine Kit). Fan Motor Tester: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for Fan Motor Tester - J-49489-1 Page 14016 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3169 A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the pump pulley. See Figure 2. B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See Figure 3. NOTE: The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the crankshaft pulley. ^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17. ^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8737 ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the harness. 46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 47. Reset the radio station presets. 48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 49. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only) 51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side. Page 8140 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 10330 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 5053 Inspection Between Differential Lock Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) Inspection Between Driver Seat Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 1 - 2) Page 20 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12406 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7366 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 4251 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8885 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13246 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5448 Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status - When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. Page 4598 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9995 - Pay close attention to the tie wrap locations. Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm correct tie-wrap locations. 15. Install the fan motor cover: - Make sure the 4 clips are installed in the correct locations. Figure D-18 Figure D-19 Page 7916 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview ECM Circuit Inspection Page 11123 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8518 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 11931 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12072 10. Remove the outboard J-Clip. WARNING: Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. 11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly. Page 10824 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10325 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1741 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13724 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1576 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 4) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. Page 1672 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5730 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 1609 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12866 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 14273 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1539 After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace ambient sensor. Page 4696 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 8569 Component Parts Location Page 709 Page 11013 DVD Player: Electrical Diagrams DVD Entertainment System Schematic AV-DVD Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 688 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 8304 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3610 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1765 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13166 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Canister Purge Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5446 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Locations Page 8010 materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. ASSEMBLY Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) SRS Components Parts Location Page 14447 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10698 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14239 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3856 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13320 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Windshield Washer Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Classification: EL06-009 Reference: NTB07-002 Date: January 9, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank. ACTION Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 6391 Ignition Coil: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10713 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt REMOVAL 1. Remove rear kicking plates. 2. Remove rear seat assembly. 3. Remove seat belt D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 4. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt. 5. Remove lower side finisher. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 6. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly. 7. Remove center seat belt lower anchor bolt. Automatic Air Conditioner Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the radiator. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. - Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary. 5. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. - Replace the grommets as necessary. Page 4353 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14470 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11033 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7222 Page 5596 Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10250 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12256 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 1158 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Page 3471 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13834 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9689 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11090 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 5493 Page 3606 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Diagram Information and Instructions Power Mirror Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5029 System Diagram - Type 13 Page 9841 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 5616 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 54 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11936 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6563 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10319 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 9128 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 2356 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7426 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12421 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8303 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8999 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only) - Front wipers - Tail, parking, and license lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab) INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE - When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto Page 10512 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 874 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 418 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 9194 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster CAMBER AND CASTER Components Page 14169 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13341 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 7609 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8991 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 5397 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2702 (Component Parts)/Components Transfer Fluid Inspection Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Inspection TRANSFER FLUID Components Page 8541 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7090 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking) CARRIER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 2. Remove carrier cover. ^ Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover. ^ Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. 3. Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover. 4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Page 1201 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5306 Case 6 Page 3224 EM-6 Page 9411 1. Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using tool until the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two tools are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. 3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. ^ Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly ^ Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. ^ Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. ^ Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary Coil Spring ^ Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. ^ Check the free spring height. Front spring free height 2WD: 325.5 ± 3 mm (12.8 ± 0.1 inch) 4WD: 335.0 ± 3 mm (13.2 ±0.1 inch) ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on shock absorber, the lower end (2) and upper end (3) must be positioned as shown. ^ Shock absorber mounting insulator (1) ^ <-: Flat tail Page 10828 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9562 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2147 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 14302 Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9300 Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 8. On 2WD model, remove stabilizer bar bolts and reposition stabilizer bar. 9. Remove oil piping (high pressure side and low pressure side) from steering gear assembly, then drain fluid from piping. 10. Remove lower joint bolt on lower shaft. 11. Remove bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly using power tool, and then remove steering gear assembly from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. ^ After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. ^ With steering wheel in straight ahead position, make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear cover cap ^ After installation, bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. Page 9602 The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit assembly. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 1 - 3) Page 12168 Seat Heater: Description and Operation HEATED SEAT Description - When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit. - Front passenger seat cushion and seatbacks equipped with air bags cannot be disassembled. They are replaced as assemblies only. - Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim. Page 4219 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 8292 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3244 Exploded View Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above. 2. Remove variable timing control solenoids. 3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors. 4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket. 5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. 6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. Page 3780 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transmission assembly. 2. Lock the drive plate using Tool A. Tool number: - (J-47245) CAUTION: Do not damage the drive plate. Especially, avoid deforming and damaging the signal plate teeth (circumference position). Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate. NOTE: Remove the bolts diagonally. 3. Remove the drive plate. CAUTION: Place the drive plate with the signal plate surface facing upward. 4. Remove the engine rear plate. 5. Remove the rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage crankshaft or oil seal retainer surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new rear oil seal. 2. Install the rear oil seal. ^ Install the rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity ................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 L (2 1/8 qt., 1 3/4 Imp qt.) Page 1151 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13536 Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12751 Page 1595 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8213 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10747 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 10360 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9073 Page 4070 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 14430 Page 10284 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6941 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8377 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove/disconnect the starter harness connectors. 3. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. 4. Remove the starter. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully. Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) Page 12236 10. Remove the outboard J-Clip. WARNING: Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. 11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly. Page 7333 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12246 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11680 7. Remove outer seal and key cylinder lid assembly from door. 8. Remove bulb seal and door seal from storage box. 9. Remove storage box from surround assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 781 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10373 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3389 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds Page 866 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8120 VERY IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector. ^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly. CAUTION ^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set. ^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector pin damage may result. ^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the ABS/VDC system can occur. 4. Continue with Section 2 Section 2 Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs. CAUTION: It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before performing the remaining sections of this procedure. 1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure 12). 3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)] 4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle systems: ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIRBAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) Page 4503 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9137 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 2459 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Page 5546 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 4061 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10019 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6855 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1053 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6822 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 117 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13693 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11255 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 1549 After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 4 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Page 9052 d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. NOTE: Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle. 11. Remove the front kick plate. Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. 12. Remove the rear kick plate; ^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. Page 7682 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 7675 Control Unit: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 7019 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8681 k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown. l. Remove the center console from the vehicle. 9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit. 10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle: a. Move the jack out of the way. b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt. c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts. Page 14172 Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8722 c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle. 8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console: a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly. b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then c. Remove the glove box assembly. Page 2210 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5087 Case 1 Page 467 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12191 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 5. For 4WD model, perform the following: ^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. ^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. 6. Remove wheel sensor. ^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness. 7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8522 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 11084 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 8155 CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 10472 Page 449 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 371 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 9616 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 16 - 18) Page 13960 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12122 SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. Preliminary Steps NOTE: ^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags. ^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see Figure 1). 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with step 4 below. Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer 4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor. ^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2). ^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat. 6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2. ^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position. Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid Changing A/T Fluid 1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt. 4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill with the same volume as the drained fluid and use the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^ To flush out the old fluid from the coolers, pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. ^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new fluid, flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity For Transmission fluid type and capacity, See: Specifications CAUTION: ^ Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. ^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. ^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust manifold. ^ Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. Drain plug: Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 5. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 6. Check the fluid level and condition. If the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. 7. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 8. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components Page 1747 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10584 Page 978 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 12704 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5822 Engine Control Component Parts Location Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 8746 ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the harness. 68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 69. Reset the radio station presets. 70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 71. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. Page 1319 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9636 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 13 - 15) Page 4485 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10259 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10416 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12796 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3806 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 12378 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4228 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 74 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8813 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3489 Heater Core: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner HEATER CORE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Manual Air Conditioner Page 8977 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5207 Case 13 Page 8898 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 11159 Page 3455 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12480 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4478 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5657 Page 6874 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5278 Case 12 Page 5011 Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings Precautions For Harness Repair Precautions For Harness Repair CAN SYSTEM - Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in). - Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.) Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis CAN SYSTEM - Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals. - Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. - Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before checking the circuit. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II Precautions When Using CONSULT-II When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? - If YES, GO TO 2. - If NO, GO TO 5. 2. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? - If YES, GO TO 3. - If NO, GO TO 4. 3. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. 4. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results. 5. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW". See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Strategies/Work Flow Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Page 6767 Page 4898 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Non-Trouble Code Procedures Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Non-Trouble Code Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 827 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16) Diagnostic Procedure Page 2386 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10851 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13273 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 9050 h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console. i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and remove 2 screws. j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments. Page 13286 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair CARGO LAMP (if equipped) Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and remove the cargo lamp lens (1). 3. Remove cargo lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the connector, then remove cargo lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the cargo lamp lens. 3. Release the cargo lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove. Cargo lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W Page 2363 Page 3675 ^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above. Page 10538 SRS Inspection (For Side And Rollover Collision) Part 2 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION) Page 5268 Case 2 Page 8894 A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque Technical Service Bulletin # 06-012 Date: 060214 Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque Reference: NTB06-012 Date: February 14, 2006 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN FRONT AXLE FLANGE BOLTS (4WD) CAMPAIGN I.D. # : PB014 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 Titan (A60) - 4WD ONLY 2006 Armada (TA60) - 4WD ONLY APPLIED VINS: Titan: 1N6*A0*B*6N500000 - 541440 Armada: 5N1AA08B*6N700001 - 721614 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION On some 2006 model year Nissan Titan and Armada four-wheel drive equipped vehicles, there is the possibility that the bolts attaching the front drive shafts to the front final drive assembly may not have been tightened properly. This may result in the front drive shafts coming loose and cause a vibration or noise in the vehicle front end. If the front drive shaft becomes disconnected, it may be damaged or cause damage to other vehicle components. However, the ability to control the vehicle will not be affected. Nissan is conducting a Service Campaign to retighten the front drive shaft bolts to the proper specification. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PBO14 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is 22,100. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (PBO14) which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Page 5854 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4700 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 7899 WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ^ While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ^ It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ^ Do not damage piston boot. ^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ^ While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ^ It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ^ Do not damage piston boot. ^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. Page 14017 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5536 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 4328 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13495 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11797 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 11169 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 600 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 1157 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10434 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Step 13) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2578 or B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 30, 31 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION In-vehicle Sensor Page 715 Testing and Inspection Refueling Vapor Cut Valve: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel tank. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c. Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel tank. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2603 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 3711 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7031 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3739 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 1790 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 248 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 5271 Case 5 Page 13116 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 6237 Optional Splice Page 6900 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 9699 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6154 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Diagram Information and Instructions Speedometer Head: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12684 Page 10970 1. Lower DVD screen as shown in Figure 1. 2. Remove (2) 10 mm screws from the console. 3. Use hooked trim tool (essential tool J-46534 Plastic Trim Tool Set or equivalent) to pull down console at 2 locations (both sides). Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 9939 - Use new bolts from the Fan Protector Kit. Bolt torque: 4.5 N.m (0.45, kg-m, 40 in-lb) Figure D-16 - Mount the harness connector and clip the harness in place. 14. Attach 3 tie-wraps as shown in Figure D-17. - Use 7 1/2 inch (19.5 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit. - Use the large 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock ribs for reference. Figure D-17 Page 7717 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 830 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Page 8104 * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]. 5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems: IMPORTANT: You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all DTC(s) are erased. ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIR BAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) 6. After all DTC(s) are erased: ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. ^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector. ^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle. ^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the instrument panel. 7. Continue with Part 4. Part 4 Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. 1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming card. 2. Go to the ASIST terminal. 3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II. ^ Use ID Code 050602. ^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. END Page 13951 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11281 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13675 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3793 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification Air Bag Harness: Recalls Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: November 22, 2006 COMPONENT: Electrical System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500 SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear audio speakers are also contained in the harness. CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10959 8. Re-install (2) 10 mm screws. Torque to 3.6 Nm (0.37 Kg-m, 32 in-lb.) 9. Raise DVD screen. Disclaimer Service Data and Specifications General Specifications Page 7935 CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal in to groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. 5. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". Page 294 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9356 Control Arm: Service and Repair Lower Link Removal and Installation Components REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower shock absorber bolt. 3. Remove stabilizer bar connecting rod lower nut using power tool, then separate connecting rod from lower link. 4. Remove drive shaft, if equipped. Page 9706 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2489 Alignment: Service and Repair The Alignment Process THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. Page 11628 Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Crew Cab Body Mounting, Crew Cab When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). Page 12973 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7218 2. Inspect all six flange bolts (see Figures 1 and 2). a. If all six bolts are OK, loosen the flange bolts approximately half-turn and re-torque the bolts to 73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb). Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Do NOT use an air tool to loosen the flange bolts. b. If one or more flange bolts, ^ are missing ^ can be turned using a hand tool using minimal force ^ has a visible gap between the bolt head and the flange (see Figure 3) Continue with step 3. 3. Remove the flange bolts. NOTE: Make sure you mark the drive shaft (axle) and mating differential side flange for proper re-assembly. 4. Inspect the following items for damage: ^ both drive shaft (axle) flange and differential side flange mating surfaces ^ bolt holes and bolt hole threads See below examples of OK and NG conditions. a. If no damage is found, replace all flange bolts and torque bolts to 73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb). Submit a claim for the repair and return the Page 2492 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front lower link (2). CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components". Page 4132 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10282 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 9355 3. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. ^ Support lower link with jack. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 4. Remove fender protector. 5. Remove upper link bolts and nuts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation ^ After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3325 Exploded View Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above. 2. Remove variable timing control solenoids. 3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors. 4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket. 5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. 6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. Page 13975 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 8538 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles DVD Player: All Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles Classification: BT07-016 Reference: NTB07-O49 Date: June 28, 2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; DVD SCREEN RATTLE NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2006 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1AA08(**)8N600030 Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)AO(*)D88N300038 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: April 10, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM Rattle noise is coming from the DVD screen: When driving at speeds of 10 mph or more. And While driving on rough roads. ACTIONS ^ Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire. ^ Do not remove the DVD monitor from the console for this service procedure. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the overhead console and place it on a clean surface. Refer to section AV of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal procedure. Page 13379 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8684 c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts. d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it. 16. If equipped with side curtain air bags: ^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag will be covered later in this procedure. ^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows. a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out of the way. b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector. c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag. Page 10958 4. Push the console rearward while pulling down to remove console from hanger. 5. Apply felt tape to hinge and foam pad to wire as shown in Figure 5. NOTE: Apply foam pad with adhesive backing to wire. 6. Re-install console to hanger by pushing console rearward and up so that hanger goes through slot located in console. ^ Align pins with holes in bracket as shown in Figure 6. 7. Re-install console by pushing in fastener areas. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13335 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 11873 Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 3) Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 5254 Case 7 Page 4065 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 14243 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3469 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 9793 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 7 - 10) Page 12901 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 10452 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy. 5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical connector. 6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal. Page 1400 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 14192 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 12153 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4544 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13393 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8864 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 12628 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 73 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4334 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8671 5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located (see Figure B2). 6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly. ^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made. ^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks. 7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in steps 5 and 6. IMPORTANT: ^ DO NOT use a razorblade. ^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube. ^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. Page 1063 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5214 Case 3 Page 1870 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 11884 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel. INSTALLATION 1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". Page 2560 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. 6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. ^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with black arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust Page 13842 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12133 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12630 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 442 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13023 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6942 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4807 Service and Repair Rear Bumper: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tow hitch to service the rear bumper. 1. Disconnect harness from tow hitch, if equipped. 2. Remove bolts on each side of tow hitch and remove tow hitch, if equipped. 3. Disconnect sonar sensor harness connector, if equipped. - Disconnect sonar sensors from retainers. 4. Disconnect license lamp harness. Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 11299 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5199 Case 5 Page 7865 Repair Flow Chart Page 6332 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 3586 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3431 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 3135 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 3919 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel. INSTALLATION 1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". Page 5070 Case 10 Case 11 Page 4806 Page 5249 Case 2 Page 11215 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8347 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5734 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 1899 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 14007 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 665 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 2993 Towing Information: Service and Repair TOW TRUCK TOWING WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. - Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 4WD MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission. Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) - Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. - Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems - Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. - Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. Testing and Inspection Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 2438 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1647 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 4570 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 566 Page 1107 Page 11201 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7457 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 3867 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 9621 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 9 - 12) Page 8753 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Sunroof Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4899 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1426 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 14205 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1711 Page 10971 4. Push the console rearward while pulling down to remove console from hanger. 5. Apply felt tape to hinge and foam pad to wire as shown in Figure 5. NOTE: Apply foam pad with adhesive backing to wire. 6. Re-install console to hanger by pushing console rearward and up so that hanger goes through slot located in console. ^ Align pins with holes in bracket as shown in Figure 6. 7. Re-install console by pushing in fastener areas. Page 10073 Page 9891 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Tool number : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) 7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. 10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Page 641 Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3511 Temperature Gauge: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3514 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5873 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6181 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4245 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8901 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8091 6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4). Page 127 Power Mirror Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4525 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List - Work Support Display Item List CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 4423 ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. ^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures ^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Page 10670 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8458 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3600 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12946 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 790 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10514 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 4258 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Service and Repair Glove Compartment: Service and Repair STORAGE BOX Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear mudguard (if equipped) 2. Remove bolts, release clips and remove storage box assembly. 3. Remove shelf bin and mat from storage box. 4. Remove storage box door from hinge. - Remove door stay assembly. 5. Remove inner door cover. 6. Remove nuts and remove latch assembly from door. - Remove key cylinder. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4352 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 11378 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 12595 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2819 Page 4998 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13892 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1352 Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6742 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1620 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5870 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11031 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6415 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11443 Cowl: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove right and left wiper arms. 2. Remove cowl top seal. - Release plastics clips on cowl top seal which go through cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension. 3. Remove cowl top covers LH and RH. - Release plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge. - Disconnect washer tubes from washer nozzles. 4. Remove cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH. - Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of wiper motor and connecting rod assembly. 5. Remove wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. 6. Disconnect windshield washer tube. 7. Remove A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to "REFRIGERANT LINES". 8. Remove drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove cowl top extension. Page 1091 Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 3 - 4) Page 9767 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8300 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6161 Page 10489 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6935 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5840 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 431 Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6322 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3237 Oil Pan: Removal and Replacement Service Data Update Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Exploded View Removal and Installation Page 1206 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7611 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3437 Optional Splice Page 13795 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8606 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7936 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation Image Symbols Page 8341 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6053 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9427 REMOVAL 1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. 4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B: ST36230000 (J-25840-A) 6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep]. CAUTION: ^ Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft. ^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft surface. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 3441 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 12267 Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 11061 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14317 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1353 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 8462 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2854 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Non-Trouble Code Procedures Diagnostic Procedure Page 3527 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6646 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10357 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12800 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11143 Optional Splice Page 9647 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Steps 2 - 5) Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Wear Limit Inspection ^ Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the following exists: Ball joint stud is worn. - Ball joint is hard to swing. - Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. SWINGING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. 1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool. ^ Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown. ^ Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown. 2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification. Swinging force "A" Upper ball join .................................................................................................................................. 8.1 - 103.2 N (0.8 - 10.5 kgf, 1.8 - 23.2 ft. lbs.) Lower ball joint .............................................................................................................................. 11.4 - 145.5 N (1.1 - 14.8 kgf, 2.5 - 32.7 ft. lbs.) TURNING FORCE Page 6553 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3519 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3262 EXHAUST MANIFOLD Page 12807 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10176 Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Water Valve Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front heater cores to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5143 Case 12 Page 6075 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation - Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. Adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48.3 mm (1.90 in) Adjustable accelerator pedal total pedal adjustment travel : 73.2 mm (2.88 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-562, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2138 CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Page 14012 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5921 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 3619 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 2932 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Page 273 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 3029 1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. 2. Install the camshaft sprocket to the camshaft. 3. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout. Runout: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^ If any damage is found, replace the valve lifter. ^ Select the thickness of the head so that the valve clearance is within the standard when replacing. Valve Lifter Clearance Valve Lifter Diameter ^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter. Standard: 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch) Valve Lifter Hole Diameter ^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool. Standard: 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch) Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) - (valve lifter diameter) Page 619 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 9409 2. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. 3. Remove the shock absorber. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Shock absorber upper and lower nuts. Refer to "Components". Page 9788 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting blower speed control. COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Blower Motor Relay Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. Front Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. - Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit. - Apply 12 volts to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 and verify that the motor operates freely and quietly. Page 11057 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13765 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Combination Switch Reading Function Combination Switch Reading Function For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Description and Operation Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List - Data Monitor Display Item List Page 13801 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3677 WARNING: Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 12762 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 12530 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12510 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 5 - 6) Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9542 8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring retainer to remove it. CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press. 10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press. Tool number: ST30031000 CAUTION: ^ Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft. ^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 12. Remove the wheel bearing cage. NOTE: ^ If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. ^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Axle Shaft ^ Clean and remove all nicks and burrs. ^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary. ^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary. ^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch) Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^ Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Housing ^ Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary INSTALLATION 1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. 2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 257 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 261 Page 12084 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 400 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 10526 Service Port HVAC: Locations Manual Air Conditioner Page 12659 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 8331 Page 1132 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly Drink Holders: Customer Interest Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly Classification: BT06-030 Reference: NTB07~O36 Date: May 21, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; CUP HOLDER LID WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE PROPERLY APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2007 Titan (A60) 2004-2007 Armada (TA6O) IF YOU CONFIRM: The front center console cup holder lid will not open or close properly. ACTIONS: 1. Reposition the lid spring. 2. Install spring retention nylon washer and spring retention screw. NOTE: Do not replace the Console Finisher. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Use appropriate covers to protect upholstery, carpet, etc. during this procedure. 1. Remove cup holder/console finisher. ^ Refer to section IP in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for Console Finisher removal. 2. Place the cup holder/finisher upside down on a clean surface. Page 9218 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 10848 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 14215 Page 14228 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13809 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10096 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10585 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14453 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10072 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12789 Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10198 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Low-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Low-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe Page 4016 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 7079 Disclaimer Locations Component Parts Location Page 12223 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 4) Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 1) Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are normal. WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less ^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly Page 1404 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2513 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 2521 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 8391 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4033 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 13556 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 496 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Page 11814 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12481 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14321 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14306 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3720 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6555 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8414 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12401 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 7163 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-032 Date: 100226 Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking Classification: RA09-005 Reference: NTB10-032 Date: February 26, 2010 2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9948 "CM" I.D.: PB081 - 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM to confirm the correct campaign ID #. Page 1021 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1523 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9567 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3170 12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips). 13. Unbolt alternator and set aside. 14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts). NOTE: ^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise. ^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the pulleys are equal. 15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts). ^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb) 16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal. Page 9666 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Mode Door Motor MODE DOOR MOTOR Page 12720 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1020 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 13056 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14114 To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then butyl adhesive to the leak point. Page 6663 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13629 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10274 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6396 Optional Splice Component Locations Ignition Coil: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2112 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 9180 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1908 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 4253 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6737 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 2686 Coolant: Service Precautions SAE Viscosity Number ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: ^ When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. ^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Page 8628 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 9064 52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side. ^ Remove the clip. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side. ^ 1 screw on each side. 54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side. ^ 1 screw for each coat hanger. Page 5942 ^ Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors ^ Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. 7. Remove the front cross bar. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) following the steps below. a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove left exhaust manifold 9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) following the steps below. a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to AT-271, "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using power tool A/F. e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove right exhaust manifold. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. Page 2551 ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. ^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures ^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Page 3322 d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12 2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper). 3. Install the oil pan (lower). a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section. CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. Page 347 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11193 Page 12563 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 12871 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 12881 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 13609 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove cluster lid C. 2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4156 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 11082 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4) Environmental Impact Information Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Page 3945 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Arm Rest: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Classification: BT08-037 Reference: NTB09-005 Date: January 15, 2009 FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front driver seat armrest is loose. ACTION Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position. b. Fully recline the driver seatback. Page 2762 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Checking for Refrigerant Leaks PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). NOTE: Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. - Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. - Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg-sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. 3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. Page 5303 Case 3 Page 10987 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 115 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6953 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7221 Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using ONLY ONE of the operations shown. Disclaimer Page 11004 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10936 Collision Avoidance Sensor: Service and Repair REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to "Bumper; Service and Repair" for rear sonar sensor removal and installation procedures. Page 7700 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8493 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3820 Page 461 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14136 After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 2403 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5915 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Automatic Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch: Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance .............................................................................................................................................. 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) Page 12650 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 10577 Page 9677 CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts. 6. Remove the center ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to "FLOOR TRIM". 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM" or "HEADLINING". 2. Remove the ventilator grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14272 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5311 Case 11 Page 8297 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 448 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9303 2. Install the large-diameter side of the boots to the gear housing assembly. 3. Install the small-diameter side of the boots to the groove of the inner sockets. 4. Install the boot clamps to the boots, as shown. CAUTION: Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps. 5. Crimp the large-diameter boot clamps, using Tool. Tool number: KV40107300 ( - ) 6. Install the cylinder tubes to the gear housing assembly 7. Install the lock nuts and outer sockets to the inner sockets. 8. Thread the outer sockets onto the inner sockets to the specified length "U", then tighten the lock nuts to the specification. Reconfirm that the tie-rod length "L" is within specification. Maximum inner socket: 115.2 mm (4.54 inch) length "L" Page 6908 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 5203 Case 9 Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 2440 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 7614 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3220 EM-2 Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3. Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5715 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value Page 3563 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 861 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8111 3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released. IMPORTANT: Do not push the brake pedal until step 6. 4. Start the engine and let it idle. ^ Keep the transmission in Park. 5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor. 6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release. NOTE: 2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height". 7. Repeat step 6 ten times. ^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step. 8. Repeat steps 2 though 7. ^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Part 2 Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. This part of the procedure involves two general steps: ^ Setting up ^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card). SETTING UP: 1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1). CAUTION: Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card. Page 134 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7407 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 11869 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity .............................................................................................................................................................. 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54± 0.11 lb) Page 3271 ^ Press-fit the rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: ^ Do not damage the crankshaft or cylinder block. ^ Press-fit the oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. ^ Do not touch grease applied onto the oil seal lip. ^ Do not damage or scratch the outer circumference of the rear oil seal. ^ Tap until flattened with the front edge of the oil seal retainer. 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6658 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10320 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2286 Page 4557 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12955 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8177 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 7613 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 13627 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13976 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1795 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12488 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5240 Case 12 Page 3179 12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips). 13. Unbolt alternator and set aside. 14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts). NOTE: ^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise. ^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the pulleys are equal. 15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts). ^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb) 16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal. Page 11298 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8530 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5508 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 13815 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11282 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5732 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16) Diagnostic Procedure Page 5544 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 8326 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 9362 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. ^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 11063 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7723 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13580 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13645 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2149 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1027 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12952 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10837 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8392 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5900 Page 10808 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6983 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5893 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1478 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11) Page 12123 ^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it. Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation 7. Reinstall the seat, making sure: ^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing. ^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.) 8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2). 9. Check the power seat controls, making sure: ^ They operate correctly. ^ The incident noise is fixed. 10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in step 2). 11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the Electronic Service Manual as needed. Disclaimer Page 10324 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4669 Page 3936 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 3960 Page 5141 Case 10 Page 8112 2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed on the cable). a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port". b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port. 4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows: (This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.) a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II. b. Touch [SUB MODE] c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2). 1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d. 2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d. d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2). 1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5. 2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5. IMPORTANT NOTE ^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5. ^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming". This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming. DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card) Page 13494 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12008 Figure 15 28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure the distance has not changed (see Figure 15). - If N/G, adjust. Figure 16 29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16). - Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm) Figure 17 30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17). Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 06-032A Date: 060425 Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect Reference: NTB06-032A Date: April 25, 2006 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN PASSENGER SIDE DOOR UPPER LATCH This bulletin amends NTB06-032 and includes revised Claims Information. Please discard all previous copies of NTB06-032. CAMPAIGN I.D. # /NHTSA #: PB017/06V-064 APPLIED VEHICLE: 2006 Titan (A60) - King Cab Models only APPLIED VINS: 1N6*A06**6N543640-546599 INTRODUCTION Nissan has determined that some 2006 model year Nissan Titan King Cab vehicles fail to conform to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 206 - Door Locks And Door Retention Components. FMVSS 206 specifies strength requirements for door locks, hinges and latches in vehicles. The upper latch assembly of the right side rear door in some Titan King Cab vehicles does not meet one of the requirements in this standard. This may result in the right side doors coming partially open in the case of certain crashes and increasing the risk of injury to occupants. To prevent this condition from occurring, Nissan will replace the upper latch assemblies with ones that meet the standard. All other requirements under FMVSS 206 and other standards are met. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PB017 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 480. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to delivery under a sale or lease. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1575 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9504 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Transfer Fluid Inspection Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Inspection TRANSFER FLUID Components Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 116 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13726 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Specifications Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications Oil pan drain plug ................................................................................................................................ ................................. 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 7837 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 104 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3744 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6901 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 2075 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13685 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8768 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check Page 10348 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Classification: EM-08-002 Reference: NTB08-058 Date: June 6, 2008 TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt. ACTION A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this Service Procedure. B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it. C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs. D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 213 Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3696 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Specifications Page 256 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10860 Page 14091 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5) Page 5714 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 778 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6248 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13965 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9965 Figure A-3 Page 13160 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3993 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 2768 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 1009 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12623 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove cluster lid A. 2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10518 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 5687 Page 10810 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 12644 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 11052 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6084 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 2104 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 13507 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 4734 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 12085 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 385 Page 3569 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14010 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2000 Page 10046 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 8870 Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2514 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3073 CRANKSHAFT Page 7178 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking) Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Page 3979 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1300 Power Seat Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 382 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6342 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13896 Page 9265 ^ Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed. ^ To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification. Page 793 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6730 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor DVD Player: Customer Interest Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor Classification: BT07-001 Reference: NTB07-015 Date: February 23, 2007 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN; TICKING NOISE FROM DVD MONITOR WHILE OPENED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1(******)7N701300 Vehicles built before: 1N6(******)7N202494 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: August 31, 2006 IF YOU CONFIRM Ticking noise coming from DVD Monitor while opened. ACTIONS ^ Remove part of the roof console to access DVD wire. ^ Apply foam pad to wire and felt tape to hinge. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 4199 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair DRAIN HOSES Removal 1. Remove the headlining. 2. Visually check the drain hoses for proper connections, damage or deterioration. 3. Remove each drain hose and check visually for damage, cracks or deterioration. - Pour water through the drain hose to check for damage. If any damage is found, replace the drain hose. Installation Page 2584 Page 14491 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Valve Lifter Page 2357 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 4144 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13742 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 7020 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4216 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 5941 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. 5. Remove the drive belts. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2). ^ Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number: - (J-44626) CAUTION: Page 13754 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 11055 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8966 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Engine Control Component Parts Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3964 Page 8954 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13493 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5018 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3 Input/output signal chart TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4 System diagram System Diagram - Type 2 Page 1125 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Locations SRS Components Parts Location Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 1707 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 4031 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8597 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5501 Diagram Information and Instructions Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1894 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 10362 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4473 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1480 Page 6056 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: - Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. - Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5169 Case 5 Page 12243 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 9130 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 9674 6. Remove the center ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to "FLOOR TRIM". 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panels as necessary. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL" or "HEADLINING". 2. Remove the ventilator grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10672 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 891 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8786 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 4866 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4699 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 10037 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13098 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5188 Case 10 Page 9921 Figure C-6, Figure C-7 b. Remove the 4 bumper bolts shown. c. Lift the bumper OFF of the locating tabs; both sides. For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper), do the following: Page 5252 Case 5 Page 9459 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 9589 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5903 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7624 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14231 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14202 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6966 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 570 Page 3724 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6869 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3728 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11929 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13821 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 12422 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4601 Page 10513 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4876 Optional Splice Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 10707 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 8758 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1305 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 11115 Amplifier: Service and Repair Removal and Installation AUDIO AMP. Removal 1. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Remove BCM. 3. Disconnect audio amp. and satellite radio tuner (if equipped) connectors. 4. Remove audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket screws and slide audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket down. 5. Remove audio amp. screws (A) and remove audio amp. from audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12899 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 12160 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12357 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8868 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6573 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14259 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1462 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14005 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13104 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 7454 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 12234 7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate. 8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3. Page 6547 Page 12544 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7822 2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then a. Press [VDC] b. Review all precautions C. Press [NEXT] 3. Select the program data (see Figure 17). Page 3451 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3947 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 1531 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13683 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1424 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4564 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4257 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12877 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4687 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 11755 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 527 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 3852 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 4859 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 10635 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8683 13. Remove the lower dash side finisher. ^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever. 14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support. 15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness: a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts, b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support. Page 3729 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 7709 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1128 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8463 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5400 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3286 Timing Chain: Service and Repair TIMING CHAIN Page 7383 Location of Electrical Parts Page 5415 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1933 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5517 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1653 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1535 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5033 System Diagram - Type 15 System Diagram - Type 16 Page 13105 Optional Splice Page 6421 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5630 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 4599 Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams EC-MIL/DL EC-MIL/DL-01 Page 8214 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11724 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 10569 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3522 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8501 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12912 Page 5793 Engine Control Component Parts Location Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Operation CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 9136 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 4498 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5642 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 3092 ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with white arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC Page 13800 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14157 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5319 Check Sheet Part 3 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 12073 12. Remove and replace the switch. 13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan. 14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto the seat frame. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9. WARNING: Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. 15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs. 16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8 Kg-m, 20 ft-lb). 17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan. 18. Re-attach the lower flap cover. Specifications Page 12972 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1791 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5027 System Diagram - Type 8 System Diagram - Type 9 System Diagram Page 7318 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10590 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5133 Case 2 VDC/TCS/ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2975 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Axle Shaft Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative. Page 505 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic Page 7480 4. Remove bolts and detach control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply petroleum jelly. 2. Install transfer control device. a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod. b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. Page 4642 Page 4532 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR LOCK Component Structure Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door window and front door regulator assembly. Refer to "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run. 3. Remove the door side grommet, and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole. Torx bolt 5.3 N.m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) Page 13932 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Classification: BR10-005 Reference: NTB10-081 Date: June 25, 2010 2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body or brake pads, ACTION: Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service. NOTE: The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed brake pad removal procedures. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially drain the brake fluid. ^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual. 2. Remove the front wheels. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal. Page 13969 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9225 Engine Control Component Parts Location Front Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front King Cab SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt Removal - King Cab 1. Remove D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 2. Remove anchor cover and bolt. 3. Remove lower finisher. 4. Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector. 5. Remove seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Calibration of Decel G Sensor Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor Calibration of Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 13073 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6504 Engine Control Component Parts Location Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 1384 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 2645 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 1737 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12224 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 3243 Page 276 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 552 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 13487 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3292 2. Install the camshaft sprockets. ^ Install the intake camshaft sprocket and exhaust camshaft sprockets by selectively using the groove of the dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.) ^ Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the bolts. ^ A = I: Intake ^ B = E: Exhaust 3. Install the crankshaft sprockets for both banks. ^ Install LH bank crankshaft sprocket (B) and RH bank crankshaft sprocket (C) so that their flange side (A) (the larger diameter side without teeth) faces in the direction shown. NOTE: The same parts are used but facing directions are different. 4. Install the timing chains and associated parts. ^ Align the alignment mark on each sprocket and the timing chain for installation. CAUTION: ^ Before installing timing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of alignment mark on timing chain and each sprocket. After the alignment marks are aligned, keep them aligned by holding them by hand. ^ Install the slack guides and tension guides onto the correct side by checking the identification mark on the surface. ^ Install the timing chain tensioner with the plunger locked in with the stopper pin. CAUTION: ^ Before and after the installation of the timing chain tensioner, make sure that the alignment mark on the timing chain is not out of alignment. ^ After installing the timing chain tensioner, remove the stopper pin to release the tensioner. Make sure the tensioner is released. ^ To avoid chain-link skipping of the timing chain, do not move crankshaft or camshafts until the front cover is installed. 5. In the same way as for the RH bank, install the timing chain and associated parts on the LH bank. 6. Install the oil pump. 7. Install the oil pump drive spacer as follows: ^ Install so that the front mark on the front edge of the oil pump drive spacer faces the front of the engine. Page 4688 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 9627 The intake door control determines the intake door position based on the position of the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin. In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines the intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the DEFROST, or OFF switches are pushed, the front air control sets the intake door at the fresh position. Intake Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motor The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Page 5161 Case 14 Case 15 Page 10952 2. Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire as shown in Figure 1. 3. Reinstall the console in reverse order of removal. 4. With the DVD in the open position, check for rattle noise by tapping around the console to make sure the incident has been resolved. Disclaimer Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H" and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds. 2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. ^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. ^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table. Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern 1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. Page 8464 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13055 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1106 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14219 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 802 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13888 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6358 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2460 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 8647 Page 1611 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6363 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1454 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2697 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid: ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Page 9570 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Service Precautions Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions Precautions for Three Way Catalyst If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. - Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. - When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. - Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812 Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Classification: EM-10-009 Reference: NTB10-094 Date: August 12, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure WARNING: Page 1725 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6791 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Automatic Air Conditioner Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Low-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Flexible Hose Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. High-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Low-Pressure Pipe Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe Page 4868 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Automatic Air Conditioner Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Front Blower Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Page 7741 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 10455 Page 4926 Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Horn Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12369 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 305 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11642 5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage. ^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found. 6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt. 7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal. ^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft) Page 13169 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5360 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9248 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Suspension On-Vehicle Inspection and Service KNUCKLE On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Removal and Installation Removal and Installation Page 13637 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 10871 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2359 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6047 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 795 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 14212 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 271 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12444 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 9111 Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces. 60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it. 61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side). ^ 2 clips on each side. 62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector. 63. Take the harness loose from the body roof. Page 8217 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3625 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4930 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16) Diagnostic Procedure Page 4732 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1862 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11812 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12349 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1848 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8546 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Parking lamps - Tail and license lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table. IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. Page 3966 Page 841 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 11152 Page 1705 Page 10076 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5909 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 6288 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Page 12435 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 13126 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9763 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2370 Page 14465 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8329 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2215 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5426 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1690 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 9000 active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. Part 1 Part 2 - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 206 a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20. You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back ON. Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen. b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21). ^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference. 7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF. 9. Continue with Section 5. Section 5 Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTC(s). 1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically. ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 34 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4123 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4119 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13597 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 805 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10639 Optional Splice Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 14417 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8878 Optional Splice Page 8097 VERY IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector. ^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly. CAUTION ^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set. ^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector pin damage may result. ^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the ABS/VDC system can occur. 4. Continue with Section 2 Section 2 Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs. CAUTION: It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before performing the remaining sections of this procedure. 1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure 12). 3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)] 4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle systems: ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIRBAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) Page 6414 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4256 Page 4354 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 1417 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14052 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1847 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 190 Disclaimer Parts 1-4 Descriptions There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order. Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis. ^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure. Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. ^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card. ^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure. Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST). ^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure. Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. ^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure. NOTE: These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician. Part 1 Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis. 1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis. ^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. Page 11809 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9879 When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 1 - 2) Page 13749 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5741 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 10668 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7951 Brake Pad: Specifications Brake Pad Front brake CLZ31VC Pad Length x width x thickness .......................................................................................................... 111.0 x 73.5 x 9.5 mm (4.73 x 2.894 x 0.374 inch) Standard thickness (new) .................................................................................... ........................................................................... 11.88 mm (0.468 inch) Repair limit thickness .......... .............................................................................................................................................................. 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Rear brake CLZ31VC Pad Length x width x thickness .......................................................................................................... 83.0 x 33.0 x 8.5 mm (3.266 x 1.299 x 0.335 inch) AD14VE Standard thickness (new) ...................................................................... ......................................................................................... 12.13 mm (0.478 inch) Repair limit thickness .............................................................................................................................................. .......................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Page 1371 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 7029 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5545 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Specifications Piston: Specifications PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE Piston Pin Hole Diameter ^ Measure diameter of piston pin hole using suitable tool. Standard: 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 0.8661 inch) Piston Pin Diameter ^ Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool. Standard: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 0.8659 inch) Piston and Piston Pin Clearance (Piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) - (Piston pin diameter) Standard: 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 inch) ^ If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both the piston/piston pin assembly and the connecting rod assembly with reference to the specification of each part. ^ Refer to the piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin assembly. ^ Refer to the connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod. NOTE: The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston pin) grade are provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For Page 11529 16. Remove cable sheath and barrel cable end from upper door latch (see Figure 11) 17. Install barrel cable end and cable sheath onto new upper door latch. See the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install new upper door latch to door. CAUTION: ^ Be careful routing the wiring harness. ^ Do not pinch wire harness between door and upper door latch. ^ Torque bolts to: 5.8 Nm (0.59 Kg-m, 51 in-lb.) 16. Reinstall upper door latch white cable clip into door. Page 1031 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9539 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. ^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 14078 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 996 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine. Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD" position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6. Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Page 5733 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 3429 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8754 Optional Splice Page 8183 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 12716 Page 592 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 6992 Column Shift Models REMOVAL Floor shift 1. Remove A/T finisher. 2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. 3. Disconnect selector control cable. 4. Remove control device assembly. Column shift 1. Remove the column shift control. 2. Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin. INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. ^ After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position. Page 6877 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1112 Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4968 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 7071 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9198 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front lower link (2). CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components". Toe-In TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. Page 4835 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 5646 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 2998 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 14489 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 642 Attachment General Procedure Page 12040 Figure 18 31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). 32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely. 33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make sure they all snap together securely. 34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first. 35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.). - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information. 36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should. 37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal operation, procedure A or B must be performed. Procedure A: 1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".) 2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ). 3. End Procedure B: 1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH). 2. End 38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed: - Power Window Initialization - Power Sunroof Initialization - Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning - Throttle Valve closed Position Learning - Idle Air Volume Learning - Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment Page 11109 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 14009 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1807 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12589 Page 1181 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12938 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13484 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 319 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12978 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12715 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8738 52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side. ^ Remove the clip. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side. ^ 1 screw on each side. 54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side. ^ 1 screw for each coat hanger. Page 12023 Figure 18 31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). 32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely. 33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make sure they all snap together securely. 34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first. 35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.). - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information. 36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should. 37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal operation, procedure A or B must be performed. Procedure A: 1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".) 2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ). 3. End Procedure B: 1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH). 2. End 38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed: - Power Window Initialization - Power Sunroof Initialization - Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning - Throttle Valve closed Position Learning - Idle Air Volume Learning - Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment Page 2109 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9587 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5021 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Page 12714 Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2377 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1530 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 1678 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 13326 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12661 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4100 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 8467 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6250 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 11083 Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 11533 ^ Torque bolt to: 49 N-m (5.0 Kg-m, 36 ft-lb.) 26. Reassemble remaining parts in reverse order of removal. 27. Reconnect battery. 28. Reprogram radio presets. Page 13980 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 2126 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 1073 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3564 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12945 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7836 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 4848 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 5462 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 10265 Page 10286 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2353 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 9109 55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only). ^ Open the side bolt covers. ^ Remove the 2 bolts. 56. Remove the dome lamp. a. Remove the clear lamp cover b. Remove the 2 screws. c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector. Page 3490 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. 5. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 365 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12586 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3557 Optional Splice Page 12949 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9089 16. Attach the new body clip to the body. Final Quality Check 17. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition ON. b. Look at the air bag light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) NOTE: ^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim, connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on. ^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly. Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side) ^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle (under the carpet) and inside the rear door. ^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image. 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full forward and full rearward). 3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position. 4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first. 5. Remove the front seat. a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts. b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors. Page 1159 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4937 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 5658 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9716 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal Seat Back: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal Classification: BT08-023A Reference: NTB08-062A Date: July 21, 20009 SEAT BACK BOARD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION This bulletin has been amended. Applied Vehicles has been updated. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2009 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin contains the Service Procedure for the removal and installation of the seat back board. Refer to Module A for removal and installation of the soft seat back board. Refer to Module B for the removal and installation of the hard seat back board. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Module A (for soft seat backs) 1. Move / adjust the front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position. 2. Remove the right front soft seat back board as follows: NOTE: The seat back board is held on with: ^ 2 top tabs ^ 2 side tabs ^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips from the Parts Information table). Page 13525 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6241 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 125 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12363 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5821 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9526 c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance) Page 3705 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Testing and Inspection Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 7307 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7803 * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]. 5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems: IMPORTANT: You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all DTC(s) are erased. ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIR BAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) 6. After all DTC(s) are erased: ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. ^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector. ^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle. ^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the instrument panel. 7. Continue with Part 4. Part 4 Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. 1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming card. 2. Go to the ASIST terminal. 3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II. ^ Use ID Code 050602. ^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. END Page 11211 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7734 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12116 ^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it. Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation 7. Reinstall the seat, making sure: ^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing. ^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.) 8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2). 9. Check the power seat controls, making sure: ^ They operate correctly. ^ The incident noise is fixed. 10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in step 2). 11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the Electronic Service Manual as needed. Disclaimer Page 7315 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8721 b. Disconnect the electrical connectors. c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle. 7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup holder: a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat. a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts. b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. Page 3191 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ^ Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position. 1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor harness connector. 4. Remove the oil pressure sensor. 5. Install Tools. Tool number : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2) 6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load. CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. 8. After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows: a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running. Page 6490 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2960 Wheels: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. 2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. Page 12606 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5244 Case 17 Case 18 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 9605 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 12 - 14) Page 12858 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8763 Page 5170 Case 6 Page 2901 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Specifications Page 10085 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7320 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13266 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3488 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. 5. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAN Communication Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication CAN COMMUNICATION System Description CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Unit NOTE: Confirming the presence of the following items helps to identify CAN system type. - Models with 4WD - Models with ABLS Page 667 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4092 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 3168 Disclaimer Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and confirm: ^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt and ^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming. 4. Remove intake duct and engine cover. 5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6. 6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual for removal procedure. 7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist. 8. Remove front right wheel. 9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure. 10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts). 11. Check the pulley alignment as follows: Page 7338 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3201 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F) API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III Page 12996 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9983 - Driver side only. Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) Figure C-20 d. Install and torque 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket (see Figure C-20). - Driver side only. Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper) do the following: Figure C-21 a. Install 2 bumper to fender screws. - Driver side only. Page 7869 Traction Control Module: Description and Operation TCS CONTROL UNIT Description The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Page 12024 - Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment NOTE: You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset. Disclaimer Page 4812 Page 4951 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9157 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Specifications Page 1179 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5112 Case 11 Page 933 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 4339 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13392 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3908 Page 5172 Case 8 Automatic Air Conditioner Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system. Page 12913 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 11200 Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Brake Pad Page 4923 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. Page 8296 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Transmission Pan Tighten new oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts ................................................. ................................................................................................................. 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch lbs.) Page 2959 Wheels: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Page 3517 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2527 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Page 4247 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 7054 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 10050 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 12387 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Tests ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 4118 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13476 Optional Splice Page 3698 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 393 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6491 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 218 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 8585 Optional Splice Page 2588 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 10369 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 8289 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4702 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 6174 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12928 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4528 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check (Step 1) Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: - Power windows - Power door locks - Remote keyless entry system - Power sunroof - Rear window wiper Page 2902 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Page 4367 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4155 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 9466 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Page 14404 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 8887 Page 37 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 7818 ^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see Figure 10). c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8). ^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically. d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II. Procedure Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card CAUTION: ^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections. ^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5. Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s). Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input". Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming. Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTCs. Section 1 Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp "trickle charge"). IMPORTANT You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't. Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain: ^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II battery is low. ^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on during reprogramming. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure 11). Page 4318 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 2943 Tire Page 1585 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4574 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5978 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 1792 Page 11319 - through BCM terminal 51 - to trailer turn relay RH terminal 1. Left turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - through trailer turn relay LH terminal 3 - to trailer connector terminal 1. Right turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - through trailer turn relay RH terminal 3 - to trailer connector terminal 4. TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION The trailer stop lamps are controlled by the electric brake. The electric brake receives stop lamp switch signal when the brake pedal is pressed. When the brake pedal is pressed, power is supplied - through electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 3 - to trailer connector terminal 3. TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION The trailer power supply is controlled by the trailer tow relay 2. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 16 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1. When energized, the trailer tow relay 2 supplies power - through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7 - to trailer connector terminal 5. Page 6879 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7384 Control Unit: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 5317 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 6140 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 5107 Case 6 Page 247 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5860 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8618 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10425 After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace ambient sensor. Page 8610 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6213 Page 8525 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4519 - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: - Ignition switch - Key switch (insert) - Hazard switch - Main door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab) - Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Part 1 Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9583 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8581 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 832 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 9139 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 6159 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2131 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9707 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5863 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7428 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4450 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 11066 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver (Steps 1 - 3) Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver (Step 4) Page 10035 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6434 Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50 cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more. - It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor. Page 7016 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12695 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 2053 Optional Splice Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 14263 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6046 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 2298 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13666 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check Page 13138 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 8436 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12385 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 13631 Page 5439 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6306 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5230 Case 2 Page 10620 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation Occupant Classification System (OCS) The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-II can be used to confirm the passenger air bag status (readiness). Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions Page 1419 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12255 Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 13254 Page 12375 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 333 Page 4823 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 5144 Case 13 Case 14 Page 8498 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2550 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds Page 4001 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 4992 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2445 CLAIMS INFORMATION NOTE: This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line. Page 13043 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9490 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 13412 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 4021 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7815 b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6). c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402. d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad. ^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7). Page 6875 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4952 Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Page 1452 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 60 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10371 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6830 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Light Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12783 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5460 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST. Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If Page 5440 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 9059 31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool. 32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40. 33. Remove the rear door panel. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. Page 10983 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4594 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 11698 Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 12900 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 10375 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7443 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8950 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13917 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 2036 concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C (1,292 - 1,472 degrees F). HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 5736 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 14380 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11178 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3791 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Power Window System Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 4019 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3134 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 14501 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2940 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1719 Optional Splice Page 5123 Case 6 Page 8551 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 12702 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5028 - Type 10 System Diagram - Type 11 System Diagram - Type 12 Page 8282 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 2299 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13402 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 814 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 5332 Case 13 Page 8801 Page 12512 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 5 - 6) Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate Page 6257 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 1649 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11815 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2461 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 13996 Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4) Page 12359 Page 13545 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11735 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5209 Case 16 Case 17 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 6141 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: - Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. - Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 1197 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 632 Page 14096 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 13120 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4936 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 5041 How To Use Check Sheet Table HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE 1. Unit names displayed on CONSULT-II 2. "No indication": Put a check mark to it if the unit name described in step 1 is not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen of CONSULT-II. (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II via CAN communication line) "-": Column not used (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II excluding CAN communication line) 3. "NG": Display "NG" when malfunction is detected in the initial diagnosis of the diagnosed unit. Replace the unit if "NG" is displayed. "-": Column not used (Initial diagnosis is not performed.) 4. "UNKWN": Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not transmit the data normally. Put a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on CONSULT-II. "-": Column not used (Transmit diagnosis is not performed.) 5. "UNKWN": Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not receive the data normally. Put a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on CONSULT-II. "-": Column not used (It is not necessary for CAN communication trouble diagnosis.) NOTE: CAN communication diagnosis checks if CAN communication works normally. (Contents of data are not diagnosed.) - When the initial conditions are reproduced, refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced". - When the initial conditions are not reproduced, refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced". Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1035 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 755 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 2279 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 582 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 13793 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 14456 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 424 Page 9097 13. Remove the lower dash side finisher. ^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever. 14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support. 15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness: a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts, b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support. Page 8224 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 9081 ^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors. ^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the Update Kit. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. ^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories. NOTE: ^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed. ^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 12553 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13822 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 7235 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11289 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5374 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 5176 Case 13 Case 14 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 5627 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 2159 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 8207 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8117 e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay". 8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8): a. Make sure: ^ CONSULT-II is OFF. ^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II. ^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II. ^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port. b. Turn CONSULT-II ON. c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN". NOTE: If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8. d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC. Page 6922 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3245 8. Remove access cover 9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft. Tool number: ( - ) J47245 a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool. - Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in). 10. Remove the front cover. a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. Page 13522 Optional Splice Page 595 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 6180 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10301 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5788 Page 3359 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10173 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 4) Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 6682 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 11114 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3614 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 122 Page 4597 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14149 Windshield: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). 3. Remove cowl top cover. 4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. - Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. - If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When the windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. Page 4510 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 11278 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14305 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5586 Page 3876 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 7656 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 8698 64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin. 65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows: a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. Page 6251 Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 12578 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3560 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1782 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6774 Attachment General Procedure Page 3312 EM-6 Page 10213 11. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: - Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant". Page 4252 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3482 Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Water Valve Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front heater cores to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 2) Page 8687 25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor. 26. Take the harness loose from along the floor. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's located on the rocker panel (see figure above). 27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt. NOTE: For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the seat belt. Page 8891 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3572 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4043 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10054 When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM. BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. Description of Control System The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure: Page 4032 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13868 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1052 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11128 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5223 Case 12 Page 7747 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Removal and Installation A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation Page 9980 a. Install the jumper harness on the new fan motor as show. - New fan assembly and harness kit are listed in the Parts Information. b. Go to Installation of the fan assembly. Figure C-14 Jumper harness installation on NEW 140 watt fan assembly Install Condenser Fan Assembly Figure C-15 10. Pull the bumper forward and install the fan assembly. Page 13182 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 3652 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. 5. Remove the drive belts. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2). ^ Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number: - (J-44626) CAUTION: Page 13977 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1164 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8001 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 14189 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 6309 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13237 1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. 4. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear combination lamp mounting bolts : 14.2 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 126 in-lb) Page 9096 d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. NOTE: Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle. 11. Remove the front kick plate. Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. 12. Remove the rear kick plate; ^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. Page 5867 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3716 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3573 Page 2974 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. ^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8095 CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE (SEE FIGURE 10). ^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer (download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur. ^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK". Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6. 9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II. a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8). b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK". ^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration. Page 7314 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12873 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 7164 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 10505 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 33 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11246 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4068 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Fuse and Relay Box Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Horn Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 384 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12636 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13000 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2284 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 634 Page 3470 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4486 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Service and Repair Splash Guard: Service and Repair MUDGUARD Removal and Installation NOTE: Crew Cab shown King Cab similar. Page 4239 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3629 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 860 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11874 Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 4) Page 11133 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Tweeter FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. Remove front tweeter grille. 2. Remove front tweeter screws (A). 3. Disconnect connector and remove front tweeter. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5106 Case 5 Page 3593 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 8098 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF. 6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded into it (see Part 1). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13). ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF". * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14). This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during reprogramming. CAUTION: DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below. 9. Continue with Section 3. Section 3 Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input" 1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE] Page 1804 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4066 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value Page 4366 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12710 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 13957 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 2082 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6254 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Page 777 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2065 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 939 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: - Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures CAUTION: - The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function". Page 12746 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 13599 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 10311 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4465 Component Parts Location Page 2689 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary before installing the vented reservoir cap. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the "MAX" line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Page 13076 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4466 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8777 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 14097 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2477 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 4970 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1465 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8822 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6238 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13014 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8709 vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS REPAIR OVERVIEW SERVICE PROCEDURE Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed. Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67 campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being serviced. Locations Amplifier: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5659 Page 13539 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection Page 7620 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10378 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Manual Air Conditioner COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor (front), mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature control dial are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air conditioner system. Page 1838 Page 7368 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 9366 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-35, "Front Disc Brake". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Specifications ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 8816 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12254 Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 4284 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 12653 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6485 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10685 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Fold rear seat backs down. 2. Remove bolts and remove tether anchors. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9949 "CM" I.D.: PB077-2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM to confirm the correct campaign ID #. Page 8376 Page 10854 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10273 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5210 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 3449 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7664 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 4825 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 7939 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert piston into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body. Page 2266 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 14071 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5856 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard Condenser Fan Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Infiniti/QX56 2005-2006 Nissan/Armada 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 24, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V284000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: PE08037 COMPONENT: Equipment: Electrical: Air Conditioner POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 180664 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 180,664 M/Y 2005-2006 Titan, Armada and Infiniti QX56 vehicles manufactured after March 17, 2005, That are equipped with a Visteon air conditioning condenser fan motor. The fan motor may not be properly sealed allowing excessive water intrusion and inadequate drainage of moisture. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause corrosion in the motor leading possibly to overheating and a fire. REMEDY: Dealers will install a "Thermal Protector Kit" and test the air conditioning condenser fan motor and replace it if necessary. The recall is expected to begin near the end of July 2008. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Automatic Air Conditioner Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7868 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 220 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 9083 1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light: ^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3. ^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2). ^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the warning light before proceeding. 2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge) 1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area. 2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube: ^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits. Page 5524 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 660 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4636 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 121 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12104 5. Remove the snap ring and the lumbar support lever knob. 6. CAUTION: On the passenger seat during installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they were originally in. Do not add additional clips. Disconnect the seatback heater harness. Remove the seatback trim and pad assembly. Remove the hog ring to separate the seatback trim from the pad and the heater unit. Page 2608 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection ENGINE MAINTENANCE WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range "A" (between three line notches) as shown. NOTE: ^ Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold. ^ When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be "A" as shown. ^ The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner. 3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Page 14021 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Cowl: Customer Interest Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Classification: BT07-011 Reference: NTB07-034 Date: may 9, 2007 2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed. NOTE: If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see NTB05-112. ACTIONS 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. 3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak. 4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate warranty claims coding. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. ^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine wall. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. ^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor. Page 5185 Case 7 Page 5834 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 11941 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 11007 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12549 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10892 Ignition Key In Signal: Testing and Inspection Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2064 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4112 Optional Splice Page 1463 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 4307 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 6401 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13938 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 10404 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Testing and Inspection Security Indicator Lamp Check Page 5079 Case 6 Page 1825 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7481 c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 9586 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3911 Page 4126 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5216 Case 5 Page 11594 Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 14271 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1881 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11034 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7018 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12649 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 13064 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9099 d. Take the harness branch loose from the body. 17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt. 18. Remove the lower side finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt. 20. Remove the harness ground bolt. 21. Remove the floor mat holder. Page 3618 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12855 Door Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1123 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4057 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 3171 17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves. ^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush. ^ Do not use a power tool. 18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy. 19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for installation procedure. 20. Connect harness clips. 21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure. 22. Install front right wheel. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first. 25. Start engine. 26. Confirm the issue is resolved. 27. Reprogram the radio presets. 28. Reinitialize the power sunroof. Page 7433 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6940 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1042 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14289 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3240 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side. Page 5670 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6185 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3643 Water Pump: Service and Repair WATER PUMP CAUTION: ^ When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt. ^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump. ^ Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below. CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane. ^ Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. ^ Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Page 3864 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 6666 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 9580 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6562 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13176 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 1130 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8631 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Page 3902 Page 9098 c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts. d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it. 16. If equipped with side curtain air bags: ^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag will be covered later in this procedure. ^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows. a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out of the way. b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector. c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag. Page 1904 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 2236 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4462 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 5891 Optional Splice Locations Page 7032 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9396 WARNING: This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension. EITHER: Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle. OR Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle). DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove. 1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip). 4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing. ^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them. ^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly Kit". ^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly. 5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads. Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb). Page 7365 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 7321 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: Service and Repair LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY NOTE: Before replacing any suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of the noise being experienced. 1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to the wire or rail groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required. 2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, remove rear guide, then replace wire. Page 8385 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7396 Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) ^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 7569 c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 9693 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11306 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512 Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Classification: BR06-007 Reference: NTB06-040 Date: May 12, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) equipped with VDC IF YOU CONFIRM A customer reports: ^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking. * This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated. ACTIONS ^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. Page 5250 Case 3 Page 13947 Optional Splice Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6460 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9184 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 7964 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 4759 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 81 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 10058 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the three control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. 3. Remove the four screws securing the front air control unit to the cluster lid C. 4. Disconnect the two electrical connectors. 5. Remove the front air control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11525 NOTE: Clip locations are shown as dots in the picture. Page 2452 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4585 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 13905 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 8742 64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin. 65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows: a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. Page 550 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 4858 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 3759 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 14449 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 6954 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13860 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1586 Page 13562 Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 1871 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 4) Page 3038 ^ Compress the plunger and hold it using a stopper pin when installing. ^ Loosen the slack guide side timing chain by rotating the camshaft hexagonal part if mounting space is small. Chain tensioner bolts: 6.9 Nm (0.70 kg-m, 61 inch lbs.) b. Remove the stopper pin and release the plunger, and then apply tension to the timing chain. c. Install the RH bank timing chain tensioner cover onto the front cover. ^ Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tensioner cover bolts: 9.0 Nm (0.92 kg-m, 80 inch lbs.) 7. Check and adjust valve clearances. 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4128 Page 12847 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove cluster lid A. 2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7607 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10574 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8612 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 603 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 12244 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 877 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4401 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find Page 926 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 462 Page 2139 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7809 Disclaimer Parts 1-4 Descriptions There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order. Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis. ^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure. Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. ^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card. ^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure. Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST). ^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure. Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. ^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure. NOTE: These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician. Part 1 Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis. 1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis. ^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. Page 2309 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 8497 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7795 ^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see Figure 10). c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8). ^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically. d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II. Procedure Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card CAUTION: ^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections. ^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5. Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s). Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input". Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming. Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTCs. Section 1 Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp "trickle charge"). IMPORTANT You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't. Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain: ^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II battery is low. ^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on during reprogramming. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure 11). Page 7658 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 14428 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10873 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 920 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9848 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. Page 1469 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4487 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9502 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1916 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove cluster lid C. 2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10220 The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. 3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to "SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F). If less than Locations Line Pressure Test Port Page 3051 CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed. ^ Remove the connecting rod bearing cap and bearings. Measure the plastigage width using the scale on the plastigage bag. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that described in "Method of Measurement". CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING ^ When connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with the connecting rod bearings installed, the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Standard: There must be crush height. ^ If standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings. Connecting Rod Bearing Page 4346 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1650 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4933 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Cowl: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Classification: BT07-011 Reference: NTB07-034 Date: may 9, 2007 2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed. NOTE: If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see NTB05-112. ACTIONS 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. 3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak. 4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate warranty claims coding. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. ^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine wall. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. ^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor. Page 9349 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Page 12214 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 3) Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4) Page 2716 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F) Rear final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 gear oil Page 13025 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 8620 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9540 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Axle Shaft Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative. Page 5806 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11207 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10875 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13538 Page 6725 Attachment General Procedure Page 10589 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 2060 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4441 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8807 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 75 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 250 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6886 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12164 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5422 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12584 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13903 Page 10651 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11213 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5286 Case 3 Page 8114 6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4). Page 5557 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 1081 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14448 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10616 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. CAUTION: - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 5547 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 8047 Parking Brake Control: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. 2. Partially engage parking brake pedal to access adjusting nut. 3. Insert a deep socket wrench to rotate adjusting nut and loosen cable sufficiently. Then, disengage the parking brake pedal. 4. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 5. Remove the disc rotor and measure inner diameter at widest point using Tool. Tool number: - (J-21177-A) 6. Transfer measurement less 0.6 mm to the parking brake shoes and adjust accordingly. 7. Using wheel nuts, secure the disc rotor to the hub to prevent it from tilting. 8. Rotate the disc rotor to make sure there is no drag. 9. Adjust cable as follows: a. Operate pedal 10 or more times with a force of 490 N (50 kg-f, 110 lbs.). b. Rotate adjusting nut with deep socket to adjust pedal stroke to specification. Pedal stroke: 3 - 4 notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 ft. lbs.)] c. With parking brake pedal completely disengaged, make sure there is no drag on the parking brake. 10. Install the disc rotor. 11. Install the wheel and tire using power tool. 12. Install the lower instrument panel LH. Collision Diagnosis Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Collision Diagnosis COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision Check the SRS components using the table. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SRS Inspection (For Frontal Collision) Part 1 Page 11283 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5238 Case 10 Page 5281 Case 16 Case 17 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 8169 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console or center seat as required. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 9743 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 143 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 1366 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 5910 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12368 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13137 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5775 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7967 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc Front brake CLZ31VC Rotor outer diameter x thickness ................................................................................................................................... 320 x 26 mm (12.60 x 1.02 inch) Standard thickness (new) ..................................................................................... ............................................................................ 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Repair limit thickness ........... ........................................................................................................................................................... 24.5 mm (0.965 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) ....................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) .................................................................................................................................... 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) Rear brake CLZ31VC Rotor outer diameter x thickness ................................................................................................................................... 320 x 14 mm (12.60 x 0.55 inch) AD14VE Standard thickness (new) ...................................................................... ........................................................................................... 14.0 mm (0.551 inch) REpair limit thickness .............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 12.0 mm (0.472 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) ....................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) ................................................................................................................................... 0.07 mm (0.003 inch) Page 1969 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 2103 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5849 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9333 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Page 6571 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 31 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 14466 Optional Splice Page 12856 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5430 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 718 Page 6692 Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch Page 13366 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 10646 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 528 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 8886 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13663 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 11900 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11286 Page 1732 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6857 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9622 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 13 - 15) Page 5901 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10867 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2474 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 6271 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 316 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13639 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6622 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14230 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13031 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Page 13426 2. Using a suitable tool (A), remove map lamp lens (1). 3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight downward to remove. Map lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around tool to protect the housing and lens. Page 10026 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 301 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4656 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 1304 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 77 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case Classification: TF10-003 Reference: NTB10-047 Date: March 19, 2010 TITAN, FRONTIER, XTERRA, AND PATHFINDER; OIL LEAKING FROM TRANSFER CASE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2005 - 2007 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED TRANSFER CASES: TX15A and TX15B assemblies IF YOU CONFIRM: Oil is leaking from one or a combination of three bolts at rear of the transfer case (See Figure 1). ^ Figure 1 shows the transfer case viewed from the rear. ACTION: Refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE on Page 3 of this bulletin. ^ If the bolts are not missing, do NOT replace the transfer case, transfer control device, or transfer control unit for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4259 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1149 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 9733 2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3). 3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3). 4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3. ^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness. Page 5349 DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Description Of "CAN Diag Support MNTR" Screen For ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) ABS models Page 13509 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14446 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7947 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. On-Board Inspection Brake Fluid: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection On-board Inspection LEVEL CHECK ^ Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is within the standard (between MAX and MIN lines). ^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. ^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. ^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake system for fluid leakage. Page 11920 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12782 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1744 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13595 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 8103 a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20. You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back ON. Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen. b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21). ^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference. 7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF. 9. Continue with Section 5. Section 5 Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTC(s). 1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically. ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF. Page 3900 Page 1119 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Front Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3929 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 9910 Figure A-3 Page 7788 2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed on the cable). a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port". b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port. 4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows: (This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.) a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II. b. Touch [SUB MODE] c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2). 1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d. 2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d. d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2). 1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5. 2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5. IMPORTANT NOTE ^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5. ^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming". This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming. DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card) Page 12594 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5217 Case 6 Page 11573 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 1309 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 7176 5. Record the rotating torque. 6. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 7. Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. 8. Remove companion flange using a suitable tool. 9. Remove front oil seal using Tool. Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. INSTALLATION Page 4944 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 12577 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 12131 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4090 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 2267 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification. Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) Service and Repair Sun Shade: Service and Repair SUNSHADE Removal 1. Remove the sunroof frame assembly. Refer to "SUNROOF UNIT". 2. Remove the sunshade stoppers (2 points) from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly. 3. Remove the sunshade assembly from the rear end of the sun roof frame assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9938 Figure D-14 c. Stick the 2nd piece of protector 4 on the fan shroud as shown. - Overlap the 2nd piece on top of the 1st piece at the spot shown. - Overlap about 10 mm (1/4 inch) but not less than 5 mm (1/8 inch). - Fold and stick the protector under the shroud. d. Install the 3rd piece in the same manner as the 2nd piece. Figure D-15 e. Install the 4th piece of Protector 4 as shown. - Align the protector along the 1 o'clock rib as shown. - Don't cover up the bolt hole. - Overlap the 4th piece on top of the 3rd piece at the spot shown. - Overlap must be at least 5 mm (1/8 inch). - Fold and stick the protector under the shroud. 12. Press and smooth all parts of protector 4. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan shroud. 13. Install the motor in the shroud with the harness in the correct location (about 4 o'clock) as shown in Figure D-16. Page 5904 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 VDC/TCS/ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5351 DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R Page 7411 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1692 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 8280 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6574 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 14166 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1022 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1288 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Step 3) Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 203 2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then a. Press [VDC] b. Review all precautions C. Press [NEXT] 3. Select the program data (see Figure 17). Page 12093 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4059 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 856 Optional Splice Page 1209 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Sunroof Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1254 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 8419 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10156 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 14253 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Service and Repair Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair Wiper Motor and Linkage REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. 2. Remove wiper frame bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 3. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. - Check the grease condition of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install wiper frame assembly. 4. Install cowl top. 5. Ensure that wiper blades stop within proper clearance. Refer to front wiper arm adjustment. Page 12734 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7425 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Locations Page 13270 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14065 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11802 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8979 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 14043 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 1 - 2) Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1083 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Automatic Air Conditioner Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6722 Page 5809 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 9812 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9571 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8960 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6095 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 5992 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview ECM Circuit Inspection Page 6064 Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 119 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3992 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 7025 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4765 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 13636 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1431 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13747 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 363 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12788 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 123 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 13544 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 10368 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 9087 ^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the tube. ^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6. 10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7). ^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch). Page 13022 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14488 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7993 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components" (front disc brake), "Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. Page 4822 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 13173 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11199 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12631 Door Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9326 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Page 8134 Repair Flow Chart Page 1603 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9754 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13760 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Display Item List - Data Monitor With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 2375 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9619 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 1 - 4) Page 1886 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6431 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11296 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4891 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1395 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5817 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 179 2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15). NOTE: ^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery. ^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.) 3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15). ^ A reading above 12 volts confirms; a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle, b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following may be the cause: a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it is not working). b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight). c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins). d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11). CAUTION: ^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts. ^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15). 4. Continue with Section 4. Section 4 Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming 1. Press [BACK] two times. Page 4607 Page 2318 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 8989 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4516 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 8299 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 9345 Sunroof Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8778 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5911 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13128 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12415 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12207 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8205 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3827 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10433 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 9 - 12) Page 13223 Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 5) SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257F or B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder. Page 9975 Figure C-4, Figure C-5 a. Remove 1 bumper bolt shown in Figures C-4 and C-5: - Driver side only. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13387 Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4946 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Page 5960 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 3890 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Automatic Air Conditioner Heater Core: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner HEATER CORE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. Page 2373 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4463 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8511 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 9650 Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Intake door control system components are: - Front air control - Intake door motor System Operation The intake door control determines the intake door positions based on the position of the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin. Page 3155 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 11885 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 4) Page 8437 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5719 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 5293 Case 10 Page 2287 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 11554 14. Remove latch switch connector from door (see Figure 9). 15. Remove three bolts from upper door latch. Page 5071 Case 12 Case 13 NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 6287 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Replaced Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Diagram Information and Instructions DVD Player: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11961 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair SUNROOF MOTOR Removal CAUTION: - When removing the sunroof motor, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position. - Never run the removed motor as a single unit. 1. Position the sunroof assembly in the fully closed position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the roof console assembly. Refer to "HEADLINING". 4. Disconnect the sunroof motor harness connector (2). 5. Remove the sunroof motor screws (3), then remove the sunroof motor (1). Installation CAUTION: Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position. - :Vehicle front 1. Move the sunroof motor (1) laterally little by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof unit and the installation surface becomes parallel. Then, secure the motor with screws (3). Sunroof motor screws :2.3 N.m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb) 2. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the sunroof motor (1). 3. Install the roof console assembly. Refer to "HEADLINING". 4. Reset the sunroof motor memory. Refer to "MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE". Page 5895 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 594 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 9713 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9645 Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: - Front air control - Air mix door motor (front) - PBR (built-into air mix motor) System Operation The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor (front), while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor (front) to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the Page 1221 Collision Avoidance Sensor: Service and Repair REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to "Bumper; Service and Repair" for rear sonar sensor removal and installation procedures. Page 5266 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 13332 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 295 Page 2334 2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 4509 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10804 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5050 Inspection Between TCM And Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit (Steps 3 - 4) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Page 12076 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9775 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7187 9. Remove side bearing caps. 10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Page 1023 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6541 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8678 c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle. 8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console: a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly. b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then c. Remove the glove box assembly. Page 6489 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure Page 8866 Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13485 Page 10065 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3308 EM-2 Page 2154 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9817 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5020 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Service Precautions Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions Precautions for Three Way Catalyst If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. - Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. - When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. - Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Page 10254 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13489 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12995 Page 12105 Seat Back: Service and Repair Seatback Assembly REMOVAL OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY 1. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback. 2. Remove the retainer. 3. Remove the side air bag harness connector from the seat cushion. 4. Remove the seatback bolts (2 for each side) and seatback assembly. INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY - Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8141 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 5192 Case 15 Case 16 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 12358 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Locations Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 8974 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7753 Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch Page 4060 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 5361 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 7628 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10833 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 668 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 8208 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13042 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1310 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 13862 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 9568 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4798 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 5166 Case 2 Page 9978 Figure C-10, Figure C-11 c. Remove 2 bolts from each of the 3 bumper brackets shown in Figures C-10 and C-11. 6. Make sure the condenser fan electrical connector is disconnected. IMPORTANT: Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector. Page 13159 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 General Information and Recommendations Alignment: Service and Repair General Information and Recommendations GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. - This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. Page 2203 Optional Splice Page 810 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value Page 1512 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6762 ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 2148 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7412 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 593 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 9714 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 11469 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 11044 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10846 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1394 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4120 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13334 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 8830 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5731 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 10401 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8741 Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces. 60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it. 61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side). ^ 2 clips on each side. 62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector. 63. Take the harness loose from the body roof. Page 5008 LAN-CAN-03 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 4576 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 919 Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 4254 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 12575 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8765 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12863 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12810 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2306 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10644 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5377 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13123 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5202 Case 8 Page 8645 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2059 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3755 Part 2 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication Page 7242 4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. ^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch). ^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and seat. CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct direction. 5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. ^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point. 6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. 10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor. Axle Bearing Removal and Installation The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 14245 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 11131 Speaker: Service and Repair Front Door Speaker FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Removal 1. Remove front door finisher. 2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect connector and remove front door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2767 Page 12360 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13129 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 10347 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 279 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2992 Disclaimer Page 3548 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1182 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6420 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 4145 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 10386 Optional Splice Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 10483 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 168 3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released. IMPORTANT: Do not push the brake pedal until step 6. 4. Start the engine and let it idle. ^ Keep the transmission in Park. 5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor. 6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release. NOTE: 2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height". 7. Repeat step 6 ten times. ^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step. 8. Repeat steps 2 though 7. ^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Part 2 Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. This part of the procedure involves two general steps: ^ Setting up ^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card). SETTING UP: 1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1). CAUTION: Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card. Page 14134 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Page 10815 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 629 Page 6326 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10224 Page 5914 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8703 Page 9024 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11782 4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary). NOTE: Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3. 5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s). 6. Remove the old actuator motor. 7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal. Page 13394 Page 5067 Case 7 Page 7728 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11214 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10272 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4907 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1044 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2243 Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation PNP SWITCH Component Description When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP switch signal to the ECM via combination meter. Page 5529 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 8925 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 8182 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 13796 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 12037 19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8). 20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8). 21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of Figure 8). Figure 9 22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9). 23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the seat frame and move both seat tracks back into position on top of the seat track mounting tabs. Figure 10 CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is operated. Figure 11 Page 6561 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 288 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4089 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 12531 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 178 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF. 6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded into it (see Part 1). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13). ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF". * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14). This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during reprogramming. CAUTION: DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below. 9. Continue with Section 3. Section 3 Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input" 1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE] Page 1212 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 7370 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 12500 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2088 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1724 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H" and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds. 2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. ^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. ^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table. Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern 1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. Page 10249 Optional Splice Page 1843 Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1058 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5104 Case 3 Page 4760 Attachment General Procedure Page 2953 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3037 a. Tighten the front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown to the specified torque. Front cover bolts: 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.) 5. Install the camshaft sprockets using the following procedure: ^ A: LH bank shown ^ Install the intake and exhaust side camshaft sprockets by selectively using the groove of the dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.) ^ A: Intake (I) ^ B: Exhaust (E) ^ R: for RH bank ^ L: for LH bank a. Install the camshaft sprockets aligning them with the matching marks painted (B) on the timing chain (C) when removed. Align the camshaft sprocket key groove with the dowel pin on the camshaft front edge at the same time. Then temporarily tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. b. Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts. c. Check again that the timing alignment mark on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. 6. Install the chain tensioner using the following procedure: NOTE: LH is shown. a. Install the chain tensioner. Page 10303 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Service and Repair Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair REAR COMBINATION LAMP Bulb Replacement 1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 4. Remove bulb. 5. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5708 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13849 Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 464 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5600 Page 12478 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13620 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6649 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2300 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12452 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. General Information and Recommendations Alignment: Service and Repair General Information and Recommendations GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. - This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. Page 7904 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from the dash lower panel using Tool. Tool number: - (J-46532) 2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forwardmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. Brake Pedal Specifications ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. Page 9908 Repair Overview Disclaimer Recommendation If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen". Procedure A - Identify Fan Type Page 12565 Compass: Description and Operation COMPASS AND THERMOMETER System Description This unit displays the following items: - Earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle. - Outside air temperature. - Caution for frozen road surfaces. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The outside temperature will be displayed in "degree F". - Selecting the indication range Push the mode switch to change from degree F -> degree C -> degree OFF -> degree F. - The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following conditions is present. The temperature detected by the ambient sensor is lower than the indicated temperature on the thermometer. - The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (12 MPH). (This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat during low-speed driving.) The ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position for more than 2 hours. (The engine is cold.) DIRECTION DISPLAY Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The direction will be displayed. Page 4501 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4808 Page 484 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 11020 Symptom Matrix Chart Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1602 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4777 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 13824 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 9328 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Page 13894 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13623 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8701 g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts. h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector. 66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. 67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: Page 12502 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation System Description FUNCTION Power is supplied at all times - through 50 A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM terminal 70, and - through 10 A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 3 (column shift). With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) - to BCM terminal 38, and - through 10 A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to combination meter terminal 24. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67, and - to combination meter terminal 17 - through body grounds M57, M61, and M79. NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied - through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 4 (column shift) - to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 2 - through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew cab). BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime. LIGHT WARNING CHIME With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when headlamp battery saver control operates (5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied - from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 - to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36. NOTE: BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION". Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 2. - through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew cab). BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime. Page 13508 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2924 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 3501 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 375 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8508 Optional Splice Page 4469 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14044 Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 3 - 4) Page 4817 Attachment General Procedure Page 3577 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 9152 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 5162 Case 16 Case 17 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 909 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8897 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6943 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2707 Disclaimer Page 7923 IMPORTANT: If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform. Page 12301 CAUTION: Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle. Page 11339 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9407 2. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt using power tool. 3. Remove the three shock absorber upper nuts using power tool. 4. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly. ^ Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ The lower seat step (2) in the shock absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle. Upper spring insulator (3) - <=: Front ^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Rear Suspension Removal and Installation Page 7239 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Axle Shaft Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative. Page 13272 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14110 3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When the rear window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the rear window in case of an accident. CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Page 9183 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 8902 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1519 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5833 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11593 Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4) Page 11401 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 10099 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13540 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10817 Alarm Horn Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12141 Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: - Power windows - Power door locks - Remote keyless entry system - Power sunroof - Rear window wiper Page 9773 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14269 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9656 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 2 - 5) Page 2388 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 27 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 7740 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 2142 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8800 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 1410 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 14056 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2786 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components" (front disc brake), "Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. Page 4355 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 3559 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9189 Page 13157 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7841 CAUTION: ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 11555 16. Remove cable sheath and barrel cable end from upper door latch (see Figure 11) 17. Install barrel cable end and cable sheath onto new upper door latch. See the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install new upper door latch to door. CAUTION: ^ Be careful routing the wiring harness. ^ Do not pinch wire harness between door and upper door latch. ^ Torque bolts to: 5.8 Nm (0.59 Kg-m, 51 in-lb.) 16. Reinstall upper door latch white cable clip into door. Page 6572 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6443 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12151 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 9115 g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts. h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector. 66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. 67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: Page 1010 Optional Splice Page 10625 Side Air Bag: Description and Operation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Front Side Air Bag Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Side Curtain Air Bag Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining. Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Page 9577 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10410 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5617 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 5874 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5723 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 12781 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3603 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10858 Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9760 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 2360 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4500 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13110 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7180 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install front oil seal into axle housing using Tool. Tool number: ST15310000 CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ When installing, do not incline oil seal. 2. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install companion flange. 3. Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinion gear and tighten nut until there is zero bearing end play CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer. 4. Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and flange wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in step 5 above during removal plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Tool number: KV40104000 5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until proper rotating torque is achieved. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and do not exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible spacer. 6. Install rear propeller shaft. 7. Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required. 8. Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies. Page 5265 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 2310 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 9521 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 4505 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4991 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8774 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 11523 4. Remove upper and lower seatbelt anchor trim (see Figure 1). 5. Remove upper seatbelt anchor bolt (see Figure 2). 6. Remove arm rest. Page 8523 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13971 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6495 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 905 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4435 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT NOTE: ^ Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. ^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. ^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: ^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness. ^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Page 3865 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 9834 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3928 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 7377 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9327 Lot Number Locations. Page 1654 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10082 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1854 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2295 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 11855 CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator. 2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror. NOTE: ^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors. ^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7. 3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s). Page 1746 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4340 Page 3760 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List - Work Support Display Item List CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 5. For 4WD model, perform the following: ^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. ^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. 6. Remove wheel sensor. ^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness. 7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8575 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1673 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 13915 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1627 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9590 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13450 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 192 2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed on the cable). a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port". b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port. 4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows: (This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.) a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II. b. Touch [SUB MODE] c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2). 1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d. 2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d. d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2). 1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5. 2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5. IMPORTANT NOTE ^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5. ^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming". This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming. DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card) Page 12679 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 11505 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair King Cab REAR DOOR LOCK Component Structure CREW CAB Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to "Rear Door Glass". Page 7209 Page 6723 Page 5359 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3497 Optional Splice Page 1793 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5431 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2406 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) (Step 4) Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 4517 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Page 13119 Temperature Gauge: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11348 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12705 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2810 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3587 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13146 Optional Splice Page 4935 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 6303 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6348 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1080 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8862 Component Parts Location Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 4953 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 2828 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7437 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 78 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1028 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4795 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 9506 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Diagram Information and Instructions Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10596 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 3499 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11079 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4793 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 12355 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13220 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Tools and Equipment Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool AST tool# 8026 5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to 2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models - 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool - Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction - See Application Chart - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set. Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Page 1841 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 8066 INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length "B", as shown, satisfies the specified value. Length "B": 151 mm (5.94 inch) 2. After adjusting "B", temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle. ^ Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel. 3. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod. 4. Install pedal bracket nuts and tighten them to the specified torque. 5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 6. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 7. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. 8. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. 9. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. 10. Install engine air duct assembly. 11. Install engine room cover. 12. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. With VDC BRAKE BOOSTER REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. ^ Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. Page 12016 - DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is needed. - This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. - The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Figure 1 NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. SERVICE PROCEDURE Locations Page 8622 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional/Related Diagrams For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring Diagram Index IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 8942 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7630 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1819 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE SWITCH Description Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. Page 4087 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 1921 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 10432 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 5 - 8) Page 3407 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant. ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Page 14031 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10916 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ((King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 8743 b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove. c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly. Use plastic trim tool as shown. d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers. Page 658 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 14118 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker. SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting Page 10150 Adjustments Wiper Arm: Adjustments FRONT WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Operate windshield washer and wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop). 2. Lift the wiper blade up and then rest it onto glass surface, check the blade clearance "L1" and "L2". Clearance "L1" : 41.5 - 56.5 mm (1.634 - 2.224 in) Clearance "L2" : 52.5 - 67.5 mm (2.067 - 2.657 in) 3. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 4. Adjust front wiper arms on wiper motor pivot shafts to obtain above specified blade clearances. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install wiper arm covers. Front wiper arm nuts : 23.6 N-m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb) Page 5525 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 12486 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 2840 Fuse: Testing and Inspection Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 10708 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 6872 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10753 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Off-Vehicle Check SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. 3. If NG, replace the retractor assembly. Page 13602 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 2188 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. CAUTION: - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 13187 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 297 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5113 Case 12 Page 8617 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2034 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13533 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5196 Case 2 Page 8747 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Classification: EM-08-002 Reference: NTB08-058 Date: June 6, 2008 TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt. ACTION A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this Service Procedure. B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it. C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs. D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7206 Repair Flow Chart SERVICE PROCEDURE Inspect the six flange bolts that hold the front drive shaft (axle) to the front differential side flange as follows. NOTE: Perform this procedure on both the LH and RH front drive shafts (axles). 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Page 9662 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Air Mix Door Motor AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Page 2653 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 4573 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10696 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 8933 Front Oil Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Oil Seal Removal and Installation Components Page 14478 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5134 Case 3 Page 3659 EXHAUST MANIFOLD Page 5200 Case 6 Page 3309 EM-3 Page 7790 6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4). Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles DVD Player: Customer Interest Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles Classification: BT07-016 Reference: NTB07-O49 Date: June 28, 2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; DVD SCREEN RATTLE NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2006 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1AA08(**)8N600030 Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)AO(*)D88N300038 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: April 10, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM Rattle noise is coming from the DVD screen: When driving at speeds of 10 mph or more. And While driving on rough roads. ACTIONS ^ Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire. ^ Do not remove the DVD monitor from the console for this service procedure. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the overhead console and place it on a clean surface. Refer to section AV of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal procedure. Page 444 Component Parts Location Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3323 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary. - Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type. - Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. - Check all fluid levels again. - Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. TIMING CHAIN COVER Page 6403 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12350 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 14287 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4395 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: - Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. - Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 3329 - B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) 5. Install the crankshaft pulley. - Install the key of the crankshaft. - Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. - Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt. - Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb) Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening) 7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. Page 403 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2227 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6413 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14441 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 8459 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Automatic Air Conditioner Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Defroster Door Motor DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. 2. Remove the audio amplifier, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Intake Door Motor INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Page 1051 Optional Splice Page 884 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Automatic Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. 2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown. Tool number : J-44614 3. Remove the clutch disc. 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. Page 9686 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 11572 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 3810 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 7720 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13802 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5907 Front Axle Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Axle Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 5. For 4WD model, perform the following: ^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. ^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. 6. Remove wheel sensor. ^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness. 7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13180 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 10805 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7336 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 833 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 5348 DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL Page 5406 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4940 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1180 Optional Splice Page 12083 Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 9626 Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Intake door control system components are: - Front air control - Intake door motor (PRB built into the intake door motor) - In-vehicle sensor - Ambient sensor - Optical sensor - Intake sensor System Operation Page 146 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5655 Page 11174 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 908 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2321 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 8834 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12300 13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert. ^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench. ^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece. CAUTION: Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer. 14. Make sure the organizer sides freely. ^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose: a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed. b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the end of the plastic insert. Page 9329 Page 3695 Component Parts Location Page 8259 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 8836 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2804 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4993 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 7414 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4736 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 5477 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 11366 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 3466 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5174 Case 10 Page 8915 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional/Related Diagrams For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring Diagram Index IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 2585 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 3399 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. 6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. ^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with black arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11011 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3457 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 12680 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 1100 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1839 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Service and Repair Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair High-Mounted Stop Lamp BULB REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the high-mounted stop lamp. 2. Turn bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it from lamp housing. 3. Pull bulb from socket. Page 11269 Disclaimer Page 4909 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5132 Case 1 Page 13035 Speedometer Head: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 412 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 13820 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 262 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8890 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5181 Case 3 Page 6223 Page 9023 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 11333 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2832 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12929 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7012 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 2747 Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information Precautions for Engine Oils Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS - Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Page 12446 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Tests ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 7945 IMPORTANT: If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform. Page 12875 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 13052 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Diagram Information and Instructions Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4399 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 14177 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1407 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Crew Cab Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Crew Cab REAR DOOR LOCK Component Structure CREW CAB Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to "Rear Door Glass". Page 4815 Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8223 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7272 Model 2S1350 Model 3S1350 Page 8857 [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4181 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 7873 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9595 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1924 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11092 Navigation Module: Service and Repair NAVI CONTROL UNIT Removal CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat. 3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5. Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove NAVI control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13396 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12018 - Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the underside of the seat. Figure 3 10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame. 11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears". Figure 4 12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4). 13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4). Figure 5 14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5). 15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this bolt first" in Figure 5). Page 7274 CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Model 2S1350 Page 13028 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 8468 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3242 4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary. - Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type. - Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. - Check all fluid levels again. - Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. TIMING CHAIN COVER Page 11913 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5282 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 447 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4767 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4779 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 4994 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9197 Components Page 13565 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Combination Switch Reading Function Combination Switch Reading Function For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION. See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Description and Operation Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List - Data Monitor Display Item List Page 12540 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2378 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5492 Page 6898 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 1024 Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4671 Page 3505 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10494 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13094 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6325 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9919 Figure C-2 b. IMPORTANT: Make sure all 7 clips are released prior to the next step. c. Hold the grill as shown and give it a sharp pull. - Do this for both sides. Figure C-3 4. Remove 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket. - Left side (driver side) only. 5. Remove bumper mounting bolts as follows: For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following: Page 4755 Page 11194 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8401 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11370 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13253 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2171 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6544 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13634 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1470 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 219 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14468 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10218 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a) Page 12411 Page 10580 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: - Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS- 20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 11538 Component Parts Location Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 3891 Service and Repair Upper Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Page 7273 REMOVAL 1. Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake. 2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the rear final drive as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or the companion flange. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive. 4. For model 3S1350, remove the center support bearing bracket nuts, and remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Propeller shaft runout limit: 1.02 mm (0.0402 inch) or less ^ While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play: 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) or less ^ Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Basic Operation CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Page 10245 Page 14308 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10374 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 11293 Page 14493 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10965 2. Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire as shown in Figure 1. 3. Reinstall the console in reverse order of removal. 4. With the DVD in the open position, check for rattle noise by tapping around the console to make sure the incident has been resolved. Disclaimer Page 7177 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to new oil seal lips. Install new front oil seal into axle housing using Tool. Tool number: ST15310000 CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ When installing, do not incline oil seal. 2. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install companion flange. 3. Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinion gear and tighten nut until there is zero bearing end play. CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer. 4. Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and flange wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in step 5 above during removal plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Tool number: KV40104000 5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until proper rotating torque is achieved. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and do not exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible spacer. 6. Install rear propeller shaft. 7. Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required. 8. Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies. Page 13859 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12703 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13614 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4894 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 6211 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 13604 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12932 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4905 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9871 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 3 - 6) Page 7424 Page 2955 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 8598 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13276 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9749 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5261 Case 14 Page 730 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 8905 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5237 Case 9 Page 3963 Page 5829 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 1885 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3781 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 6092 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10351 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8714 In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG) 3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening. ^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the corrugated tube - Update Kit. ^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness. Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube) 1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1). 2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1). 3. Cut both clips off of the harness. NOTE: These clips will not be reused. 4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1). IMPORTANT: Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door grommet. Page 13307 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove cluster lid A. 2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5063 Case 3 Page 1956 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 11685 REMOVAL CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance. 1. Remove body side trim. 2. Remove rear trim. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 3. Remove sun visor assemblies. 4. Remove sun visor holders. 5. Remove front roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses. 6. Remove rear roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses. 7. Remove center roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses. 8. Remove assist grips. 9. Remove striker covers (if equipped). 10. Remove room lamp. 11. Remove headlining. - Disconnect harnesses. 12. Remove rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harness. 13. Remove lamp assemblies from roof console. - Disconnect harnesses. 14. Remove rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove center roof console front bracket (if equipped). 16. Remove assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Seat Bottom Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter Classification: BT05-003a Reference: NTB05-010a Date: February 7, 2008 NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates have been updated. No other changes have been made. APPLIED VEHICLES APPLIED VINs / DATES IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat lifter. ACTIONS: ^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom. ^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information). NOTE: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13325 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12815 - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : -- (J-46536) 12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. Page 6645 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4703 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 10746 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 10893 Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) (Step 3) Page 11847 CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator. 2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror. NOTE: ^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors. ^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7. 3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s). Page 4893 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 70 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8923 active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. Part 1 Part 2 - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 9698 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7743 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 13011 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6860 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14180 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4269 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2168 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6172 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 621 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 6252 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12308 4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate. 5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows: CAUTION: Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the plastic panel. a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic insert. b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as shown in Figure 4. c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the tube. NOTE: If the insert is difficult to remove: Page 14014 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7627 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5270 Case 4 Page 9818 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 4470 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2821 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 6224 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 4488 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4990 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7547 Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) ^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 8011 CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal in to groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. 5. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". Page 9247 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. ^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 4511 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1) Page 4323 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8387 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 112 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2398 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 7925 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 3978 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 1835 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9717 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 9519 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 11676 3. Reposition lid spring on the guide pins as shown in Figure 1. 4. Slide nylon washer onto the screw, then insert spring retention screw into the guide pin and tighten the screw into place (see Figure 2). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other side. 6. Reinstall the cup holder/console finisher in reverse order of removal. 7. Check the cup holder lid to make sure it correctly operates and the incident is resolved. Disclaimer Page 5684 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5763 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 6937 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10675 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: - Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics CAUTION: - The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function". Page 10926 e. A "Basic Features" list showing specific phone features and "Compatibility" for each feature will be displayed. f. Use this list to determine if the customer's concern(s) relates to any of the listed features. g. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "N" (not compatible): ^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE. ^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident. ^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident. ^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident. ^ The customer concern(s) cannot be addressed due the phone's feature(s) being incompatible. ^ If the customer still wants the feature(s) to function, they will need to get an approved phone showing the feature(s) as "Y" (compatible) in the "Basic Features" list. h. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "Y" (compatible), perform diagnosis in the applicable section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Quick Reference QUICK REFERENCE Poor Sound Quality 1. If a customer concern of poor sound quality is verified, in the vehicle and / or "land" side (other end of the call), perform the following steps. ^ Have the customer lower the in-vehicle phone volume by using the audio system volume control. NOTE: Lowering the in-vehicle phone volume improves noise canceling performance. Speaker Adaptation 1. If a customer concern related to Voice Recognition is verified: a. Verify the vehicle you are working on has Speaker Adaptation feature. Page 4840 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 3465 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1532 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14051 Optional Splice Page 2817 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 71 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 14476 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3125 A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the pump pulley. See Figure 2. B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See Figure 3. NOTE: The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the crankshaft pulley. ^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17. ^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12. Page 13962 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3439 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10098 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 12816 - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 1414 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9972 - Find the intersecting point of your RPM and Voltage readings that you wrote down in step 10. NOTE: If voltage reading is less than 10.0 V, charge the vehicle battery and retest. Do not perform fan motor test with a charger attached to the battery. 15. Determine your next steps as follows: If the fan motor is OK: a. Remove the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 1 though 9. b. Install the Condenser Fan Motor Protective Coverings - Procedure D. c. Reinstall the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 10 through 18. d. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F. Page 1118 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5434 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 2724 COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Page 10490 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8532 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 10458 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 7305 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3704 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1550 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the cluster lid D. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor from cluster lid D. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12162 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 4826 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 12599 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 12696 Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 13410 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1544 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection In-vehicle Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor is located on cluster lid D. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Page 10355 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8710 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Required Special Tools Page 13261 Page 8260 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 67 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12200 Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9917 - Find the intersecting point of your RPM and Voltage readings that you wrote down in step 10. NOTE: If voltage reading is less than 10.0 V, charge the vehicle battery and retest. Do not perform fan motor test with a charger attached to the battery. 15. Determine your next steps as follows: If the fan motor is OK: a. Remove the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 1 though 9. b. Install the Condenser Fan Motor Protective Coverings - Procedure D. c. Reinstall the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 10 through 18. d. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F. Page 9989 Figure D-6 - Wrap protector 2 around protector 1 and fold the fingers back as shown. Figure D-7 5. Slide protector 2 against the fan motor and press / stick the fingers to the fan motor as shown. - Make sure to press and smooth the fingers so they are completely stuck to the fan motor. Figure D-8 6. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 3 and stick it to the fan motor as shown. Page 4378 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 5405 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6597 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5605 Page 2238 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10326 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7847 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2875 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift 2-Pole Lift WARNING: - When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. - When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 9997 Figure D-22 Figure D-23 Figure D-24 - Refer to Figures D-22 through D-24 for tie-wrap locations. - Use the large 11 o'clock rib for reference. Page 10211 11. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: - Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT". - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 14445 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9607 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 19 - 22) Page 10031 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 477 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13630 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5227 Check Sheet Part 2 Page 1614 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9016 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 12470 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 6569 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 3634 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2235 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13318 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13079 Page 2161 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 196 b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6). c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402. d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad. ^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7). Page 10412 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11209 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5312 Case 12 Page 11472 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1774 Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 5) SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257F or B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. Page 9093 d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws. ^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also. 1 screw on each side. e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise. f. Lift and remove the shift finisher. ^ Disconnect electrical connectors. g. Disconnect the shift cable. ^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park. Page 7435 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8262 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Procedures Oil Pan: Procedures OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Image Symbols REMOVAL Page 2652 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 11003 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4877 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12393 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Page 13946 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3026 Standard: 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^ If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head. CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Page 145 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 7924 Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 1613 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2749 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection Inspection OIL LEVEL ^ Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. ^ Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. ^ If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. OIL APPEARANCE ^ Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination. ^ If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair the broken parts. Page 3509 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3951 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 2402 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5) Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Light Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 466 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10075 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Arm Rest: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose Classification: BT08-037 Reference: NTB09-005 Date: January 15, 2009 FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front driver seat armrest is loose. ACTION Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position. b. Fully recline the driver seatback. Page 5700 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1676 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Page 7846 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2610 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown. Tool number: - (J-46535) CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. ^ Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys. ^ Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the drive belt auto tensioner. Page 4337 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 11263 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Page 2145 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10995 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Basic Operation CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Page 5110 Case 9 Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Power Seat Motor: Customer Interest Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Classification: BT05-052a Reference: NTB05-105a Date: October 31, 2008 FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest (V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)* ^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat). ^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat). APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*) 7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209 D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before: 15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates IF YOU CONFIRM: The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason. NOTE: Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include: - The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward. - While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked (crooked) on the seat tracks. - Noise from the slide motor or gears. ACTION: Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat adjuster assembly. IMPORTANT: Page 9018 Page 8543 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12761 Page 12364 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 14223 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 4341 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13107 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure Page 8343 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8472 Fuse: Testing and Inspection Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 586 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 9105 38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips. 39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body. 40. Pull the harness through the body. For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51 Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or differential lock 41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall. 42. Disconnect the control unit(s). 43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall. Page 11173 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 11764 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 6772 Page 10836 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 13751 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13697 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14240 Optional Splice Page 8246 Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation PNP SWITCH Component Description When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP switch signal to the ECM via combination meter. Page 1584 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13510 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 650 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 3496 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 11375 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4832 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.) Page 4125 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10985 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9762 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 8682 d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. NOTE: Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle. 11. Remove the front kick plate. Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. 12. Remove the rear kick plate; ^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose. Page 5002 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5739 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 10507 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9351 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13398 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4480 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14255 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4176 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 8772 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 302 Page 12801 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11524 7. Remove three 10 mm door panel bolts, behind arm rest (see Figure 3). NOTE: Bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove. 8. Remove seatbelt retractor cover (see Figure 4) 9. Remove door panel. a. Start at the lower left corner, where the seatbelt retractor cover was. b. From there, "pop" the clips off working around the panel in a counter-clockwise direction. Page 5694 Page 4140 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5692 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) SRS Components Parts Location Page 6331 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6694 9. Remove side bearing caps. 10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Page 8340 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10479 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3551 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 12554 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1507 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4910 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13763 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 14101 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 13178 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6312 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7000 Shift Cable: Service and Repair SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation Floor Shift Models Page 3822 Page 5140 Case 9 Page 5653 Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Contaminated Refrigerant Contaminated Refrigerant If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: - Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. - Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. - Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. - If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. - If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Page 8900 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5056 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 4) Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6400 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 12597 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 10581 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2384 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Page 13034 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8827 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7984 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 5326 Case 7 Page 9051 k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown. l. Remove the center console from the vehicle. 9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit. 10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle: a. Move the jack out of the way. b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt. c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts. Page 3789 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 8529 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3948 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 7833 Repair Flow Chart Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 7390 Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 12445 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11) Page 7629 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13350 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11148 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9640 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Mode Door Motor Circuit Mode Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Air outlet does not change. - Mode door motor does not operate normally. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 1729 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3510 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 7014 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10411 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5644 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 3515 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1399 Page 7166 NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. Page 10647 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13115 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 148 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11188 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5872 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 7175 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) Removal and Installation COMPONENTS REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove brake calipers and rotors. 4. Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times. Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3361 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 876 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 12466 Optional Splice Page 6600 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 12069 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 4. CAUTION: Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle it with care. 4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body. 5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench. 6. Remove the lower flap cover. Page 5248 Case 1 Locations Page 1930 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2252 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8719 16. Attach the new body clip to the body. Final Quality Check 17. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition ON. b. Look at the air bag light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) NOTE: ^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim, connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on. ^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly. Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side) ^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle (under the carpet) and inside the rear door. ^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image. 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full forward and full rearward). 3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position. 4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first. 5. Remove the front seat. a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts. b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors. Page 1207 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7174 1. Apply 3.2 mm (0.126 inch) bead of sealant to the rear cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV sealant or equivalent. 2. Install rear cover and tighten rear cover bolts in the order as shown. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Fill final drive with recommended gear oil. 4. Install front final drive. Page 1040 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 8909 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13251 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8666 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Required Special Tools Page 10408 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1393 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 5660 Page 3228 EM-11 Page 8494 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 7326 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12699 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9593 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5081 Case 8 Page 13170 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Sonar System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9271 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Inspection Before Disassembly INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ^ Deformed or damaged pulley, bracket, connector or suction pipe. ^ Oil leakage from the suction pipe or connector. Page 6410 Ignition Coil: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1467 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10497 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2364 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5581 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 13505 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. ABLS/ABS Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 14444 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4306 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5850 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 10583 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 453 Optional Splice ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 9348 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 1537 Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 5346 DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR TCM DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Page 4011 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 1540 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9968 Figure B-3 5. Before connecting to the vehicle battery, make sure the Fan Motor Tester is switched OFF. Switched to OFF 6. Connect the Fan Motor Tester and the Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter (using the fluke meter test leads) as follows (see Figure B-4): - Connect Fan Motor Tester harness connector to the condenser fan. - Connect Fan Motor Tester to the vehicle battery; Red clamp to + (positive) / Black clamp to (negative). - Connect the Fluke 73 digital multimeter to the MOTOR VOLTAGE test ports on the Fan Motor Tester; V+ red probe to POS / COM black probe to NEG. Figure B-4 NOTE: When connected as above with the Fan Motor Tester switched OFF, the LED on the switch will illuminate green; this indicates the tester has battery power. Page 3054 Tool number: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Connecting rod bolts Step 1 ............................................... ................................................................................................................................. 19.6 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Step 2 ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... 90° clockwise Apply engine oil to threads and seats of connecting rod bolts. After tightening bolts, make sure the crankshaft rotates smoothly. Check connecting rod side clearance. CONNECTING ROD BOLT DIAMETER ^ Measure diameter "d" at position shown. ^ When "d" is out of specifications (when it becomes thinner), replace bolt with a new one. Limit ..... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........ 7.75 mm (0.3051 inch) or less. Connecting Rod Bearing Connecting Rod Bearing Undersize Undersize Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance Page 13590 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 5117 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 43 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 205 NOTE: This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes. CAUTION: You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data": ^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or ^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit. For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped with VDC are listed below. ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS 6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete: Page 1146 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5916 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4816 Page 5404 Optional Splice Page 10157 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 4) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. Page 3345 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 9692 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5277 Case 11 Page 6740 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 2140 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13262 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Specifications Page 10255 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2587 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 721 Locations Memory Positioning Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9984 Figure C-22 b. Install 3 screws at the front of the fender protector. - Driver side only. Figure C-23, Figure C-24 c. Install and Torque 2 bolts at each of the 3 bumper brackets as shown (see Figures C-23 and C-24). Page 8780 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4240 Optional Splice Page 6603 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 13385 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10979 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8461 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5068 Case 8 Page 3811 Page 13902 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1951 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8187 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 8127 * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]. 5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems: IMPORTANT: You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all DTC(s) are erased. ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIR BAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) 6. After all DTC(s) are erased: ^ Turn the ignition switch OFF. ^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector. ^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle. ^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the instrument panel. 7. Continue with Part 4. Part 4 Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. 1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming card. 2. Go to the ASIST terminal. 3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II. ^ Use ID Code 050602. ^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. END Page 9982 Figure C-17, Figure C-18 b. Install and Torque 4 bumper bolts (see Figure C-17). Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) Figure C-19 c. Install and Torque the bumper bolt shown in Figure C-19. Page 6770 Page 1663 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 9177 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 14436 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4167 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4194 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 4518 Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status - When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. Page 5555 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 4785 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 2814 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 898 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2232 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5606 Page 3859 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3841 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 12402 Optional Splice Page 6924 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 6170 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 4097 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 11313 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams Trailor Tow Schematic LT-T/TOW Page 13672 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14250 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6783 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 5030 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Bearing Cap Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows: Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12) ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8) ........................................................................................................................................................... 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3 (all bolts) .............................................................................................................................................................. 5.9 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4 (all bolts) ............................................................................................................................................................ 10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.) CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket from the parts listed below. Mating surface of rocker cover Mating surface of front cover Page 6656 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4613 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10812 Page 5427 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2018 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12165 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 6556 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4879 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8756 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4002 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 5100 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 9667 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Air Mix Door Motor AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2033 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Brake Pedal Specifications Page 1723 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 12372 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1113 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8534 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4263 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8676 c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. 6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit. Sub Woofer-under driver's seat a. Disconnect the electrical connector b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle. Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts. Page 11928 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8545 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional/Related Diagrams For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring Diagram Index IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 13268 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11144 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6897 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 13549 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3583 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8728 c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts. d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it. 16. If equipped with side curtain air bags: ^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag will be covered later in this procedure. ^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows. a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out of the way. b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector. c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag. Page 4726 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 6951 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14429 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8411 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3644 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant. ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Page 4862 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 8815 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1806 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1450 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10077 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5500 Page 9986 RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen". Figure D-1 1. Remove the fan motor from the shroud as follows: a. Disconnect the harness connector from the shroud. b. Disconnect the harness from the shroud clip. c. Remove the fan motor bolts x 3. - Discard the bolts; they will not be reused. d. Carefully separate the motor from the shroud: Don't damage the fan harness. Figure D-2 2. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the top and sides of the fan motor and the fan motor harness. - Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag. - The areas indicated must be completely clean to insure proper adhesion of the self adhesive protectors. Page 4130 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 737 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 6923 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11202 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10496 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 11042 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4082 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 14011 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10387 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13162 Page 12593 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13819 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1740 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1423 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 8624 - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus Page 10662 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 2748 Engine Oil: Vehicle Damage Warnings SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). ^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. Page 1755 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 11100 Pedal Positioning Motor: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 4978 Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Rear Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11881 Power Mirror Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 2226 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 296 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 11014 AV-DVD-01 Page 12707 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1383 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8771 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7824 NOTE: This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes. CAUTION: You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data": ^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or ^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit. For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped with VDC are listed below. ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS 6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete: Page 1546 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 5 - 8) Page 4325 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12061 Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 9970 Figure B-7 - The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud. 9. Measure the fan motor speed (RPM) and the fan motor voltage as follows: a. Turn the Fan Motor Tester ON. NOTE: In the ON position, the LED light on the switch will illuminate yellow. b. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer. WARNING: Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes (including your own). b. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan. c. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade. Figure B-8 Page 863 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 14204 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14256 Page 2354 Optional Splice Page 72 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4831 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 14442 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1661 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 480 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10155 Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. If NG, replace intake sensor. Page 368 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 10527 Page 11810 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 683 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 7602 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Rear Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4003 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 13041 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10291 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 9458 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Locations Page 1191 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12490 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 7070 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 11196 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 389 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 844 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 5208 Case 14 Case 15 Page 11151 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9279 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 6888 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 3452 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10750 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 11314 LT-T/TOW-01 Page 11599 FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. 5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3464 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14426 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12503 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied - to combination meter terminal 27 - through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19. The combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal to the combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS", or see "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 8634 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 4141 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14246 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8416 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12745 Page 1589 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12034 NOTE: - Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. - The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations. If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor. 1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP. 2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the connector, harness side, between the following color wires: NOTES: For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM). If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment. Figure 2 Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle you are working on may be different. - This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected. - If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward" positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor. - If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide motor. Remove Old Seat Slide Parts 3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure. 4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2). - Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access the seat mounting bolts. - Don't remove the seat yet. 5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle. - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 6. Turn the ignition key "OFF". 7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes. - This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front seat side air bags. 8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors. 9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface. Page 3578 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5608 Attachment General Procedure Page 3758 ITEMS OF EACH PART Display Item List - Work Support With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4368 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 9428 8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring retainer to remove it. CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press. 10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press. Tool number: ST30031000 CAUTION: ^ Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft. ^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 12. Remove the wheel bearing cage. NOTE: ^ If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. ^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Axle Shaft ^ Clean and remove all nicks and burrs. ^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary. ^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary. ^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch) Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^ Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Housing ^ Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary INSTALLATION 1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. 2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair MAP LAMP Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Page 10492 Page 12657 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 2721 Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: 2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Page 5716 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 13744 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6173 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6668 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6260 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10341 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8944 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7615 Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Assembly Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Assembly ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY CAUTION: - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. - Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the frontmost position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. - Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Page 11254 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12134 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 12587 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5290 Case 7 Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection For Power Supply And Ground Circuit Page 1664 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 4685 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 10478 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11823 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 2397 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 617 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 9071 g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts. h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector. 66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. 67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: Page 9611 The driver and front passenger air mix door motors are attached to the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The rear air mix door motor is attached to the rear heater & cooling unit assembly. These motors rotate so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front (or rear) air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors. Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Step 1) Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification Technical Service Bulletin # 08-068B Date: 080909 Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification Reference: NTB08-068b Date: September 9, 2008 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004 - 2006 NISSAN TITAN AND ARMADA AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER FAN This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has changed. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID # : PB081 - for Applied Vehicles built before March 17, 2005 PB077 - for Applied Vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005 NHTSA # : 08V-284 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain Model Year 2004, 2005, and 2006 Nissan Titan and Armada vehicles: - All vehicles manufactured from March 17, 2005 to August 21, 2006 are subject to this campaign. - Model Year 2004 vehicles and Model Year 2005 vehicles manufactured before March 17, 2005 are included only if the air conditioning condenser fan was replaced after the vehicle was originally purchased using one of the affected replacement parts. The air conditioning condenser fan motor in the subject vehicles was manufactured out of specification allowing for excessive water intrusion and inadequate drainage of moisture. If enough moisture accumulates in the motor, corrosion may occur, leading to increased temperature in the motor. Because of the motor's unique structure, this increased temperature could melt its wiring insulation and other plastic components and ultimately result in a fire. To correct the issue, Nissan will inspect, and as needed, install a thermal protector kit on the air conditioning condenser fan at no charge for parts or labor. Also, to ensure continued customer satisfaction with the air conditioning system in these vehicles, the condenser fan motor will be tested for excessive friction. If necessary, the motor will be replaced with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. (If a new motor is installed, the protector kit is not needed.) IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification numbers PB077 and PB081 to this campaign. PB077 or PB081 must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. - PB081 is for 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005. - PB077 is for 2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005. - Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 5447 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Page 13679 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9199 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B". Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment, (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front Suspension 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length "L": Refer to "Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket". See: Steering/Specifications/Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Lock nut: Refer to "Disassembly and Assembly". See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly Front Wheel Turning Angle FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level.. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front Suspension Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear - Steering column - Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Page 7934 materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. ASSEMBLY Page 7438 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6863 Page 11005 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 4494 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 9875 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 18 -20) Page 5688 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4331 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2031 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 828 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 8970 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 113 Optional Splice Page 13647 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 3222 EM-4 Page 11442 NOTE: The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak in a different location, and it may have more than one leak. 3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer: ^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent. ^ Follow product application instructions. 4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks. ^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking). ^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak. Disclaimer Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 3264 ^ Perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector using Tool. Tool number: 16441 6N210 (J-45488) a. Remove quick connector cap (engine side only). b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool in that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. d. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Pull quick connector holding "A" position in illustration. ^ Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ^ Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ^ Avoid fire and sparks. ^ Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. 6. Remove or disconnect harnesses, brackets, vacuum hose, vacuum gallery and PCV hose and tube from intake manifold. 7. Remove electric throttle control actuator by loosening bolts diagonally. CAUTION: ^ Handle carefully to avoid any damage to the electric throttle control actuator. ^ Do not disassemble. 8. Remove the fuel injectors and fuel tube assembly. 9. Loosen the bolts in reverse order shown using power tool. 10. Remove the intake manifold. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. Page 8290 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12690 Page 11704 Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 12142 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5597 Page 10855 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8686 22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below. 23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet. 24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor. Page 13401 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 7864 Page 14360 1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly. ^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM. 2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal. ^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal. 3. Replace washer pump seal. NOTE: Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation. 4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank. 5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal. Disclaimer Page 7727 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 2322 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. Page 1365 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 8209 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 14485 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11911 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 9196 Alignment: Service and Repair General Information and Recommendations GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. - This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. The Alignment Process THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. Preliminary Inspection PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. - Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as necessary. Camber and Caster CAMBER AND CASTER Page 4143 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6349 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 10609 8. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from base. 9. Remove the screws, release the clip, and remove the spiral cable. CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable. - Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. 10. Remove the spiral cable connectors. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. - If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-146, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" for steering angle sensor adjustment. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Steering Angle Sensor/Adjustments - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3532 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 386 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12263 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10829 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9654 Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Defroster door control system components are: - Front air control - Defroster door motor - PBR (built into defroster door motor) System Operation The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the mode switch. When the mode switch is in the defroster position, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Page 8516 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Page 1731 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2822 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5310 Case 10 Page 14274 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6435 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil. 3. Remove the ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5604 Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3903 Page 9330 Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12992 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 7011 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10394 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8992 Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional/Related Diagrams For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring Diagram Index IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 8335 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2687 Coolant: Service and Repair Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: ^ To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only). CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts. 4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown. 5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for engine removal or repair. ^ The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ^ Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Radiator drain plug: Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR". See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair RH cylinder block drain plug: Refer to EM-78, "CYLINDER BLOCK". See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Block Assembly/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly Page 1115 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10017 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606 Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise Classification: EM-08-002 Reference: NTB08-058 Date: June 6, 2008 TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt. ACTION A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this Service Procedure. B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it. C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs. D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 935 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10278 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11292 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14258 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10147 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Page 5085 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 8764 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 13174 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 14383 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12729 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7325 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9552 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. Wheel nut ................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.) Page 6424 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 14291 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11921 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5285 Case 2 Page 4289 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11516 Navigation Module: Service and Repair NAVI CONTROL UNIT Removal CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat. 3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5. Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove NAVI control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7395 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine. Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD" position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6. Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Page 10663 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt. Perform the following steps for angular tightening: Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch, put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1 .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 93.1 Nm (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft. lbs.) Step 2 ................................................................... ........................................................................................................... additional 90° (angle tightening) Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. Page 12489 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6014 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 4638 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10768 SRS Components Parts Location Page 11390 Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status - When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. Page 4961 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Page 1289 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5102 Case 1 Page 10097 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4012 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Page 11369 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11830 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2506 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 12869 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 5792 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13588 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 720 Page 13686 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2045 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 553 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 9916 - The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud. d. Observe the RPM reading on the tachometer and the volt reading on the Fluke 73 meter. IMPORTANT: The RPM and voltage reading should be observed at the same time with the fan motor running. 10. Record / write down the RPM and Volt readings you observed in step 9d. NOTE: Pressing the MEM (memory) button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer will display the last RPM measurement. 11. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to OFF. 12. Disconnect the testers from the vehicle. 13. Use the chart below to determine if the fan motor is OK or No Good. Page 7711 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5819 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 65 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2733 Components Inspection FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer assembly or around it. Page 4995 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8288 Page 11399 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 1660 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 10018 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13024 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1120 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 2387 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 2594 A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the pump pulley. See Figure 2. B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See Figure 3. NOTE: The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the crankshaft pulley. ^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17. ^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12. Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 456 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10016 Optional Splice Page 132 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 13248 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13955 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12960 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 10446 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Page 2040 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9855 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 5 - 8) Page 7322 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 170 5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3). Page 13598 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Front Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from cylinder body. INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on cylinder body, then install the union bolt and new copper washers. NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Page 3062 Image Symbols Follow the steps below to tighten each main bearing cap bolt. Apply engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts, and tighten all bolts temporarily. Main bearing cap bolts in order of 1 to 10 ....................................................................................................................... 39.2 Nm (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft. lbs.) Main bearing cap sub bolts in order of 11 to 20 ............................................................................................................... 29.4 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft. lbs.) Measure tightening angle using Tool. Tool number: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) CAUTION: Measure tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually. Page 640 Page 10984 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 11262 Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 10868 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 3909 Page 4292 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 13486 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8406 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1931 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 2164 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8640 Page 387 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3400 ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with white arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC Page 11008 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 3855 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Service and Repair Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Fuel Line Disconnect/Connect Procedure Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 2493 Alignment: Service and Repair General Information and Recommendations GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. - This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. - Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. The Alignment Process THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. Preliminary Inspection PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. - Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as necessary. Camber and Caster CAMBER AND CASTER Page 9261 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Checking Fluid Leakage Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear. Page 4851 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 9831 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 14270 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14384 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 4723 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 9911 Figure A-4 2. Use the photos to identify the fan type. Procedure B - Cooling Fan Motor Inspection/Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Volt. RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen". 1. Inspect the wires near the condenser fan motor: - Make sure there is no damage to the wire insulation and the wires are in good condition. Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 5073 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 12136 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10997 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 14022 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13818 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 200 VERY IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector. ^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly. CAUTION ^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set. ^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector pin damage may result. ^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the ABS/VDC system can occur. 4. Continue with Section 2 Section 2 Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs. CAUTION: It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before performing the remaining sections of this procedure. 1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure 12). 3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)] 4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle systems: ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIRBAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) Page 9880 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 3 - 6) Page 8176 Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 8100 2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then a. Press [VDC] b. Review all precautions C. Press [NEXT] 3. Select the program data (see Figure 17). Page 12467 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... .......................... 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt) Page 9574 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12152 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 167 Disclaimer Parts 1-4 Descriptions There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order. Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis. ^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure. Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. ^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card. ^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure. Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST). ^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure. Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. ^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure. NOTE: These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician. Part 1 Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis. 1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis. ^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. Page 5954 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 9524 Wheels: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Page 9017 Page 13827 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14184 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10697 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Automatic Air Conditioner Blower Motor: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Blower Motor BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Variable Blower Control VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Page 5299 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 1593 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13084 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7010 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7825 a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20. You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back ON. Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen. b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21). ^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference. 7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF. 9. Continue with Section 5. Section 5 Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTC(s). 1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically. ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF. Page 7922 3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1). 4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed. ^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body. 5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service. Page 12517 Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 2 Terminals And Reference Value For Combination Meter Page 14099 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5) Page 4880 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13579 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10748 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6428 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13681 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12872 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 4916 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 9755 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5712 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6640 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 254 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11150 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1236 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ((King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 2437 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: On-Vehicle Service Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Service On-Vehicle Service PEDAL STROKE ^ When parking brake pedal is operated with the specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified number of notches. Check by listening and counting the ratchet clicks. Pedal stroke: 3 - 4 notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 ft. lbs.)] Page 767 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5623 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 8013 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. NOTE: Do not disconnect brake hose unless removing the cylinder body. 3. Remove bolts (2) as shown, and cylinder body (3). - (1): Brake hose NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to BR-30, "Components". CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body with new copper washer and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-30, "Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 5. Install tires to the vehicle. Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. Page 1451 Page 7331 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 314 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Front Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 10277 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13177 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8809 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10627 - After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 377 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13347 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Page 5665 Attachment General Procedure Page 9380 ^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4714 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 12806 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9102 28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover. 30. Remove the D-ring bolt. Page 1398 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3703 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5799 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14093 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5) Page 5122 Case 5 Page 11480 After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 12775 Optional Splice Page 6773 Page 5195 Case 1 Page 2776 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Name:................................................................................................................................................ Nissan A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Page 14457 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Wiper Motor and Linkage REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. 2. Remove wiper frame bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 3. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. - Check the grease condition of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install wiper frame assembly. 4. Install cowl top. 5. Ensure that wiper blades stop within proper clearance. Refer to front wiper arm adjustment. Page 526 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 14191 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11154 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12787 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Specifications Valve Spring Page 4673 Page 12603 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 1345 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console or center seat as required. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 13918 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9676 Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8986 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13753 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 7713 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7908 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair BRAKE PEDAL Non-Adjustable Pedals Page 985 Control Unit: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1794 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9781 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 1 - 5) Page 5883 Engine Control Component Parts Location Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13113 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9695 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Coil: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 842 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 1855 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12258 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5383 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8899 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 1200 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6377 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 834 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 10033 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4297 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 10578 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 9946 Figure E-6 9. Position the Maxi Fuse, wires, and connector into the IPDM E/R box as shown in Figure E-6. 10. Reinstall the IPDM E/R cover and the relay / fuse cover. 11. Connect the negative battery cable. 12. Reprogram the radio presets and set the clock. 13. Go to Procedure F. Procedure F - Confirm Fan Operation 1. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition ON. 3. Select START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) > ENGINE > ACTIVE TEST > COOLING FAN 4. Use CONSULT-II to turn the condenser fan ON and then make sure the condenser fan is running. 5. Turn CONSULT-II OFF, turn the ignition OFF, and disconnect CONSULT-II from the vehicle. Parts Information Page 13093 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10197 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 11352 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14220 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7456 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Removal and Installation A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation Page 12658 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 5436 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10493 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6899 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 12228 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 575 Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding Brake System Image Symbols Page 5624 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 304 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12346 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7034 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7802 a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20. You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back ON. Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen. b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21). ^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference. 7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF. 9. Continue with Section 5. Section 5 Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTC(s). 1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically. ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF. Page 11872 Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 13587 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 4053 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11410 NOTE: See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover: CAUTION: ^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover. Page 8454 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 3888 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 11177 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14265 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2837 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8690 34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure. NOTE: The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown). 35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract; remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt. ^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt. NOTE: Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and state regulations. 36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points. 37. Pull the harness out of the door. Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7155 CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake cleaner. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 13131 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4749 Page 1590 Optional Splice Page 5376 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8824 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7681 Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2820 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Step 1) Page 4072 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 7310 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 11944 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12138 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14055 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5480 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 12002 - DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is needed. - This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. - The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Figure 1 NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5663 Page 2291 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4069 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 13038 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1849 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1758 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). Page 9168 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 6275 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. Page 897 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11336 Body Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5017 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Page 9833 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1820 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 14437 Page 482 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8123 2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then a. Press [VDC] b. Review all precautions C. Press [NEXT] 3. Select the program data (see Figure 17). Page 5808 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6305 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13837 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5920 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6182 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12786 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6255 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 14183 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11470 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Page 2007 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 10354 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14379 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13600 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 5256 Case 9 Page 13640 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8702 ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the harness. 68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 69. Reset the radio station presets. 70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 71. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H" and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds. 2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. ^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. ^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table. Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern 1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. Page 8307 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Locations Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 12557 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10130 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Evaporator REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater core. See: Heater Core/Service and Repair/Manual Air Conditioner 2. Remove the defroster mode door arm. 3. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case. Page 8939 Component Parts Location Page 6921 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12353 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1911 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11774 4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary). NOTE: Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3. 5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s). 6. Remove the old actuator motor. 7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal. Page 8443 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1203 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 997 Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) ^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 9601 Component Parts Mode door control system components are: - Front air control - Mode door motor - PBR (built into mode door motor) - In-vehicle sensor - Ambient sensor - Optical sensor - Intake sensor System Operation The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, D/F, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. In AUTO mode the mode door position is set by the front air control which determines the proper position based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature selected by the driver or passenger. Mode Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor Page 13039 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3294 M6 × 50 mm (1.97 inch): No. 1, 20, 25, 26, 27 M6 × 80 mm (3.15 inch): No. 4, 5, 7 M6 × 20 mm (0.79 inch): Except the above e. After tightening, re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. 11. Install the timing chain case cover RH bank (A) and timing chain case cover LH bank (B) as follows: ^ *: Cross mark (c) that can not be seen after assembly D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 inch) dia. a. Apply liquid gasket (a) as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: The start and end of the application of the liquid gasket should be crossed at a position that cannot be seen after attaching the chain case cover. b. Install the bolts in the numerical order shown. 12. Install the crankshaft pulley. ^ Install the key of the crankshaft. ^ Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 13. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. ^ Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt. ^ Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. Page 2968 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Service and Repair Antenna Amplifier: Service and Repair How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp. NOTE: - If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show "LOCK MODE" or "CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY". - Initialization is not necessary when only NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one. On-Board Inspection Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection On-board Inspection LEAK INSPECTION ^ Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections. Image Symbols CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. Page 786 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8984 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12764 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 11350 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 64 Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2280 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9638 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 20 - 23) Page 7313 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10807 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3782 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 3617 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13360 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove cluster lid C. 2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10422 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Ambient Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ambient Sensor The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a value which is then input into the front air control. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33 degree C (0.6 degree F) per 100 seconds. This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 549 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Testing and Inspection Condenser: Testing and Inspection CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals 1 and 2. CONDENSER-2 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser-2 terminals as 1 and 2. Page 11559 ^ Torque bolt to: 49 N-m (5.0 Kg-m, 36 ft-lb.) 26. Reassemble remaining parts in reverse order of removal. 27. Reconnect battery. 28. Reprogram radio presets. Page 13343 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 9472 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 13844 Page 3592 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2855 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9992 Figure D-12, Figure D-13 - Align the protector along the 5 o'clock rib as shown. - Don't cover up the bolt hole. - Fold and stick the protector under the shroud. Side Marker Lamp (Front) Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Side Marker Lamp (Front) SIDE MARKER LAMP (FRONT) Removal NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. 1. Turn the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket counterclockwise and remove side marker lamp (front) bulb socket. 2. Pull to remove side marker lamp (front) from the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12419 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5680 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1895 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5869 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13961 Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8125 NOTE: This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes. CAUTION: You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data": ^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or ^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit. For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped with VDC are listed below. ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS 6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete: Page 9440 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift 2-Pole Lift WARNING: - When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. - When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 12581 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10417 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12718 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5458 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 140 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4796 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14257 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7789 5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3). Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 11301 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Page 6639 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4614 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1946 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 7186 CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. ^ Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts. 5. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. 6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). 7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ^ Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. ^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 8. Remove adjuster lock plates. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7542 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1879 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8619 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Page 1060 Page 12534 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14008 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3967 Page 2602 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2292 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11849 Other Mirror Types Disclaimer Page 11046 Page 1297 10. Remove the outboard J-Clip. WARNING: Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. 11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly. Page 930 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7698 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4146 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 524 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 4932 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 5269 Case 3 Page 12245 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 13954 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3436 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4550 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7663 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 8313 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13062 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5433 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7820 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF. 6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded into it (see Part 1). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13). ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF". * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14). This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during reprogramming. CAUTION: DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below. 9. Continue with Section 3. Section 3 Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input" 1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE] Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 12867 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 13049 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 7008 Optional Splice Page 5069 Case 9 Page 13603 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 12943 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13857 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 14024 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 11304 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8121 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF. 6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded into it (see Part 1). 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13). ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF". * Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc. 8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14). This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during reprogramming. CAUTION: DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below. 9. Continue with Section 3. Section 3 Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input" 1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE] Service and Repair Radio Tuner: Service and Repair SATELLITE RADIO TUNER Removal 1. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Remove BCM. 3. Disconnect audio amp. and satellite radio tuner connectors. 4. Remove audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket screws and slide audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket down. 5. Remove satellite radio tuner screws (A) and remove satellite radio tuner from audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12497 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1382 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6430 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4580 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14252 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7072 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 12701 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6564 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5534 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Specifications Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are normal. WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less ^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly Service and Repair Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair RUNNING BOARDS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove bolts and remove running board from running board brackets. Page 1443 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2730 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent. Page 84 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14482 Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 2021 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 13087 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 10066 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2756 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Checking Fluid Leakage Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear. Page 868 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1162 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5761 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12298 A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown. B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube. C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert. D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the rubber o-ring. E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5. F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant. 6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer. ^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube. 7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies. ^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base. 8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 4496 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11813 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 9108 52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side. ^ Remove the clip. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side. ^ 1 screw on each side. 54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side. ^ 1 screw for each coat hanger. Electrical Units Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 10040 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12101 ^ 2 top tabs ^ 2 side tabs ^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips listed in the Parts Information table). a. Lift up and pull bottom of seat back board away from seat back. See Figure 5. b. Lift the middle part of the seat back board up and pull away from the seat back. c. Slide the top part of the seat back board down, then pull away from the seat back. 7. Install seat back board: a. Starting at the top place tabs underneath seat back frame and apply pressure until it is securely in place. b. Install 2 new clips on the bottom part of the seat back board, then align bottom clips with holes in seat back frame until it clicks into place. See Parts Information table. c. Apply pressure to both sides of the seat back board until the tabs click into place. Disclaimer Page 1950 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 8872 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11186 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10485 Page 4475 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5661 Page 4105 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1449 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10305 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10323 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13080 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13258 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12950 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8351 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13488 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2701 6. Allow the ATF temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-II to monitor the fluid temperature as follows: NOTE: Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-II. a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1". 7. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown. CAUTION: ^ When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth. ^ To check the fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown. 8. Check the fluid condition. ^ If the fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may bean internal problem with the transmission. Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission. ^ If the ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission. 9. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 10. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul Page 2825 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5327 Case 8 Page 4857 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 7267 Model 2F1310 REMOVAL 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the front final drive as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of the front final drive. 2. Remove the bolts and then remove the front propeller shaft from the front final drive and transfer. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Inspect the propeller shaft tube runout. If run out exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly Propeller shaft runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less Page 1739 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13605 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 972 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. Page 11940 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6157 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8588 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3231 Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown. Page 8595 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1273 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 4) Page 4064 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13051 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 460 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 14244 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1901 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 2722 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking) Checking Final Drive Oil Checking Final Drive Oil COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1121 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6160 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). 3. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models). Installation 1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush with component face into the extension case (2WD models) using Tool, or adapter case (4WD models) using suitable tool. Tool number: ST33400001 (J-26082) CAUTION: ^ Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ^ Do not reuse rear oil seal. 2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models). Page 1837 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8232 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 697 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 8544 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 872 Page 12591 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13013 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3731 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6471 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 474 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11384 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2) Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9624 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 19 - 22) Page 9849 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins. Page 5375 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 6974 3. Disconnect the holder from the key cylinder and remove the key interlock cable. Installation 1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. 2. Set selector lever to P position. 3. Turn key to lock position. 4. Insert key interlock rod into adjuster holder. 5. Install casing cap to bracket. 6. Move slider in order to lock adjuster holder to interlock rod. CAUTION: ^ Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ^ After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lbs.), replace key interlock cable with new one. Page 5245 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 6493 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Evaporator Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement Classification: HA07-002 Reference: NTB07-017 Date: March 8, 2007 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason, ACTION Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point. NOTE: In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1986 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8629 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only) - Front wipers - Tail, parking, and license lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab) INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE - When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto Page 4022 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7722 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 14104 Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 10869 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Service and Repair Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair SIDE GUARD MOLDING Removal and Installation A Double-faced adhesive tape application locations REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints. - Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape. Page 5571 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 9665 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Defroster Door Motor DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. 2. Remove the audio amplifier, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Intake Door Motor INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Page 11463 6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed. ^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above. 7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5091 Case 5 Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 9791 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 6418 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1389 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2004 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14006 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5059 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 4701 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 14288 Optional Splice Page 911 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4983 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12250 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 12431 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7455 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 258 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1484 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4786 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 10385 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 9923 Figure C-10, Figure C-11 c. Remove 2 bolts from each of the 3 bumper brackets shown in Figures C-10 and C-11. 6. Make sure the condenser fan electrical connector is disconnected. IMPORTANT: Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector. Page 9079 vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS REPAIR OVERVIEW SERVICE PROCEDURE Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed. Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67 campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being serviced. Page 4042 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 11887 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Step 3) Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Step 1) Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4433 ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with white arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust ^ D: Intake NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2 ^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC Page 5905 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 39 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13081 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13066 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 14424 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12860 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9752 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11895 Page 4313 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 2938 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 1670 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 10084 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8422 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console Power Socket Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console Power Socket REMOVAL 1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5683 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1252 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 3805 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 5147 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Front Propeller Shaft Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Front Propeller Shaft Propeller Shaft Vibration PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION NOTE: If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Propeller shaft runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less 2. If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft. 3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly Removal and Installation Removal and Installation Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are normal. WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less ^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly Page 6651 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Locations Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1030 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1153 Wiper Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10154 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 7 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Page 3734 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8964 Page 2471 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 11218 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14310 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4246 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9757 Page 10275 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6351 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 2999 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift 2-Pole Lift WARNING: - When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. - When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 11670 3. Reposition lid spring on the guide pins as shown in Figure 1. 4. Slide nylon washer onto the screw, then insert spring retention screw into the guide pin and tighten the screw into place (see Figure 2). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other side. 6. Reinstall the cup holder/console finisher in reverse order of removal. 7. Check the cup holder lid to make sure it correctly operates and the incident is resolved. Disclaimer Page 8769 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3030 Standard: 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^ If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head. Page 8350 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 9664 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Valve Lifter Page 12381 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD Brake Switch ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Page 13935 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5) Page 4422 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds Page 3438 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4036 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5221 Case 10 Page 11309 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 3996 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3743 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3447 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6693 CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. ^ Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts. 5. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. 6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). 7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ^ Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. ^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 8. Remove adjuster lock plates. Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Page 11216 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12004 - Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the underside of the seat. Figure 3 10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame. 11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears". Figure 4 12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4). 13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4). Figure 5 14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5). 15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this bolt first" in Figure 5). Page 13750 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1017 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 13523 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6268 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6083 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 1752 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3699 Body Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5082 Case 9 Page 11379 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 9810 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 4221 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11960 Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 4) Page 3873 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 798 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10067 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 14162 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 14443 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11821 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Locations Speaker: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13400 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12416 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9408 Components REMOVAL 1. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack. Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 320 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 10346 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8869 Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 2472 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 3226 EM-8 Page 3737 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5737 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 9726 After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace ambient sensor. Page 2080 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10820 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6827 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 13406 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 2808 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9564 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6865 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2097 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 1147 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12050 16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5. - Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes. Figure 6 17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes, all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6). CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation. 18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor. Figure 7 - To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7). Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit Figure 8 Page 10153 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 4612 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7311 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8222 Page 13644 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4689 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1757 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. 6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. Page 14084 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3524 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7715 Page 8980 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 9751 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8988 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 741 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 6156 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 11988 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4) Page 14053 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1316 Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 4333 Page 10029 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1939 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6186 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7543 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9426 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle Axle Shaft Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative. Page 9040 In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG) 3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening. ^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the corrugated tube - Update Kit. ^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness. Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube) 1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1). 2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1). 3. Cut both clips off of the harness. NOTE: These clips will not be reused. 4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1). IMPORTANT: Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door grommet. Page 12347 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 9644 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 11 - 12) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR Air Mix Door Motor Circuit Air Mix Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Discharge air temperature does not change. - Air mix door motor (front) does not operate. Page 10822 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12853 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9273 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Inspection After Disassembly INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Body Assembly Inspection Check the power steering oil pump body assembly for damage. If any damage is found, replace with a new power steering oil pump assembly. Page 5537 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 13121 Page 5251 Case 4 Page 4073 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Page 11389 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Page 13700 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams Trailor Tow Schematic LT-T/TOW Page 8295 Page 13033 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10694 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 5178 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 4483 Page 7633 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 10140 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy. 5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical connector. 6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal. Page 8386 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3314 EM-8 Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 14210 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13512 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE SWITCH Description Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. Page 13835 Optional Splice Page 8600 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9576 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1659 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4484 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4843 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 14199 Optional Splice Page 12917 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 8667 ^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors. ^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the Update Kit. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. ^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories. NOTE: ^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed. ^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. Page 8848 Page 765 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing Page 6939 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11307 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 483 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5641 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 1144 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7716 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8151 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 10602 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 9765 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 61 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11395 ITEMS OF EACH PART Display Item List - Work Support With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 13856 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9104 34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure. NOTE: The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown). 35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract; remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt. ^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt. NOTE: Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and state regulations. 36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points. 37. Pull the harness out of the door. Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) Page 13725 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6226 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 9106 44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. NOTE: The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near the sonar control unit. 45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown in the figure below. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. Page 13746 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8724 h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console. i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and remove 2 screws. j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments. Page 5768 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13680 Page 14427 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 266 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9041 5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located (see Figure B2). 6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly. ^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made. ^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks. 7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in steps 5 and 6. IMPORTANT: ^ DO NOT use a razorblade. ^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube. ^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. Page 5521 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 8599 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 687 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 4711 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 8008 3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten the torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-24, "Components" CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. - Do not reuse caliper torque member bolts. 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, then tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to BR-24, "Components". CAUTION: - Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt. - Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers. 5. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 6. Attach tires to the vehicle. Disassembly and Assembly Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any of them is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions and tighten wheel nuts temporarily to 40 ft. lbs. 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. (Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside the disc edge.) Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness: 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Repair limit thickness: 24.5 mm (0.965 inch) Maximum uneven wear (Measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Page 6509 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 11553 12. Peel, then remove gray anti-rattle foam. NOTE: Gray anti-rattle foam will be re-used. Store with adhesive side up. 13. Disconnect latch switch connector (see Figure 8). Page 4250 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3588 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14190 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 9148 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 6139 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 4049 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 12927 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 840 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 6019 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Page 2157 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4460 Component Parts Location Page 4918 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 4129 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9828 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 286 Optional Splice Page 7883 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 966 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 6488 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 280 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4348 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9641 Mode door control system components are: - Front air control - Mode door motor - PBR (built into mode door motor) System Operation The mode door position (vent, B/L, D/F, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. Page 6132 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 11527 12. Peel, then remove gray anti-rattle foam. NOTE: Gray anti-rattle foam will be re-used. Store with adhesive side up. 13. Disconnect latch switch connector (see Figure 8). Page 4191 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3158 Drive Belt: Adjustments DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the auto tensioner. Page 2331 Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3360 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 885 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2639 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Information Bus: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool Diagnosis Procedure Page 7632 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5682 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 899 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2577 12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips). 13. Unbolt alternator and set aside. 14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts). NOTE: ^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise. ^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the pulleys are equal. 15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts). ^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb) 16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal. Page 5847 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12683 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 1989 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 7452 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 8826 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Coil Spring And Strut Removal and Installation Components REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Page 14498 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 6824 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 4402 the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 4856 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 13748 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 878 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9690 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 686 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9625 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 23 - 25) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) Intake Door Motor Circuit Intake Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Intake door does not change. - Intake door motor does not operate normally. Page 9559 Page 10814 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6364 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 8955 Optional Splice Page 10074 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 9720 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5993 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 7910 WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube. CAUTION: ^ Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forwardmost position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). ^ Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). ^ Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. ^ Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check brake pedal assembly for following items. ^ Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper ^ Clevis pin deformation ^ Crack of any welded portion ^ Brake pedal bend INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the brake pedal. ^ Check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward. ^ After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Page 12062 Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4) Page 12766 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 1067 Page 917 Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 8216 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 5129 Case 13 Case 14 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 1775 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6912 3. Install rear propeller shaft. CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 5186 Case 8 Page 12033 - DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is needed. - This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. - The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Figure 1 NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 6479 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 299 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Locations Location of Electrical Parts Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair WEATHERSTRIP Visually check weatherstrip for any damage, deterioration, or flattening. - In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour water around it to find the damaged or gaped portion, remove glass lid assembly. - If any damage is found, replace glass lid assembly. CAUTION: Do not remove the weatherstrip. Page 9814 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3712 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 13939 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) (Step 4) Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 463 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11341 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7541 Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10093 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12984 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8838 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 14033 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1142 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 14229 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch Replacement Rear Door Latch: Recalls Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V064000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: February 28, 2006 COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 427 SUMMARY: Certain light trucks fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." An arc weld is missing on some right side rear door upper latch assemblies. CONSEQUENCE: This may result in the right side doors coming partially open increasing the risk of injury to occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the upper latch assembly free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on April 15, 2006. Owners may contact Nissan at 800-662-6200. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 12724 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9715 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Locations Page 4775 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 7599 Optional Splice Page 9996 Figure D-20 Figure D-21 - Refer to Figures D-18 through D-21 for clip locations. - Use the large 7 o'clock and 11 o'clock ribs for reference. - Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations for clips 3 and 4. 16. Install 2 tie-wraps on the fan motor cover. - Use 1 inch (28 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit. Page 13854 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1456 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 2160 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 13974 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7858 Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 8398 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1333 Sunroof Switch System Check Page 5437 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 441 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 3736 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 7496 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Clean off the bolt area(s) where oil has leaked out. 2. Torque all three bearing retainer bolts (see picture below): ^ 19.6 - 23.5 Nm (1.2 - 2.4 Kg-m, 14.5 - 17.3 ft-lb). ^ If any of the bolts are missing, replace the transfer case assembly. CAUTION: Do NOT remove any of the bolts. Bearing damage may occur. 3. Add Nissan Matic "D" ATF to the transfer case as needed. Page 9095 k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown. l. Remove the center console from the vehicle. 9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit. 10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle: a. Move the jack out of the way. b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt. c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts. Page 9981 Figure C-16 11. Install the condenser fan mounting bolt. 12. Install and torque 2 nuts to the air bag sensor. - Torque: 15 N.m (1.52 Kg-m, 11 ft-lb) - Apply medium strength thread-locker to the studs (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM005P or equivalent). 13. Make sure the Rubber Seal is inside the condenser fan electrical connector and then connect the connector. 14. Install the bumper as follows: For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following: a. Lift bumper ON the locating tabs; both sides (see Figure C-18). Page 2222 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8503 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13171 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 984 Location of Electrical Parts Page 5115 Case 15 Case 16 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 5116 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 1409 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 862 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11238 Collision Avoidance Sensor: Service and Repair REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to "Bumper; Service and Repair" for rear sonar sensor removal and installation procedures. Page 12988 Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 8186 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 12750 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 1065 Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel. INSTALLATION 1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". Page 12868 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 7909 Adjustable Pedals REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forwardmost position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). ^ Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). ^ Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. ^ Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the pedal assembly by turning 45° counterclockwise. 3. On adjustable pedal assembly, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. ^ Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. 4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster. 5. Remove brake pedal assembly nuts and the pedal assembly. ^ Temporarily install nuts by hand to support booster. Page 7453 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 6310 Page 7756 2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 2813 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 9799 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Blower Motor BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Variable Blower Control VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Page 9782 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 6 - 9) Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2301 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13546 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8393 Page 9931 RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen". Figure D-1 1. Remove the fan motor from the shroud as follows: a. Disconnect the harness connector from the shroud. b. Disconnect the harness from the shroud clip. c. Remove the fan motor bolts x 3. - Discard the bolts; they will not be reused. d. Carefully separate the motor from the shroud: Don't damage the fan harness. Figure D-2 2. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the top and sides of the fan motor and the fan motor harness. - Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag. - The areas indicated must be completely clean to insure proper adhesion of the self adhesive protectors. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11176 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12876 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 1018 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1624 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7415 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 9933 Figure D-4 3. Install Protector 1 around the fan harness: - Wrap / roll the protector tightly around the harness. - While holding the protector rolled tightly, remove the adhesive backing and secure the protector. NOTE: The protector should slide on the harness. Figure D-5 4. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 2 and install it around protector 1: - Fingers / slits on protector 2 must be facing the fan motor. - Align the bottom of protector 2 fingers with the end of protector 1. Page 5747 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 9790 - Variable blower control - Front blower motor - Front blower motor relay System Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). Page 887 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. VDC/TCS/ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 10038 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4193 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 1105 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 543 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 6336 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9811 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5453 ITEMS OF EACH PART Display Item List - Work Support With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 5023 Input/output signal chart TYPE 5/TYPE 6/TYPE 7 System diagram System Diagram - Type 5 System Diagram - Type 6 Page 6496 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1514 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4892 Page 5046 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced 1. See "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of all units attached to the check sheet. If "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" or "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed, put a check mark to the applicable column of self-diagnostic results of the check sheet table. NOTE: For "ENGINE", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. - For "A/T", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. - For "AUTO DRIVE POS.", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. - For "BCM", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. - For "HVAC", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. - For "ABS", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. - For "IPDM E/R", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. Page 4906 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 181 4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18). NOTE: If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *. * This is found in ASIST under: CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info. CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING: ^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur. ^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming. ^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during reprogramming. * You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1. 5. Press [START]. See Figure 18. ^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear. ^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF. ^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started. Page 5628 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 9710 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12608 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4639 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 875 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12959 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 8535 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2180 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4592 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) OIL Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition - Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: MAX position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77 degrees to 86 degrees F)] - Intake position: Recirculation - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Page 12980 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5701 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Balancing Wheels Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels REMOVAL 1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. 2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Page 9723 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection Ambient Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Ambient Sensor The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a value which is then input into the front air control. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33 degree C (0.6 degree F) per 100 seconds. This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 504 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List - Work Support Display Item List CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 2824 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12558 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2453 Page 1592 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9816 Page 8409 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2404 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 6481 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14434 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4468 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13638 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Diagram Information and Instructions Power Mirror Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13330 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 3730 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Page 1829 Optional Splice Page 9594 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 313 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2575 Disclaimer Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and confirm: ^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt and ^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming. 4. Remove intake duct and engine cover. 5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6. 6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual for removal procedure. 7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist. 8. Remove front right wheel. 9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure. 10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts). 11. Check the pulley alignment as follows: Page 7708 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Testing and Inspection Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 1560 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Diagram Information and Instructions Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: - Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS- 20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 10315 Page 381 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3472 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8733 31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool. 32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40. 33. Remove the rear door panel. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. Page 3035 3. Install the RH bank (B) and LH bank (D) camshaft brackets. ^ Install by referring to the installation location mark (E) on the upper surface. ^ Install so that the installation location mark (E) can be correctly read when viewed from the intake manifold side. ^ Install No. 1 camshaft bracket using the following procedure: ^ a: 11 mm (0.43 inch) ^ b: 2.0 - 3.0 mm (0.079 - 0.118 inch) dia. - Apply liquid gasket to No. 1 camshaft bracket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: ^ After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking from part (C) and (D) both on RH and LH sides. ^ Remove completely any excess of liquid gasket inside bracket. ^ a: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 inch) dia. - Apply liquid gasket (C) to the back side of the LH (A) bank front cover and RH (B) bank front cover as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Page 8338 Page 1596 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4586 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6269 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6065 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find Page 2035 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst Page 8157 CAUTION: ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Adjust the steering angle sensor. ^ Calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 5026 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3 Input/output signal chart TYPE 8/TYPE 9/TYPE 10/TYPE 11/TYPE 12/TYPE 13 System diagram Page 7442 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair OIL FILTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number: KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ^ The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. ^ Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. ^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.) 4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. 5. Install the engine front undercover using power tool. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required. Page 8059 ^ Assemble adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow. ^ Shorten adjuster by rotating it. NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows. 1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. CAUTION: ^ To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in operation. ^ Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of lining. 2. Perform parking brake burnishing operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following conditions: ^ Vehicle speed at 40 km/h (25 MPH) ^ Parking brake operating force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 ft. lbs.) set ^ For a period of 30 seconds 3. After burnishing operation, check pedal stroke of parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified stroke. Page 5409 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8412 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ^ Measure side clearance of the piston ring and piston ring groove using suitable tool. Standard: Top ring: 0.035 - 0.085 mm (0.0014 - 0.0033 inch) 2nd ring: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 inch) Oil ring: 0.015 - 0.050 mm (0.0006 - 0.0020 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.11 mm (0.0043 inch) 2nd ring: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch) ^ If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly. PISTON RING END GAP ^ Check if the diameter of the cylinder bore is within specification. ^ Insert the piston ring into the middle of the cylinder using the piston, and measure the gap. Standard Top ring: 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 inch) 2nd ring: 0.25 - 0.40 mm (0.0098 0.0157 inch) Oil ring: 0.20 - 0.60 mm (0.0079 - 0.0236 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.56 mm (0.0220 inch) 2nd ring: 0.52 mm (0.0205 inch) Oil ring: 0.96 mm (0.0378 inch) ^ If out of specification, replace piston ring. If the gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore the cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring. Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 4780 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 5450 Part 2 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication Page 1090 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 14074 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4980 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5698 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4628 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 6929 Page 9722 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8353 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13674 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8896 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 9721 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1525 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14307 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 9603 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 4 - 7) Page 4562 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12082 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 7726 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8961 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 6653 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Removal and Installation Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if steering column is separated from steering gear assembly. Therefore secure steering wheel to avoid turning. REMOVAL 1. Turn wheels to the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 3. Remove undercover using power tool. 4. On 4WD model, remove front final drive, then support drive shafts with wire. 5. Make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear cover cap. 6. Remove cotter pin at steering outer socket and discard, then loosen nut. 7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 1298 12. Remove and replace the switch. 13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan. 14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto the seat frame. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9. WARNING: Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. 15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs. 16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8 Kg-m, 20 ft-lb). 17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan. 18. Re-attach the lower flap cover. Page 4296 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13701 LT-T/TOW-01 Balancing Wheels Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels REMOVAL 1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. 2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. Page 12700 Optional Splice Page 13044 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 11374 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12537 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7755 9. Remove side bearing caps. 10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 12948 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11888 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 13492 Page 13689 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14500 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14102 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 13799 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1457 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 10723 7. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on seat pan. 8. Install connector attachment clip to seat bracket to attach buckle assy. to seat. 9. Reinstall seat cushion outer finisher. 10. Install seat in reverse order of removal. 11. Reconnect the battery cables (positive cable first). 12. Operate all switches to make sure everything works as it should. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 4809 Page 4971 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10640 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13247 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13117 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10462 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 4) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. Page 12005 16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5. - Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes. Figure 6 17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes, all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6). CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation. 18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor. Figure 7 - To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7). Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit Figure 8 Page 5164 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 222 CAUTION: ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 8968 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3239 b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper). 21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. Page 4028 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 740 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 9746 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4939 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 1437 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6191 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube. a. Spread open to remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out. CAUTION: ^ Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube. ^ Do not damage injector nozzle during removal. ^ Do not bump or drop fuel injectors. ^ Do not disassemble fuel injectors. 8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube. INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube. a. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the cap of fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. b. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel damper. NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part. c. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up. ^ Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Page 40 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9419 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 8607 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 8448 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8917 - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus Automatic Air Conditioner Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Water Valve Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front and rear heater cores to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control. Page 5774 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14057 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5429 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4997 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Calibration of Decel G Sensor Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor Calibration of Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7662 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 12211 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock System Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 260 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13931 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 9091 b. Disconnect the electrical connectors. c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle. 7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup holder: a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat. a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts. b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. Page 4317 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1600 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 7015 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection Page 10594 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9881 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 7 - 9) Specifications Valve Seat Page 6179 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 14311 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Headlamp (For USA) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7037 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10459 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 7 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Page 5672 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11918 Page 7687 Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) ^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4805 Page 8046 Parking Brake Control: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION ^ Make sure the components are attached properly, checking for looseness or backlash. ^ Check parking brake pedal assembly for bends, damage and cracks, and replace if necessary. ^ Check cable for wear and damage, and replace if necessary. ^ Check parking brake warning lamp switch for malfunction, and replace if necessary. Page 3946 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 9084 In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG) 3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening. ^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the corrugated tube - Update Kit. ^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness. Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube) 1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1). 2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1). 3. Cut both clips off of the harness. NOTE: These clips will not be reused. 4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1). IMPORTANT: Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door grommet. Page 10287 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 6225 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor DVD Player: All Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor Classification: BT07-001 Reference: NTB07-015 Date: February 23, 2007 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN; TICKING NOISE FROM DVD MONITOR WHILE OPENED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1(******)7N701300 Vehicles built before: 1N6(******)7N202494 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: August 31, 2006 IF YOU CONFIRM Ticking noise coming from DVD Monitor while opened. ACTIONS ^ Remove part of the roof console to access DVD wire. ^ Apply foam pad to wire and felt tape to hinge. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1034 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 3462 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Testing and Inspection Fuel Filler Cap: Testing and Inspection FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/sq.cm, 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.3 kPa (-0.061 to -0.034 kg/sq.cm, -0.87 to -0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. Page 8032 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13718 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2771 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 4725 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 8655 Page 5528 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4747 Page 5463 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster. 3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. Installation Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 1025 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3708 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4113 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13139 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 10784 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to "Removal" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) OIL Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition - Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: MAX position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77 degrees to 86 degrees F)] - Intake position: Recirculation - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 2433 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 6407 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10402 Page 6896 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 10803 Optional Splice Page 7786 Disclaimer Parts 1-4 Descriptions There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order. Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis. ^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure. Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. ^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card. ^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure. Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST). ^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure. Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. ^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure. NOTE: These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician. Part 1 Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis. 1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis. ^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. Page 3825 Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8943 Component Parts Location Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12572 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9045 16. Attach the new body clip to the body. Final Quality Check 17. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition ON. b. Look at the air bag light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) NOTE: ^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim, connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on. ^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly. Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side) ^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle (under the carpet) and inside the rear door. ^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image. 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full forward and full rearward). 3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position. 4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first. 5. Remove the front seat. a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts. b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10081 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6076 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Assembly ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY CAUTION: - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation - Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Page 5074 Case 1 Page 9005 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6082 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2900 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 5032 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3 Input/output signal chart TYPE 14/TYPE 15/TYPE 16/TYPE 17 System diagram System Diagram - Type 14 Page 2857 Page 9053 13. Remove the lower dash side finisher. ^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever. 14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support. 15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness: a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts, b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support. Page 1597 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Specifications Shifter A/T: Specifications Floor Shift Models Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 379 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12784 Page 2156 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1167 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5580 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 4543 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4046 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1295 7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate. 8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3. Page 728 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 2458 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 7706 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2214 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4842 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1900 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 12692 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. Striker Bolts: 16.6 N.m (1.7 kg-m, 12 ft-lb) Page 5086 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 8695 55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only). ^ Open the side bolt covers. ^ Remove the 2 bolts. 56. Remove the dome lamp. a. Remove the clear lamp cover b. Remove the 2 screws. c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector. Steel Bumper Front Bumper: Service and Repair Steel Bumper FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove radiator grille. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove engine under cover or skid plate. 3. Remove the fog lamp (if equipped). 4. Remove the front bumper side bracket nuts. 5. Remove front bumper assembly. 6. Remove front bumper RH and LH side finishers. Page 799 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9633 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 1 - 4) Page 2216 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5722 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Page 3886 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 13887 Optional Splice Page 10536 SRS Inspection (For Frontal Collision) Part 2 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) For Side and Rollover Collision Check the SRS components using the table. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Replace the following components: - Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) - Diagnosis sensor unit - (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table. - Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table. - If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 3508 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Stabilizer Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Classification: FA10-003A Reference: NTB10-072A Date: October 6, 2010 FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN 6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct 23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All IF YOU CONFIRM A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following actions: ^ turning the steering wheel left or right ^ driving over speed bumps ^ driving on rough roads ^ accelerating or decelerating AND The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing. ACTIONS Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and installation instructions. Page 8946 Page 649 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 4038 Page 9003 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Part 1 Part 2 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored. 5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch STOP. Page 7013 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8116 b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6). c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402. d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad. ^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7). Page 10861 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10568 Optional Splice Page 8089 2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed on the cable). a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port". b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port. 4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows: (This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.) a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II. b. Touch [SUB MODE] c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2). 1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d. 2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d. d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2). 1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5. 2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5. IMPORTANT NOTE ^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5. ^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming". This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming. DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card) Page 2893 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 55 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10582 Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13721 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 274 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 10086 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5527 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 4575 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6825 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 4524 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 4134 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. CAN Communication Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9756 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1460 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8230 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 1709 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 2735 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Replacement TRANSFER FLUID Components Page 5094 Case 8 Environmental Impact Information Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Page 12802 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8736 44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. NOTE: The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near the sonar control unit. 45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown in the figure below. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. Page 4768 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 4037 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5824 concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C (1,292 - 1,472 degrees F). HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 6944 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8959 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 9046 c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. 6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit. Sub Woofer-under driver's seat a. Disconnect the electrical connector b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle. Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts. Page 1511 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7040 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 237 CAUTION: ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Adjust the steering angle sensor. ^ Calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 3502 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7464 9. Remove side bearing caps. 10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. 12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Page 6480 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 663 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 8195 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13114 Page 9876 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 21 - 23) Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-002D Reference: NTB05-097D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after 5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10991 DVD Player: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10334 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13349 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 2596 17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves. ^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush. ^ Do not use a power tool. 18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy. 19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for installation procedure. 20. Connect harness clips. 21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure. 22. Install front right wheel. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first. 25. Start engine. 26. Confirm the issue is resolved. 27. Reprogram the radio presets. 28. Reinitialize the power sunroof. Page 1932 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3307 EM-1 Page 5710 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10309 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4175 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10891 Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4888 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13399 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 914 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13154 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10876 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1809 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2605 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 1237 Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 635 Page 9332 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 124 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3628 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2085 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 4981 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7009 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10055 Control Operation TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL) Increases or decreases the set temperature. RECIRCULATION SWITCH - When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. - When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. - REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position or in floor mode. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (CREW CAB) When switch is ON, rear window and door mirrors are defogged. OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0) The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot position. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. MODE CONTROL DIAL Controls the air discharge outlets through control of the mode and defroster doors. FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL Manually control the blower speed. Fourteen speeds are available for manual control. Page 1274 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9363 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Suspension On-Vehicle Inspection and Service KNUCKLE On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Removal and Installation Removal and Installation Page 439 Component Parts Location Page 6164 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10608 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove driver air bag module. 3. Remove the steering wheel center nut. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel switch/ horn connector from the spiral cable. 5. Remove the steering wheel. 6. Remove the column cover upper and lower. 7. Remove wiper washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. Page 6570 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2102 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2019 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11171 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13861 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2032 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 2246 Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Step 3) Page 12708 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9691 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1425 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13459 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 3531 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 14234 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8997 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results Display Item List Page 3518 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11355 Page 5228 Check Sheet Part 3 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 6212 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 5130 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 10845 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13594 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 14315 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 9798 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8856 Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Page 2179 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13551 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5403 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 14386 Page 5795 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 869 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4810 Page 13649 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 12484 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 270 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3585 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5308 Case 8 Page 4531 not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 1940 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 6486 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 14264 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 3445 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10288 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Page 8271 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 6881 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5668 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9182 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 12403 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11400 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 10091 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8236 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5350 ABLS models VDC models Page 1851 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 10405 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Non-Trouble Code Procedures Power Supply Circuit Inspection Page 8206 Optional Splice Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 711 Page 6411 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6289 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 10665 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2523 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: - Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. - Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 4086 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Page 12233 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 4. CAUTION: Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle it with care. 4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body. 5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench. 6. Remove the lower flap cover. Page 12805 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10264 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11358 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7978 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 1952 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 3159 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown. Tool number: - (J-46535) CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. ^ Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys. ^ Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the drive belt auto tensioner. Page 21 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5296 Case 13 Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9927 Figure C-17, Figure C-18 b. Install and Torque 4 bumper bolts (see Figure C-17). Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) Figure C-19 c. Install and Torque the bumper bolt shown in Figure C-19. Page 12426 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11558 b. Pull release handle on door (see Figure 15). NOTE: Upper door latch should close and open without binding or use of excessive force. 23. Reinstall door panel and seatbelt retractor cover. 24. Reinstall three door panel bolts, then reinstall armrest. CAUTION: Door panel bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to install. 25. Reinstall upper seat belt anchor bolt. Page 9940 - Pay close attention to the tie wrap locations. Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm correct tie-wrap locations. 15. Install the fan motor cover: - Make sure the 4 clips are installed in the correct locations. Figure D-18 Figure D-19 Page 9827 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13901 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 35 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 4133 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4919 ECM Inspection Table Part 6 Page 2138 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10063 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5709 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8712 Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors) 1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back). 2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts. NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side. OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2. Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored) Page 14112 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator and motor assembly. Installation 1. Position the regulator and motor assembly and install the bolts. Regulator and motor assembly 7.5 N·m (0.76 Kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. 3. Install the rear window. - While installing the rear window, make sure that the bottom clips are engaged on the back panel, then rotate the glass into position. Page 7742 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 2862 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 2141 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 14402 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure Page 13108 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7979 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 1893 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 12942 Page 11932 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 11383 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1) Page 1358 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1502 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 252 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1974 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 9336 Page 5320 Case 1 Page 1408 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 14214 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14060 Page 10023 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10852 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14064 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 7977 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 572 Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel. INSTALLATION 1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". Page 8591 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12763 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 14490 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 3081 ^ Measure point "H". Distance from the top: 39 mm (1.54 inch) Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance ^ Calculate by using diameter of the piston skirt and the cylinder bore diameter (direction X, position B). (Clearance) = (Cylinder bore diameter) - (piston skirt diameter) Standard: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 inch) Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 inch) ^ If calculation exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly. Reboring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter "A". Rebored size calculation: D = A + B - C where, D: Bored diameter A: Piston diameter as measured B: Piston - to - bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) 2. Install main bearing caps, and tighten them to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted in final assembly. 3. Cut the cylinder bores. NOTE: ^ When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. ^ Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at one time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) or so in diameter at a time. 4. Hone cylinders to obtain the specified piston-to-bore clearance. 5. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. NOTE: Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN Page 815 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 5173 Case 9 Page 268 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3790 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 3709 Optional Splice Page 8945 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Service and Repair Console Lamp: Service and Repair CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped) Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the map lamp assembly (2). Refer to INTERIOR ROOM LAMP. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to INTERIOR HEADLINER. 3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from map lamp assembly (2) to remove. Page 14083 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13810 Page 2606 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 9826 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 753 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 175 CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE (SEE FIGURE 10). ^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer (download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur. ^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK". Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6. 9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II. a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8). b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK". ^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration. Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216 Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN Reference: NTBO7-009 Date: February 16, 2007 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616 NHTSA # : 06V-459 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471 2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226 2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805 NOTE: Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety exists. In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio speakers. If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker, there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type cover will be installed and rerouted. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500 DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and Page 12939 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2006 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 8603 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 10020 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 6247 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3181 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2604 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Service and Repair Video Cassette Player / Recorder: Service and Repair VIDEO MONITOR Removal 1. Remove rear roof console assembly.Refer to "HEADLINING". 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector. 3. Remove the video housing screws. 4. Remove the video monitor and housing. 5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video, monitor. Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. Page 9961 TABLE OF CONTENTS Required Special Tools........................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................3 Repair Overview (flow chart).......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........3 Service Procedure (Armada / Titan)........................................................................................ ................................................................................................5 Procedure A: Identify Fan Type............................................................................................................ ..............................................................................5 Procedure B: Cooling Fan Motor Inspection........ .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Voltage.................................................................................... .....................................................................15 Procedure C: Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly ................................................................................................................... 17 Procedure D: Install Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness ..............................................................................................................................30 Procedure E: Install Maxi Fuse................................................................................................................................... ......................................................41 Procedure F: Confirm Fan Operation........................................ ........................................................................................................................................45 Parts Information.................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................46 Claims Information.......................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......48 Owner's Letter.......................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................49 Required Special Tools: - Any of these special tools can be ordered from TECH-MATE. Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter and Test Leads (Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter is part of the J-48602 QR25 Engine Kit). Fan Motor Tester: Part of test kit J-49489 - Part number for Fan Motor Tester - J-49489-1 Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 10312 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8514 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11337 Component Parts Location Page 9085 5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located (see Figure B2). 6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly. ^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made. ^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks. 7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in steps 5 and 6. IMPORTANT: ^ DO NOT use a razorblade. ^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube. ^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Page 10160 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3662 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Removal And Installation EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove the engine undercover (rear) using power tool (4WD models). 2. Remove front final drive assembly (4WD models). . 3. Remove the main muffler assembly and center exhaust tube. . 4. Remove the front exhaust tubes. . 5. Remove front tires. . 6. Remove fender protectors. . 7. Remove the LH and RH air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both LH and RH exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number : - (J-44626) CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. 8. Support the engine using a suitable tool. 9. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front - B: Exhaust manifold (RH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as shown using power tool. e. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A). Page 6790 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4327 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9272 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Mount the power steering oil pump in a vise as needed. 1. Remove the connector bolt, connector and copper washers. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washers. 2. Remove the suction pipe and O-ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. 3. Remove the pulley nut and pulley. 4. Remove the bracket bolts and bracket. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper gaskets Do not reuse the O-ring. Apply a coat of Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent to the O-ring. Page 4523 ITEMS OF EACH PART Display Item List - Work Support With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 13338 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 6266 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9508 Tire Page 1230 Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (King Cab) Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7810 3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released. IMPORTANT: Do not push the brake pedal until step 6. 4. Start the engine and let it idle. ^ Keep the transmission in Park. 5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor. 6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release. NOTE: 2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height". 7. Repeat step 6 ten times. ^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step. 8. Repeat steps 2 though 7. ^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Part 2 Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. This part of the procedure involves two general steps: ^ Setting up ^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card). SETTING UP: 1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1). CAUTION: Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card. Page 11184 Optional Splice Page 5445 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Page 14319 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 11648 2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest. 3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly. 4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool. b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4. Page 9724 Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 12342 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 14090 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5052 Inspection Between Differential Lock Control Unit And Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection Between Differential Lock Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Page 6669 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13845 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 8407 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10722 4. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan. 5. Unclip connector attachment clip from seat bracket to remove buckle assy from seat. 6. install seat belt buckle and bolt. Page 259 Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3143 A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the pump pulley. See Figure 2. B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See Figure 3. NOTE: The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the crankshaft pulley. ^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17. ^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12. Page 10006 Page 12944 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 6967 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 32 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8563 Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11362 Page 9774 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4029 Optional Splice Page 742 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 11387 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Specifications Valve Guide Page 6962 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Service and Repair Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Page 1192 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Automatic Air Conditioner Heater Core: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner HEATER CORE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. Page 9925 a. Install the jumper harness on the new fan motor as show. - New fan assembly and harness kit are listed in the Parts Information. b. Go to Installation of the fan assembly. Figure C-14 Jumper harness installation on NEW 140 watt fan assembly Install Condenser Fan Assembly Figure C-15 10. Pull the bumper forward and install the fan assembly. Page 9859 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the cluster lid D. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor from cluster lid D. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 221 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 7780 Page 2369 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5235 Case 7 Page 7369 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 5119 Case 2 Page 8371 Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Step 3) Page 11857 Other Mirror Types Disclaimer Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 5503 Attachment General Procedure Page 8403 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 13179 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10567 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 14224 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3969 Page 835 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 130 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2136 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 14203 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13890 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Service and Repair License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair Page 10863 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512 Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Classification: BR06-007 Reference: NTB06-040 Date: May 12, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) equipped with VDC IF YOU CONFIRM A customer reports: ^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking. * This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated. ACTIONS ^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. Page 8572 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2150 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10724 13. Reprogram the radio station presets. 14. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed: ^ Power Window Initialization ^ Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ^ Throttle Valve closed Position Learning ^ Idle Air Volume Learning ^ Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position NOTE: You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset. Page 2941 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 5231 Case 3 Page 1954 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13148 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2311 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8673 ^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the tube. ^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6. 10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7). ^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch). Page 9569 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3346 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 7323 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Remote Control: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8327 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11927 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4261 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12580 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3807 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 1621 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 4546 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 12156 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9993 Figure D-14 c. Stick the 2nd piece of protector 4 on the fan shroud as shown. - Overlap the 2nd piece on top of the 1st piece at the spot shown. - Overlap about 10 mm (1/4 inch) but not less than 5 mm (1/8 inch). - Fold and stick the protector under the shroud. d. Install the 3rd piece in the same manner as the 2nd piece. Figure D-15 e. Install the 4th piece of Protector 4 as shown. - Align the protector along the 1 o'clock rib as shown. - Don't cover up the bolt hole. - Overlap the 4th piece on top of the 3rd piece at the spot shown. - Overlap must be at least 5 mm (1/8 inch). - Fold and stick the protector under the shroud. 12. Press and smooth all parts of protector 4. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan shroud. 13. Install the motor in the shroud with the harness in the correct location (about 4 o'clock) as shown in Figure D-16. Page 9990 Figure D-8A - Make sure the harness is routed through the harness hole in Protector 3 (refer to Figure D-8A). Figure D-9 7. Fold and stick protector 3 to the top of the fan motor as shown. Fold and stick the flap shown in Figure D-9 to the side of the fan motor. Figure D-10 8. Wrap the long strip of protector 3 completely around the motor. Page 5280 Case 14 Case 15 Page 2208 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2946 ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance) Page 1743 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 4921 ECM Inspection Table Part 8 Page 4492 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 8308 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8092 ^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed (see Figure 5). NOTE ^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY! ^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure. 7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows: a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5). Page 9643 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 7 - 10) Page 12886 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 13803 Page 8220 Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11223 Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. Remove the rear panel. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the sonar control unit. 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the sonar control unit bolts and remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9687 Optional Splice Page 2396 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5) Page 6828 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 9301 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly CAUTION: ^ Secure steering gear assembly with a vise, using copper plates or something similar to prevent it from being damaged. Do not grip cylinder with a vise. ^ Before performing disassembly, clean steering gear assembly with kerosene. Be careful not to bring any kerosene into contact with the discharge and return port connectors. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly 2. Loosen lock nuts of outer sockets, and remove outer sockets. 3. Remove boot clamps of the small diameter side and the large diameter side, then remove boot. CAUTION: When removing boots, be careful not to damage inner socket and gear housing assembly. If they are damaged, change them to avoid oil leaks. 4. Remove inner sockets. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary. Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as an assembly if necessary. Outer Socket and Inner Socket SWING TORQUE Page 13342 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 6719 Page 5096 Case 10 Page 5396 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6928 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10986 Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10094 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10167 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the evaporator. 3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve bolts : 4 N.m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb) A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 9732 1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2. ^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing. Page 10399 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1170 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 10957 1. Lower DVD screen as shown in Figure 1. 2. Remove (2) 10 mm screws from the console. 3. Use hooked trim tool (essential tool J-46534 Plastic Trim Tool Set or equivalent) to pull down console at 2 locations (both sides). Page 1594 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10491 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8716 8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4. 9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness. ^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the direction shown in Figure B5. Page 1071 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Headlamp (For USA) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9025 Page 9116 ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the harness. 68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 69. Reset the radio station presets. 70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 71. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. Page 13490 Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration CAN Communication Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3186 Page 402 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 8533 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Automatic Air Conditioner Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system. Page 12809 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13068 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13099 Tachometer: Description and Operation TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm). ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 1527 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 1045 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5520 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 1679 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 910 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 8873 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 565 Page 13570 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14150 WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 1141 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12343 Optional Splice Page 11878 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10819 Page 1174 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10407 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 5496 Page 661 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 3664 - Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts LH and RH in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts. - A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - White Arrow indicates Front Before installing new air fuel ratio A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using suitable tool and apply anti-seize lubricant. CAUTION: Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 14440 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 3157 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection ENGINE MAINTENANCE WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range "A" (between three line notches) as shown. NOTE: ^ Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold. ^ When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be "A" as shown. ^ The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner. 3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Page 4365 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6242 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12213 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2393 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2764 specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". NOTE: At temperatures below 16 degrees C (61 degrees F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure. 4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a"to evaporator inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (evaporator drain hose "g" to compressor shaft seal "k"). Refer to "Components". Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal - Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, and relief valve - Check the liquid tank - Check the refrigerant pressure sensor - Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. 5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d. Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower fan speed to HIGH 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment. 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment. 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to "Operational Check". Page 3676 ^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are located (see Figure 1 and 2 above). > The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield. > If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply. 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for example). Page 9507 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 12987 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6329 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 766 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12487 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 9661 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Mode Door Motor MODE DOOR MOTOR Page 11373 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5738 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 729 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Testing and Inspection Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 4526 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic Page 4244 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 2151 Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1787 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7619 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 308 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 13851 Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 9425 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. ^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 9065 55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only). ^ Open the side bolt covers. ^ Remove the 2 bolts. 56. Remove the dome lamp. a. Remove the clear lamp cover b. Remove the 2 screws. c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector. CAN Communication Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6416 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13730 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 808 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2167 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14036 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14079 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5498 Page 138 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9882 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 10 - 12) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. Page 3589 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14484 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up ABLS/ABS Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 4312 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4154 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11381 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3866 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 3950 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 11392 Part 2 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication Page 9195 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers. 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front lower link (2). CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components". Page 6647 Page 540 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 1980 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9873 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 10 - 12) Page 1396 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9830 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Front Final Drive Oil Capacity .................................................................................................................................................. 1.6 l (3 3/8 pt, 2 7/8 imp pt) Rear Rear Final Drive Oil Capacity ................................................................................................................................................ 2.01L (4 1/4 pt, 3 1/2 imp pt.) Sunroof Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9316 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Removal and Installation The ball joints are part of the upper and lower links. Inspection ^ Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the following exists: Ball joint stud is worn. - Ball joint is hard to swing. - Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. SWINGING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. 1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool. ^ Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown. ^ Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown. 2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification. Swinging force "A" Upper ball joint: 8.1 - 103.2 N (0.8 - 10.5 kgf, 1.8 - 23.2 ft. lbs.) Lower ball joint: 11.4 - 145.5 N (1.1 - 14.8 kgf, 2.5 - 32.7 ft. lbs.) TURNING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Turning torque "B": 0.5 - 6.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 inch lbs.) VERTICAL END PLAY Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 9604 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 8 - 11) Page 8339 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12370 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 11504 7. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts 6.0 N.m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb) 8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle bracket and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the outside handle cable. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4738 Page 9512 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Rotation NOTE: Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". See: Maintenance/Service Intervals 1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. Wheel nut: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.) CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. 2. Adjust the tire pressure to specification. 3. After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after every wheel and tire have been installed such as after repairing a flat tire. Page 5149 Case 2 Page 8648 Page 8210 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12155 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 13168 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5704 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14451 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 1753 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 4096 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Engine Control Component Parts Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13133 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1324 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2125 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3611 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4298 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 12792 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2219 Page 3977 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 9100 22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below. 23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet. 24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor. Page 1772 Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection Optical Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The optical sensor is located in the center of the defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the front air control. OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS The front air control includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in detected sunload. For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 1) Page 4912 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 2211 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 12474 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 648 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 10089 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6464 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12048 NOTE: - Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. - The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations. If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor. 1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP. 2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the connector, harness side, between the following color wires: NOTES: For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM). If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment. Figure 2 Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle you are working on may be different. - This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected. - If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward" positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor. - If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide motor. Remove Old Seat Slide Parts 3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure. 4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2). - Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access the seat mounting bolts. - Don't remove the seat yet. 5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle. - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 6. Turn the ignition key "OFF". 7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes. - This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front seat side air bags. 8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors. 9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface. Page 927 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12637 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10664 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13477 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9002 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 10344 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10669 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 3369 the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 10342 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12433 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9705 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5518 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 1867 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Display Item List - Data Monitor With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 4654 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 5818 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 13026 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7126 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly or around it. 2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Changing Final Drive Oil Changing Final Drive Oil Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 3137 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 12767 Page 1730 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4713 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 3783 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 6868 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 69 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4048 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 10499 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10090 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 396 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 9785 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 19 - 22) Page 1905 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 2289 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4886 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 11377 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 120 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12730 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12492 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3288 4. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with the timing indicator on the front cover. b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) point outside. ^ If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 5. Remove the crankshaft pulley. a. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using a hammer handle to secure the crankshaft. b. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool. ^ Remove the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool. Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 inch)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 inch). Page 13530 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 469 Page 4996 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4023 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14140 FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB". 2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. 5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 716 Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing Page 1533 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview ECM Circuit Inspection Page 10461 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2) Page 14382 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7985 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 7419 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10042 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10654 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2669 O-Ring Part Number And Specifications Page 2805 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.) Page 13617 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5755 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3975 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 9703 Page 4677 Page 11530 NOTE: Use the lower locating hole (see Figure 12). 17. Reinstall upper door latch grey cable clip into door (See Figure 12. 18. Reinstall handle release cable into upper door latch white cable clip. Page 5526 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 5358 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12410 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009 Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56 vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which could cause a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 7462 Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch Page 13699 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9920 Figure C-4, Figure C-5 a. Remove 1 bumper bolt shown in Figures C-4 and C-5: - Driver side only. Page 13006 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 2563 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT NOTE: ^ Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. ^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. ^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: ^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness. ^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Page 4482 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8908 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 4136 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5626 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 7392 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2209 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8958 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10244 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11938 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Tightening Torques & Sequences Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences Exhaust Manifold ^ Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Automatic Air Conditioner Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Evaporator REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater core. See: Heater Core/Service and Repair 2. Remove the defroster mode door arm. 3. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case. Page 14390 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8152 Traction Control Module: Description and Operation TCS CONTROL UNIT Description The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 14473 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2576 A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the pump pulley. See Figure 2. B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See Figure 3. NOTE: The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the crankshaft pulley. ^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17. ^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12. Page 2744 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F) API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III Diagram Information and Instructions Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 499 Part 2 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Steps 1 - 2) A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Step 3) Page 9054 c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts. d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it. 16. If equipped with side curtain air bags: ^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag will be covered later in this procedure. ^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows. a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out of the way. b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector. c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag. Page 13869 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8087 Disclaimer Parts 1-4 Descriptions There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order. Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis. ^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure. Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. ^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card. ^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure. Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST). ^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure. Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. ^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure. NOTE: These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician. Part 1 Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis. 1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis. ^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. Page 10674 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 10424 Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 7 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Ambient Sensor Page 8118 CAUTION: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE (SEE FIGURE 10). ^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer (download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur. ^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK". Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6. 9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II. a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8). b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK". ^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1810 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10343 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1953 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8821 Page 356 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12221 Power Mirror Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 14323 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9067 Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces. 60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it. 61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side). ^ 2 clips on each side. 62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector. 63. Take the harness loose from the body roof. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1858 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11732 Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH) Page 8507 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 7275 Model 3S1350 DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. 2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke. 3. Remove the snap rings. Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 5078 Case 5 Page 5706 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 7304 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4600 EC-MIL/DL-02 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 1246 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Page 5313 Case 13 Page 9857 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Step 13) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2578 or B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 30, 31 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION In-vehicle Sensor Page 13337 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 3204 Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information Precautions for Engine Oils Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS - Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807 Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting Classification: BT09-004 Reference: NTB09-074 Date: August 7, 2009 2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer. ACTION Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information. NOTE Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 5236 Case 8 Page 10482 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9171 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 993 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5894 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3238 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped. 3. Drain engine oil. WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 4. Remove the oil cooler. 5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator. 6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly. 7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool. 8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position aside. 9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. 10. Remove upper radiator hose. 11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator. 12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan. 13. Disconnect the following connectors. - Harness ground - Power steering switch - A/C compressor - Oil pressure switch 14. Remove generator and generator bracket. 15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside. 16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool. 17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only). 18. Remove the steering gear. 19. Remove the oil pressure switch. 20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool. Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4432 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. 6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. ^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with black arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 14455 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 9764 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6171 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12536 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 959 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 7128 and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids 2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Page 855 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9928 - Driver side only. Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) Figure C-20 d. Install and torque 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket (see Figure C-20). - Driver side only. Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper) do the following: Figure C-21 a. Install 2 bumper to fender screws. - Driver side only. Page 6169 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8096 ^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see Figure 10). c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8). ^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically. d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II. Procedure Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card CAUTION: ^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections. ^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5. Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s). Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input". Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming. Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTCs. Section 1 Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp "trickle charge"). IMPORTANT You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't. Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain: ^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II battery is low. ^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on during reprogramming. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure 11). Page 14103 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) (Step 4) Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 5127 Case 10 Page 5298 Case 16 Case 17 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 6933 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Automatic Air Conditioner Page 9819 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5394 Body Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6878 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12408 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5756 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Headlamp (For CANADA) - Daytime Light System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 684 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Specifications Page 9642 Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 1 - 2) Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 3 - 6) Page 6596 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 4721 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Locations Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 13978 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 263 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12561 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 12493 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3765 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST. Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If Page 6323 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 9700 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 14066 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure Page 3949 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 5459 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 10364 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5398 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11494 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Page 3537 REMOVAL CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 1. Remove engine room cover. 2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. 3. Remove air cleaner and air duct assembly. 4. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses. ^ Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. 5. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses from radiator. CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to contact drive belts. 6. Remove the lower radiator shroud. ^ Release the tabs, pull lower radiator shroud rearwards and down to remove. 7. Remove the radiator shroud upper bolts and remove the radiator shroud upper A. 8. Remove the A/C condenser bolts and brackets. NOTE: Lift A/C condenser up and forward to remove from radiator. Page 13705 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation TRAILER TOW System Description Power is supplied at all times - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and - through 50 A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and - to 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box) - through 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box) - to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 5, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 61 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and - through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) - to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and - to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 30 A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and - through 40 A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) - to BCM terminal 38, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67 - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 and - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and - to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2 - to trailer connector terminal 2 - to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 2 - through grounds E9, E15 and E24. TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1. With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied - through the tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R - through 10 A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) - to IPDM E/R terminal 49 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1. When energized, trailer tow relay 1 supplies tail lamp power to trailer connector terminal 6. TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION The trailer turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM through trailer turn relays (LH and RH). If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer turn relays (LH and RH) to make them cycle on and off. Trailer turn relay LH output is supplied - through BCM terminal 52 - to trailer turn relay LH terminal 1. Trailer turn relay RH output is supplied Page 285 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3847 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 13384 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11833 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6936 Page 7264 NVH Troubleshooting Chart Page 12662 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9772 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 3480 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 5 - 7) Page 10389 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10051 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1098 Optional Splice Page 13616 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9926 Figure C-16 11. Install the condenser fan mounting bolt. 12. Install and torque 2 nuts to the air bag sensor. - Torque: 15 N.m (1.52 Kg-m, 11 ft-lb) - Apply medium strength thread-locker to the studs (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM005P or equivalent). 13. Make sure the Rubber Seal is inside the condenser fan electrical connector and then connect the connector. 14. Install the bumper as follows: For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following: a. Lift bumper ON the locating tabs; both sides (see Figure C-18). Page 14216 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8430 Page 3874 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 3550 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1359 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 13281 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE SWITCH Description Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. Page 7710 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12115 SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. Preliminary Steps NOTE: ^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags. ^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see Figure 1). 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with step 4 below. Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer 4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor. ^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2). ^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat. 6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2. ^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position. Page 7449 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 1695 Page 470 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5267 Case 1 Page 12345 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 487 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3500 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8697 Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces. 60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it. 61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side). ^ 2 clips on each side. 62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector. 63. Take the harness loose from the body roof. Page 1229 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 4581 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10666 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 10174 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 5 - 7) Page 11479 - Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly. Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker. SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting Page 395 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13863 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1402 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Front Differential Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Differential Front Oil Seal Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove front propeller shaft. 2. Separate the RH and LH drive shafts from the front final drive. 3. Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) NOTE: Record the preload measurement. 4. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange using Tool. Tool number: KV38108300 5. Remove companion flange using a suitable puller. 6. Place a small hole in seal case, using a suitable punch or drill. 7. Remove oil seal using Tool as shown. Tool number: - (SP8P) INSTALLATION Page 9783 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 10 - 14) Page 12898 2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows: a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots ^ For Type A see Figure 1 ^ For Type B see Figure 2 Page 8388 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3721 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8356 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13241 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 817 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Page 10749 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 11775 Other Mirror Types Disclaimer Page 7145 Control Unit: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 10390 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 4116 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 4878 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1074 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10064 Optional Splice Page 8156 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 850 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM) Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased. Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6643 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 309 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2401 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1) Page 10398 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11856 4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary). NOTE: Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3. 5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s). 6. Remove the old actuator motor. 7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal. Page 2234 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8594 Page 3574 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12937 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6720 Page 9974 Figure C-2 b. IMPORTANT: Make sure all 7 clips are released prior to the next step. c. Hold the grill as shown and give it a sharp pull. - Do this for both sides. Figure C-3 4. Remove 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket. - Left side (driver side) only. 5. Remove bumper mounting bolts as follows: For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following: Page 14387 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10340 Optional Splice Page 10316 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6009 Engine Control Component Parts Location Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519 Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement Reference: NTB10-037A Date: May 19, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE INACCURACY This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010 NHTSA #: 10V-074 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 6408 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6494 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 568 Page 3616 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10333 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 9787 Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 27 - 30) Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Step 31) Page 9930 Torque for bolts on brackets 1, 2, & 3: 9.6 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Figure C-25 d. Install and torque 2 bolts for the front bumper side bracket. - Driver side only. Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) 15. Install the grill. Figure C-26 IMPORTANT: Make sure all 7 clips are properly located in the grill before installing. If you have installed a new fan, skip steps 16 - 19 and go to Procedure E. 16. Reconnect the Negative battery cable. 17. Reset the radio station presets. 18. Reset the clock. 19. Go to Procedure F. Procedure D - Install Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness (Only for Type 2-90 Wat-Fan Motors That Tested OK) Page 8390 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3 Page 10199 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard Condenser Fan Motor: Recalls Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Infiniti/QX56 2005-2006 Nissan/Armada 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 24, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V284000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: PE08037 COMPONENT: Equipment: Electrical: Air Conditioner POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 180664 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 180,664 M/Y 2005-2006 Titan, Armada and Infiniti QX56 vehicles manufactured after March 17, 2005, That are equipped with a Visteon air conditioning condenser fan motor. The fan motor may not be properly sealed allowing excessive water intrusion and inadequate drainage of moisture. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause corrosion in the motor leading possibly to overheating and a fire. REMEDY: Dealers will install a "Thermal Protector Kit" and test the air conditioning condenser fan motor and replace it if necessary. The recall is expected to begin near the end of July 2008. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 12726 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2084 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2925 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) With reservoir ...................................................................................................................................... .......................... 3 1/4 gal. (2 5/8 Imp gal, 12.2 L) Page 1318 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 1943 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13005 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12693 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 1779 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4507 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3599 Optional Splice Page 2694 Disclaimer Page 5913 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12227 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Step 3) Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 6270 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4265 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12351 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8555 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 14388 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7028 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5475 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 974 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 12095 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Page 13321 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9856 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 9 - 12) Page 3287 Image Symbols NOTE: ^ To remove timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The procedure for removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for removal on the LH bank. ^ To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure for installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the RH bank. REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove the following components and related parts: ^ Drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. ^ Thermostat housing and water hose. ^ Power steering oil pump bracket. ^ Oil pan (lower), (upper) and oil strainer. ^ Ignition coil. ^ Rocker cover. 3. Remove the chain case cover RH bank (A) and chain case cover LH bank (B) as follows: a. Loosen and remove the bolts as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. Page 12371 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 8672 8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4. 9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness. ^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the direction shown in Figure B5. Page 10659 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 1846 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3321 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 10271 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 4591 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 4461 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9688 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Page 14164 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8767 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Page 7927 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 11506 2. Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole. Torx bolt 5.3 N.m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) 3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon. 4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove. 5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 6. Remove the inside handle screws. Page 1012 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8832 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13958 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4476 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 10044 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12795 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 171 6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4). Page 8314 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6315 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12428 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12719 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 11595 Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 3994 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 6229 Page 5696 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 11048 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5016 System Diagram - Type 1 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 601 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 14497 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are normal. WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less ^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly Page 4582 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 7718 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4479 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14300 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4917 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 12469 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6625 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine. Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD" position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6. Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Power Seat Drive Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Classification: BT05-052a Reference: NTB05-105a Date: October 31, 2008 FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest (V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)* ^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat). ^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat). APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*) 7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209 D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before: 15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates IF YOU CONFIRM: The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason. NOTE: Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include: - The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward. - While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked (crooked) on the seat tracks. - Noise from the slide motor or gears. ACTION: Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat adjuster assembly. IMPORTANT: ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 11010 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4421 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 1840 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3959 Page 8321 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2381 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 11972 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch Replacement Rear Door Latch: Recalls Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V064000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: February 28, 2006 COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 427 SUMMARY: Certain light trucks fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." An arc weld is missing on some right side rear door upper latch assemblies. CONSEQUENCE: This may result in the right side doors coming partially open increasing the risk of injury to occupants. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the upper latch assembly free of charge. The recall is expected to begin on April 15, 2006. Owners may contact Nissan at 800-662-6200. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 8806 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5272 Case 6 Page 1317 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 13762 Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 8893 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12249 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 5776 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5442 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2) Page 9725 Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 7 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Ambient Sensor Page 28 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8453 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 8383 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5970 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Stabilizer Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Classification: FA10-003A Reference: NTB10-072A Date: October 6, 2010 FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN 6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct 23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All IF YOU CONFIRM A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following actions: ^ turning the steering wheel left or right ^ driving over speed bumps ^ driving on rough roads ^ accelerating or decelerating AND The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing. ACTIONS Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and installation instructions. Page 13755 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 11747 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 4) Page 776 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8556 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Part 1 Part 2 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored. 5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch STOP. Page 11789 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 13407 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5918 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9991 Figure D-11 9. Press and smooth all parts of protector 3. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan motor. - Pay special attention to the area shown in Figure D-11. Make sure there is good adhesion in this area. NOTE: The large support ribs on the fan shroud are labeled 1 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, and 11 o'clock for reference when installing parts on to the fan shroud. 10. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the fan shroud between the 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock ribs (see Figure D-12). - Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag. 11. Install Protector 4 on the fan shroud. a. Remove 1 of the 4 sections from protector 4 adhesive backing. b. Stick the 1st section next to the 5 o'clock support rib. Page 8605 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 3458 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12052 Figure 12 24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat track (see Figures 11 and 12). Figure 13 25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13). Figure 14 26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85 in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm). 27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 10332 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7328 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10299 Optional Splice Diagram Information and Instructions Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4934 ECM Inspection Table Part 3 Page 14173 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9117 Page 8471 Page 6263 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8669 1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light: ^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3. ^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2). ^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the warning light before proceeding. 2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge) 1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area. 2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube: ^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits. Page 9924 Figure C-12 7. Remove 2 nuts from the air bag sensor. - Position the sensor out of the way. WARNING: Do not drop or otherwise impact the air bag sensor. 8. Remove the condenser fan mounting bolt. Figure C-13 9. Pull the bumper forward and remove the fan. If your fan motor tested OK in Procedure B: a. Go to Procedure D to install the Fan Motor Protective covers. - Protective Covering Kit is listed in the Parts Information. b. Return here for installation of the fan assembly. If your fan motor tested NG in Procedure B: Page 2229 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8789 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13808 Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6638 Optional Splice Locations Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1140 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11790 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 5923 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 8325 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Electrical Units Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ^ Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod large end inside diameter. Standard: 57.000 - 57.013 mm (2.2441 - 2.2446 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the standard, replace connecting rod. CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) Connecting Rod Inside Diameter (Small End) ^ Measure inside diameter of bushing using suitable tool. Standard: 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 0.8664 inch) Piston Pin Diameter ^ Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool. Standard: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 0.8659 inch) Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End) (Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod small end) - (Piston pin diameter) Standard: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 inch) Page 4833 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 4233 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 8727 13. Remove the lower dash side finisher. ^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever. 14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support. 15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness: a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts, b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support. Page 13578 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10192 8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6. ^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900 Page 958 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Service and Repair Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair REAR COMBINATION LAMP Removal and Installation Page 8734 34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure. NOTE: The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown). 35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract; remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt. ^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt. NOTE: Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and state regulations. 36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points. 37. Pull the harness out of the door. Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed) Page 7430 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 12663 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 4720 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 4477 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12774 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1599 Page 8233 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 1788 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1208 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5226 Check Sheet Part 1 Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 14454 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 2894 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 9971 - The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud. d. Observe the RPM reading on the tachometer and the volt reading on the Fluke 73 meter. IMPORTANT: The RPM and voltage reading should be observed at the same time with the fan motor running. 10. Record / write down the RPM and Volt readings you observed in step 9d. NOTE: Pressing the MEM (memory) button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer will display the last RPM measurement. 11. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to OFF. 12. Disconnect the testers from the vehicle. 13. Use the chart below to determine if the fan motor is OK or No Good. Page 9334 PARTS INFORMATION Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front On-vehicle Inspection PAD WEAR INSPECTION - Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard thickness: 11.88 mm (0.468 inch) Repair limit thickness: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Page 12874 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Power Window System Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 9951 Page 8889 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11155 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14075 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 1126 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 11829 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13745 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 13323 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Front Suspension Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13165 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 12935 Page 13805 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Page 4824 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 10426 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4208 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 42 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10591 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 8592 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 10726 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. Remove center front seat. 2. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt. 3. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt buckle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4784 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 9825 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4299 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 8099 2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15). NOTE: ^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery. ^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.) 3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15). ^ A reading above 12 volts confirms; a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle, b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following may be the cause: a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it is not working). b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight). c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins). d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11). CAUTION: ^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts. ^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15). 4. Continue with Section 4. Section 4 Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming 1. Press [BACK] two times. Page 6442 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9585 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 8405 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11051 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13670 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 7060 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5218 Case 7 Page 1922 Optional Splice Page 779 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4900 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 3857 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 12009 Figure 18 31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). 32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely. 33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make sure they all snap together securely. 34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first. 35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.). - If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information. 36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should. 37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal operation, procedure A or B must be performed. Procedure A: 1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".) 2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ). 3. End Procedure B: 1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH). 2. End 38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed: - Power Window Initialization - Power Sunroof Initialization - Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning - Throttle Valve closed Position Learning - Idle Air Volume Learning - Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment Page 6842 6. Allow the ATF temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-II to monitor the fluid temperature as follows: NOTE: Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-II. a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1". 7. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown. CAUTION: ^ When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth. ^ To check the fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown. 8. Check the fluid condition. ^ If the fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may bean internal problem with the transmission. Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission. ^ If the ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission. 9. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 10. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components Page 1579 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. 2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11302 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7729 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2281 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 785 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 647 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 14249 Page 5634 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 6162 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 11822 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 9144 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 246 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11016 AV-DVD-03 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 6626 Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the glove box assembly. 3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) ^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 3315 EM-10 Page 4241 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 529 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 14330 Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair Washer Motor REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove washer fluid reservoir. 2. Remove washer motor (1) in the direction of the arrow as shown, from washer fluid reservoir (2). INSTALLATION CAUTION: When installing front and rear washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8770 Page 6474 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4004 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 3223 EM-5 Page 13756 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 2293 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5441 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1) Page 4839 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 14391 Wiper Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8328 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9800 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11514 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8981 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1520 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 10776 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. CAUTION: - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 7451 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 4114 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 503 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 5057 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 5 - 6) Work Flow TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - CAN communication line is open. (CAN H, CAN L, or both) - CAN communication line is shorted. (Ground, between CAN lines, or other harnesses) - The areas related to CAN communication of unit is malfunctioning. WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Removal and installation of parts: When the units that perform CAN communication or the sensors related to CAN communication are removed and installed, malfunction may be detected (or DTC other than CAN communication may be detected). - Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may be stopped at such time. - Low voltage: If the voltage decreases because of battery discharge when IGN is ON, malfunction may be detected by self-diagnosis according to the units. Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart Page 3962 Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 968 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 8883 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5083 Case 10 Case 11 Page 13032 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3762 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 1612 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5669 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6748 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 3885 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 7039 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 820 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. Page 1816 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10667 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5705 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8613 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13585 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 13278 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Service and Repair Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Removal and Installation The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 1830 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 9649 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Steps 10 - 12) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) Intake Door Motor Circuit Intake Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Intake door does not change. - Intake door motor does not operate normally. Page 14063 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8677 b. Disconnect the electrical connectors. c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle. 7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup holder: a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat. a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts. b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. Page 2621 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft relating to the valve oil seal to be removed. 2. Remove the valve lifters. ^ Correctly identify the location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up. 3. Turn the crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent the valve from dropping into the cylinder. 4. Remove the valve collet using Tool. Tool number : KV10116200 (J-26336-A) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109220 ( - ) CAUTION: Do not damage the valve lifter holes. 5. Remove the valve spring retainer and valve spring. CAUTION: Do not remove the valve spring seat from the valve spring. 6. Remove the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number: KV10107902 (J-38959) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Install the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number: KV10115600 (J-38958) ^ Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip. ^ Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H". Height "H" (without valve spring installed) Intake and exhaust: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 inch) Page 244 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6969 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 9854 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 1 - 4) Page 1882 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9146 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 555 Page 13057 Speedometer Head: Description and Operation SPEEDOMETER ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 7558 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Oil Seal Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Partially drain transfer fluid. 2. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 3. Remove dust cover from rear case. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. 4. Remove rear oil seal from rear case, using Tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. Tool number: KV381054S0 (J-34286) INSTALLATION 1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush with end face of rear case, using Tool. Tool number: KV38100500 CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 4797 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 7503 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4903 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 6385 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 11783 Other Mirror Types Disclaimer Page 13684 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6278 - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 10597 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5109 Case 8 Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification Technical Service Bulletin # 08-068B Date: 080909 Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification Reference: NTB08-068b Date: September 9, 2008 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004 - 2006 NISSAN TITAN AND ARMADA AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER FAN This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has changed. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID # : PB081 - for Applied Vehicles built before March 17, 2005 PB077 - for Applied Vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005 NHTSA # : 08V-284 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain Model Year 2004, 2005, and 2006 Nissan Titan and Armada vehicles: - All vehicles manufactured from March 17, 2005 to August 21, 2006 are subject to this campaign. - Model Year 2004 vehicles and Model Year 2005 vehicles manufactured before March 17, 2005 are included only if the air conditioning condenser fan was replaced after the vehicle was originally purchased using one of the affected replacement parts. The air conditioning condenser fan motor in the subject vehicles was manufactured out of specification allowing for excessive water intrusion and inadequate drainage of moisture. If enough moisture accumulates in the motor, corrosion may occur, leading to increased temperature in the motor. Because of the motor's unique structure, this increased temperature could melt its wiring insulation and other plastic components and ultimately result in a fire. To correct the issue, Nissan will inspect, and as needed, install a thermal protector kit on the air conditioning condenser fan at no charge for parts or labor. Also, to ensure continued customer satisfaction with the air conditioning system in these vehicles, the condenser fan motor will be tested for excessive friction. If necessary, the motor will be replaced with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. (If a new motor is installed, the protector kit is not needed.) IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification numbers PB077 and PB081 to this campaign. PB077 or PB081 must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. - PB081 is for 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005. - PB077 is for 2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005. - Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 6040 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 2230 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4153 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13244 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6739 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 6528 Components REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device. Page 9525 Wheels: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. 2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. Page 8715 5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located (see Figure B2). 6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly. ^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made. ^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks. 7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in steps 5 and 6. IMPORTANT: ^ DO NOT use a razorblade. ^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube. ^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube. CAUTION: It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions. Page 5420 Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb Page 9331 Page 10393 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12476 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 6560 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 10327 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12682 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 7332 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4572 Page 3456 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8633 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Part 1 Part 2 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored. 5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch STOP. Page 5284 Case 1 Page 7555 Components REMOVAL 1. Partially drain transfer fluid. 2. Remove front propeller shaft. Page 5330 Case 11 Page 4974 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1039 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10039 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3968 Page 5193 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 8337 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Classification: HA10-006 Reference: NTB10-043 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating normally: ^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation instructions. Page 10884 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 9839 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14294 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10322 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9941 Figure D-20 Figure D-21 - Refer to Figures D-18 through D-21 for clip locations. - Use the large 7 o'clock and 11 o'clock ribs for reference. - Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations for clips 3 and 4. 16. Install 2 tie-wraps on the fan motor cover. - Use 1 inch (28 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit. Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) Ignition Key In Signal: Testing and Inspection Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) (Step 1) Page 7631 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 10261 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12607 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1645 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1306 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 13807 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8730 22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below. 23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet. 24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor. Page 4088 ECM Inspection Table Part 4 Page 925 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11290 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1271 Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 4705 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 12483 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7161 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. Locations Page 12506 Audible Warning Device: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Basic Operation Procedure CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic Page 1728 Page 12185 ^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it. Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation 7. Reinstall the seat, making sure: ^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing. ^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.) 8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2). 9. Check the power seat controls, making sure: ^ They operate correctly. ^ The incident noise is fixed. 10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in step 2). 11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the Electronic Service Manual as needed. Disclaimer Page 3367 Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F) - Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. - Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 9026 Page 3530 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10260 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1066 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4989 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 11349 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1413 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 13053 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2680 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Drain and Refill Drain and Refill CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. ^ Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out. Bleed air. Page 8357 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 763 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12413 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12475 Page 7058 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 5. For 4WD model, perform the following: ^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. ^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. 6. Remove wheel sensor. ^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness. 7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8540 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 4972 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 2427 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 1211 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 267 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5126 Case 9 Page 3033 c. Remove the bolts and the RH bank timing chain tensioner (A). NOTE: If it is difficult to push plunger on RH bank timing chain tensioner (A), remove the plunger under extended condition. 8. Loosen camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft with timing chain disconnected. 9. Remove the RH front cover bolts (A) and LH front cover bolts (B). 10. Remove RH (A) camshaft bracket bolts and LH (C) camshaft bracket bolts in the reverse of order shown to remove camshaft brackets. Page 8298 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2451 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 11922 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 4039 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair REAR COMBINATION LAMP Removal and Installation Page 924 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4590 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Diagram Information and Instructions Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7127 COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal Page 10225 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 13922 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14082 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1188 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3528 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1988 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8147 Page 6422 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4895 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 620 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 14401 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11965 Sunroof Switch System Check Page 6294 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13467 Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 5) SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257F or B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting self-diagnosis. Page 11308 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2874 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 8573 Component Parts Location Page 12157 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10671 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5820 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 8408 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 10406 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5098 Case 12 Case 13 Page 13916 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12779 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10391 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12508 Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Strategies How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to "System Description". 3. Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-49, "Preliminary Check". See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If not, go to 3. 6. Inspection End. Page 5198 Case 4 Page 1131 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 5379 concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C (1,292 - 1,472 degrees F). HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 8509 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1813 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 10879 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 508 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 4326 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12515 Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "DATA MONITOR" screen. 4. If "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the item you desire to monitor. If "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all control items are monitored. 5. Touch "START". 6. During monitoring, touching "RECORD" can start recording the monitored item status. Display Item List - Data Monitor Display Item List Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. 4. During the operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation. Display Item List - Active Test Display Item List Page 7434 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13069 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3905 Page 3653 ^ Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors ^ Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. 7. Remove the front cross bar. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) following the steps below. a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove left exhaust manifold 9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) following the steps below. a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to AT-271, "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using power tool A/F. e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove right exhaust manifold. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. Page 5707 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Testing and Inspection Radiator: Testing and Inspection Checking Radiator Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ^ When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces. 3. Stop washing when dirt and debris no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. ^ Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 inch). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces until no water sprays out. Page 14086 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5146 Check Sheet Part 1 Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 5491 A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 6655 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Rear Sonar System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14207 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11053 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4890 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5187 Case 9 Page 8949 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 541 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 1803 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10998 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13344 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 11021 DVD Player: Service and Repair Removal and Installation DVD PLAYER Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove center console bin. 3. Remove the DVD player screws. 4. Remove DVD player. Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. Page 1077 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7479 Components REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device. Page 13336 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 11335 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2785 WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ^ While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ^ It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ^ Do not damage piston boot. ^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ^ While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ^ It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ^ Do not damage piston boot. ^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. Page 2294 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1504 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 1666 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 1011 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3290 NOTE: ^ Stop the plunger in the fully extended position by using the return-proof clip 1 if the stopper pin is removed. ^ Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using stopper pin 3. 11. Remove the timing chain tension guide and timing chain slack guide. 12. Remove the timing chain and crankshaft sprocket. 13. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove the camshaft sprocket. CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft when timing chain is disconnected. 14. Repeat the same procedure to remove the RH timing chain and associated parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. ^ In the same way as for the LH bank, inspect the timing chain and associated parts on the RH bank. INSTALLATION Page 7023 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8142 CAUTION: ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 2434 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 623 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 10345 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2856 Page 2374 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4217 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 13696 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6997 Column Shift Models Page 4356 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 3241 d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in): No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12 2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper). 3. Install the oil pan (lower). a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. - Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 ( - ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section. CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket. c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. Page 7591 c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Page 12961 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1677 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 6146 Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM) Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased. Testing and Inspection Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly Drink Holders: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly Classification: BT06-030 Reference: NTB07~O36 Date: May 21, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; CUP HOLDER LID WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE PROPERLY APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2007 Titan (A60) 2004-2007 Armada (TA6O) IF YOU CONFIRM: The front center console cup holder lid will not open or close properly. ACTIONS: 1. Reposition the lid spring. 2. Install spring retention nylon washer and spring retention screw. NOTE: Do not replace the Console Finisher. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Use appropriate covers to protect upholstery, carpet, etc. during this procedure. 1. Remove cup holder/console finisher. ^ Refer to section IP in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for Console Finisher removal. 2. Place the cup holder/finisher upside down on a clean surface. Page 2632 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 13082 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair SIDE WINDOW GLASS Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - KING CAB". 2. If the window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. 3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: - When the side window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. Installation - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. - Install removed parts. WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, Page 388 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 2212 Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1) Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812 Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Classification: EM-10-009 Reference: NTB10-094 Date: August 12, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure WARNING: Page 4091 ECM Inspection Table Part 7 Page 3591 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 800 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 8447 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11515 Component Parts Location Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Canister Purge Solenoid: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 12579 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11452 4. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon. 5. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped). 6. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward rear of vehicle to remove. 7. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), and the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts 7.5 N-m (0.77 kg-m, 00 in-lb) Page 7598 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4954 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 11808 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4041 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14058 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13040 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12933 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 3990 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2770 Page 6240 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8198 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console or center seat as required. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 1981 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 1050 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 13723 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8839 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 5510 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 1506 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3230 Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Upper Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown. M6 × 30 mm (1.18 inch) ............................................ ....................................................................................................................................... No. 15, 16 M8 × 25 mm (0.98 inch) ...................................................................................................................... ............................................. No. 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13 M8 × 45 mm (1.77 inch) ....................................... ............................................................................................................................ No. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14 M8 × 123 mm (4.84 inch) .................................................................................................................... ............................................................... No. 9, 12 Lower Page 8413 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4657 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 2595 12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips). 13. Unbolt alternator and set aside. 14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts). NOTE: ^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise. ^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the pulleys are equal. 15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts). ^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb) 16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal. Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11444 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6028 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3638 Thermostat: Service and Repair THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING REMOVAL Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat. Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2. Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe. Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Page 8284 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7017 Page 8831 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 62 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1442 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 12268 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4) Page 8978 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 4009 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5777 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 9536 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. Page 459 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9820 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6826 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 10910 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 13390 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 11404 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 8616 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 1311 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 9241 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Page 5542 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Service and Repair Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Page 1526 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4914 ECM Inspection Table Part 1 Page 13391 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3413 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant Type Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant. Page 5864 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9410 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul Disassembly and Assembly Components DISASSEMBLY Page 13706 - through BCM terminal 51 - to trailer turn relay RH terminal 1. Left turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - through trailer turn relay LH terminal 3 - to trailer connector terminal 1. Right turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - through trailer turn relay RH terminal 3 - to trailer connector terminal 4. TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION The trailer stop lamps are controlled by the electric brake. The electric brake receives stop lamp switch signal when the brake pedal is pressed. When the brake pedal is pressed, power is supplied - through electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 3 - to trailer connector terminal 3. TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION The trailer power supply is controlled by the trailer tow relay 2. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 16 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1. When energized, the trailer tow relay 2 supplies power - through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7 - to trailer connector terminal 5. Page 666 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 7065 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 12166 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 6686 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Removal and Installation A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation Page 673 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 5229 Case 1 Page 10572 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 7036 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 880 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 4173 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 14431 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10576 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6409 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1801 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 11733 Door Lock Actuator Check (Rear RH/LH) Page 9344 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Page 5476 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 12861 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2976 REMOVAL 1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. 4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B: ST36230000 (J-25840-A) 6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep]. CAUTION: ^ Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft. ^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft surface. Page 611 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 1420 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Cowl: Customer Interest Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing Classification: BT07-011 Reference: NTB07-034 Date: may 9, 2007 2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed. NOTE: If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see NTB05-112. ACTIONS 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. 3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak. 4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate warranty claims coding. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water leaks. ^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine wall. 2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak. ^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor. Page 9963 Repair Overview Disclaimer Recommendation If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen". Procedure A - Identify Fan Type Page 9745 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13794 Optional Splice Page 13728 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8928 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4506 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12414 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7171 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of front oil seal. Press front oil seal into gear carrier using suitable tool. 2. Install companion flange and a new drive pinion nut. Tighten drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange using Tool until there is no end play Tool number: KV38108300 3. Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) NOTE: ^ Drive pinion bearing preload should equal the measurement taken during removal plus an additional 0.56 Nm (0.06 Kg-m, 5 inch lbs.). ^ If drive pinion bearing preload is low, tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (0.69 Kg-m, 5 ft. lbs.) increments until drive pinion preload is met. CAUTION: Never loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion bearing preload. Do not exceed specified preload. If preload torque is exceed a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If maximum torque is reached prior to reaching the required preload, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace the collapsible spacer. Drive pinion nut: 298 - 678 Nm (31 - 69 Kg-m, 220 - 500 ft. lbs.) 4. Attach the RH and LH drive shafts. 5. Install the front propeller shaft. Side Oil Seals Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove front final drive. 2. Remove differential side shaft and side flange using suitable tool. Page 2942 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6550 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12041 - Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment NOTE: You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset. Disclaimer Page 4750 Page 6559 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13252 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 9872 Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 7 - 9) Page 7324 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10477 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 306 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13691 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 12852 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7316 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 1189 Page 1680 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 11001 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6404 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12079 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Page 4979 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 791 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13712 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Power Seat Drive Gear: Customer Interest Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation Classification: BT05-052a Reference: NTB05-105a Date: October 31, 2008 FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest (V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)* ^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat). ^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat). APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*) 7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209 D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before: 15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates IF YOU CONFIRM: The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason. NOTE: Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include: - The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward. - While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked (crooked) on the seat tracks. - Noise from the slide motor or gears. ACTION: Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat adjuster assembly. IMPORTANT: Page 8766 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3556 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 13015 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration Classification: FE07-004 Reference: NTB07-040 Date: June 6, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007 Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223 APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007 IF YOU CONFIRM When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced, ACTIONS 1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure). 2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump. NOTE: Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 14188 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 3459 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6862 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12020 19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8). 20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8). 21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of Figure 8). Figure 9 22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9). 23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the seat frame and move both seat tracks back into position on top of the seat track mounting tabs. Figure 10 CAUTION: Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is operated. Figure 11 Page 6039 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 9613 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 5 - 8) Page 6463 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 9038 Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors) 1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back). 2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts. NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side. OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2. Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored) Page 6659 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 12253 Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3) Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection Page 10395 Diagram Information and Instructions Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5685 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 1286 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 4) Page 4882 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10754 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. - Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. Page 5315 Case 15 Case 16 Page 13256 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8571 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 6548 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 3601 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2372 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 8528 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5224 Case 13 Case 14 Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 807 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 11485 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 5919 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1902 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Specifications Page 8880 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1070 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 806 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3620 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7302 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12035 - Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the underside of the seat. Figure 3 10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame. 11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure 3). - Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears". Figure 4 12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4). 13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4). Figure 5 14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5). 15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this bolt first" in Figure 5). Page 6968 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Removal and Installation A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation Page 10738 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Headlamp (For CANADA) - Daytime Light System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6151 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 13378 Optional Splice Page 12529 Optional Splice Page 5246 Check Sheet Part 2 Page 9114 e. Remove the front pillar finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. NOTE: With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts. f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body. Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 9386 ^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 376 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5294 Case 11 Page 10328 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11284 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 25 Page 7408 Optional Splice Page 1545 Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 1 - 4) Page 610 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 5454 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Page 1975 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 5823 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst Page 13547 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6244 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 6779 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 10562 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1706 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. Page 8138 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10358 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13479 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12953 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13963 Page 6540 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9082 Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors) 1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back). 2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts. NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side. OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2. Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored) Page 3144 12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips). 13. Unbolt alternator and set aside. 14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts). NOTE: ^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise. ^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the pulleys are equal. 15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts). ^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb) 16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal. Page 2205 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3833 Attachment General Procedure Page 7712 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13008 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11908 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1284 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 4) Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 7992 WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ^ While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ^ It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ^ Do not damage piston boot. ^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: ^ While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ^ It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ^ Do not damage piston boot. ^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. Headlamp (For USA) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3889 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 10243 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3007 2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 4. Remove the cover from the engine. Disclaimer Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Service OPERATING CHECK With engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when the vacuum pressure reaches the standard, make sure the clearance between brake pedal and floor panel decreases. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. AIRTIGHT CHECK ^ Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster. Depress brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Make sure distance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases. ^ Depress brake pedal while engine is running and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. Page 11208 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11172 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6734 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 9998 - Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations as needed. 17. Return to Procedure C (step 10) for fan assembly installation. Procedure E - Install Maxi Fuse (Install the Maxi Fuse only when a new fan is installed) Figure E-1 NOTE: Maxi Fuse is installed only when replacing the fan motor assembly with a new one. The battery should already be disconnected and the radio station presets should have been recorded before removing the fan motor at the beginning of procedure C. Figure E-2 1. Remove the IPDM E/R upper cover. - IPDM E/R = Intelligent Power Distribution Module, Engine Room. 2. Remove the relay and fuse cover. Page 12322 NOTE: The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak in a different location, and it may have more than one leak. 3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer: ^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent. ^ Follow product application instructions. 4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks. ^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking). ^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak. Disclaimer Page 7033 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14206 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 353 Component Parts Location Page 888 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Non-Trouble Code Procedures Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Non-Trouble Code Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 11312 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5800 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Rear Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded Classification: BT10-024 Reference: NTB10-095 Date: August 13, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2. ACTION Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure. NOTE: This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 1733 Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3390 ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. ^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures ^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. Page 10818 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7559 2. Apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the new dust cover. Position the new dust cover using the identification mark as shown. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse dust cover. ^ Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover. 3. Install new dust cover to rear case, using Tool. Tool number: KV40105310 ( - ) CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse dust cover. ^ Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover. 4. Install the rear propeller shaft. 5. Refill transfer fluid, check fluid level and for fluid leakage. Page 13601 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Page 3507 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1320 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 3) Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8212 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7926 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 1434 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 10500 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8718 13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then 14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape. ^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness. ^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap. ^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in position. ^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube. ^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left. 15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9. Page 7660 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 8842 Fuse: Testing and Inspection Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 13405 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 6934 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14185 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 1689 Page 1155 Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 8349 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 13224 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13573 Door Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H" and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds. 2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. ^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. ^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table. Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern 1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. Page 272 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 5301 Case 1 Page 4766 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 3872 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 8871 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11029 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5118 Case 1 Page 8438 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1944 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 8431 Page 4275 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7796 VERY IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector. ^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly. CAUTION ^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set. ^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector pin damage may result. ^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the ABS/VDC system can occur. 4. Continue with Section 2 Section 2 Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs. CAUTION: It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before performing the remaining sections of this procedure. 1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure 12). 3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)] 4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle systems: ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIRBAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 498 - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: - Ignition switch - Key switch (insert) - Hazard switch - Main door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab) - Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab) - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. - Remote keyless entry system. - Power window system. - Sunroof system. - Room lamp timer. - Warning chime system. - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. - Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. - NVIS (NATS) system. - Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. - Front wiper and washer system. Part 1 Page 10087 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 1069 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 12884 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 11295 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13212 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Page 659 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 2490 Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. - Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as necessary. Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Classification: BR10-005 Reference: NTB10-081 Date: June 25, 2010 2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body or brake pads, ACTION: Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service. NOTE: The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed brake pad removal procedures. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially drain the brake fluid. ^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual. 2. Remove the front wheels. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal. Page 9744 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 6462 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4641 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 8812 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5677 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8014 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. - Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. Page 1877 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10579 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Page 3101 6. Remove the PCV hose from the PCV control valves. ^ <-: Engine front 7. Loosen the bolts in reverse order shown using power tool for rocker cover (A) or (B). CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck. INSTALLATION 1. Apply liquid gasket to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps below. NOTE: Illustration shows an example of (LH) side (zoomed in shows No.1 camshaft bracket). a. Refer to illustration "a" to apply liquid gasket to the joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. b. Refer to illustration "b" to apply liquid gasket 90° to illustration "a". Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. 2. Install the rocker cover (A) or (B). ^ Make sure the new rocker cover gasket is installed in the groove of the rocker cover (A) or (B). ^ Tighten the bolts in two steps in the numerical order shown. 1st step: 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 18 inch lbs.) Page 9113 b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove. c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly. Use plastic trim tool as shown. d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers. Page 6788 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 6441 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2054 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 10353 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 289 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 5205 Case 11 Page 1947 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 360 Page 6308 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 7932 3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten the torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-24, "Components" CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. - Do not reuse caliper torque member bolts. 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, then tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to BR-24, "Components". CAUTION: - Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt. - Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers. 5. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 6. Attach tires to the vehicle. Disassembly and Assembly Page 12651 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 5432 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 9317 Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play "C": 0 mm (0 inch) Page 10598 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 468 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8495 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7605 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11532 b. Pull release handle on door (see Figure 15). NOTE: Upper door latch should close and open without binding or use of excessive force. 23. Reinstall door panel and seatbelt retractor cover. 24. Reinstall three door panel bolts, then reinstall armrest. CAUTION: Door panel bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to install. 25. Reinstall upper seat belt anchor bolt. Page 5180 Case 2 Page 13584 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 10661 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7885 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 4596 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3 Page 8312 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 4904 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 871 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2395 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1) Page 1648 Door Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 8088 3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released. IMPORTANT: Do not push the brake pedal until step 6. 4. Start the engine and let it idle. ^ Keep the transmission in Park. 5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor. 6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release. NOTE: 2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height". 7. Repeat step 6 ten times. ^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step. 8. Repeat steps 2 though 7. ^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Part 2 Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. This part of the procedure involves two general steps: ^ Setting up ^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card). SETTING UP: 1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II. Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1). CAUTION: Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card. Page 9612 Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 12161 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 9588 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3289 6. Remove the front cover. a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. 8. Remove the oil pump drive spacer. ^ Hold and remove the flat space of the oil pump drive spacer by pulling it forward. 9. Remove the oil pump. 10. Remove the chain tensioner on the LH bank using the following steps. NOTE: To remove the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The procedure for removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for the LH bank. a. Squeeze the return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. b. Secure the plunger using stopper pin. ^ Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and chain tensioner. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when (squeezing) return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. Page 2947 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Rotation NOTE: Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". See: Service Intervals 1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. Wheel nut: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.) CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. 2. Adjust the tire pressure to specification. 3. After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after every wheel and tire have been installed such as after repairing a flat tire. Page 11819 Page 10267 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1339 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 14408 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 7970 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions. 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside disk edge.] Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.07 mm (0.003 inch) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification before measuring runout. 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness: 14.0 mm (0.551 inch) Wear limit: 12.0 mm (0.472 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Page 9737 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5051 Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 5) Page 13163 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9063 ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the harness. 46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 47. Reset the radio station presets. 48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 49. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only) 51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side. Page 11653 7. Remove carpet. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11411 2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear. ^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud. 4. Remove the cover from the engine. Disclaimer Page 5022 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3 Page 6063 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Page 5681 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8835 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13970 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 13704 LT-T/TOW-04 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 2120 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 13501 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 49 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 7309 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9969 Testing Condenser Fan Motor CAUTION: Make sure there are no objects in the way of the fan blades. Keep all objects away from directly contacting the fan blades when the fan motor is running. 7. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to ON, observe the fan operation for 3 to 4 seconds and then turn the Fan Motor Tester OFF: - If the fan turned and operated freely; go to step 8. - If the fan did not operate freely; this indicates the fan motor is NG and must be replaced. No further testing is needed; go to Procedure C 8. Prepare the Fluke 73 and the Phototach Digital Tachometer for the next test as follows. a. Switch the Fluke 73 to read DC Volts. b. Remove the Phototach Digital Tachometer from its case and have it ready to check the fan RPM. Figure B-5, Figure B-6 NOTE: It is important that readings from these two meters be read and recorded at the same time in the next test. c. Practice using the Phototach Digital Tachometer as follows: 1. Do not turn the fan motor tester ON at this time. 2. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer. WARNING: Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes (including your own). 3. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan. 4. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade. Page 8635 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1363 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 1528 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 5899 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12808 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10403 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1629 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Page 183 a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20. You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back ON. Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen. b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21). ^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference. 7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF. 9. Continue with Section 5. Section 5 Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTC(s). 1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically. ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1524 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 1160 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4667 Page 13526 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13698 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 13927 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5) Page 8452 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8068 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Lines VACUUM LINES REMOVAL 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. 2. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose. 3. Remove check valve from brake booster. INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Insert vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 inch). ^ Do not use lubricating oil during assembly. Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) Page 6228 f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6). ^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit. ^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires). ^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing. ^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm. 4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. CAUTION: DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump. 5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Control Operation Control Assembly: Description and Operation Control Operation AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Description The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the position of the front air controls temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following two sensors: - Intake sensor - PBR (position balanced resistor). The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to control: - Outlet air volume - Air temperature - Air distribution Operation AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature changed based on the position of the temperature control dial. BLOWER SPEED CONTROL Blower speed is controlled based on front blower switch settings. When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned counterclockwise. INTAKE DOORS CONTROL The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (recirculation is not allowed in floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes) control dial setting. MODE DOOR CONTROL The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode control dial. DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL The defroster door is controlled by turning the defroster dial to front defroster. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL Page 5044 NOTE: In the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B), check marks are put to "CAN CIRC 3", "CAN CIRC 6", "CAN CIRC 8" and "CAN CIRC 9". But, in the column of the check sheet table indication in Display control unit Translation Sheet (C), "ECM" is listed only for "CAN CIRC 3". Therefore, put a check mark to "ECM" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table. 5. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed on the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen of "BCM", "HVAC", "ABS" and "IPDM E/R" as well as "ENGINE". And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table. Page 9747 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Battery Cable: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 3906 Page 8268 Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE: 1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II. ^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information. 2. Compare your printout to the chart. a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3. b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply. ^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information. 3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows: Page 14179 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 13445 Page 10281 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3058 CONNECTING ROD CONNECTING ROD Page 5264 Case 17 Case 18 Case 19 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Electrical Units Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 4080 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 8090 5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3). Page 5344 Front Aie Control Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 13589 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Door Switch Check (Step 1) Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 11270 Towing Information: Service and Repair TOW TRUCK TOWING WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. - Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 4WD MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission. Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) - Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. - Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems - Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. - Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. Page 144 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13124 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8294 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1390 Optional Splice Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation The optical sensor is located in the top center of the instrument panel. Page 8590 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Headlamp (For CANADA) - Daytime Light System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5333 Case 14 Page 4615 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 4538 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 2155 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2056 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 12642 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 7949 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 8745 g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts. h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector. 66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle. 67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following: ^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations. ^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque: IMPORTANT: Page 8589 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3907 Page 7172 3. Place a small hole in seal case, using suitable punch or drill. 4. Remove oil seal using Tool as shown. Tool number: - (SP8P) 5. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Cover Gasket Removal and Installation Page 7884 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 114 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8435 Optional Splice Page 3792 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 9090 c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. 6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit. Sub Woofer-under driver's seat a. Disconnect the electrical connector b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle. Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts. Page 11197 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 3927 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Diagram Information and Instructions Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1117 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 6657 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 5613 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 8947 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5842 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3719 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4889 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 9127 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5324 Case 5 Page 12532 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10396 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 2224 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7892 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10866 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 14145 Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above. Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to: ^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation ^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot holes) A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks. ^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an object striking the windshield. This is not covered under warranty. Page 792 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12602 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 573 Page 2394 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5) Page 5414 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7965 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 11687 REMOVAL CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance. 1. Remove body side trim. 2. Remove rear trim. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 3. Remove sun visor assemblies. 4. Remove sun visor holders. 5. Remove front roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses. 6. Remove rear roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses. 7. Remove center roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses. 8. Remove assist grips. 9. Remove striker covers (if equipped). 10. Remove room lamp. 11. Remove headlining. - Disconnect harnesses. 12. Remove rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped). - Disconnect harness. 13. Remove lamp assemblies from roof console. - Disconnect harnesses. 14. Remove rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove center roof console front bracket (if equipped). 16. Remove assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3609 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 2087 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1626 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. Page 6390 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1231 Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 176 ^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see Figure 10). c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8). ^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically. d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II. Procedure Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card CAUTION: ^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections. ^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5. Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s). Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input". Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming. Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTCs. Section 1 Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp "trickle charge"). IMPORTANT You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't. Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain: ^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II battery is low. ^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on during reprogramming. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure 11). Page 4927 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 2323 ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 1403 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2202 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3854 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 4637 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 11736 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 9057 25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor. 26. Take the harness loose from along the floor. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's located on the rocker panel (see figure above). 27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt. NOTE: For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the seat belt. Page 4769 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 694 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 3402 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT NOTE: ^ Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. ^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. ^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: ^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness. ^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Page 9185 Page 12063 Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 6644 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1193 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8696 57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console. 58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place. 59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening. CAUTION: Page 3630 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 7185 Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Components Components REMOVAL Differential Lock Position Switch Page 4117 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13118 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 14423 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1863 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 12954 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 4774 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 12140 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7372 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 14412 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 13204 Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7757 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing without tightening to specification. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. 10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact. 12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16. Refill rear final drive oil. Page 3702 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6864 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 11493 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 11032 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2463 Page 6926 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12177 SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure. Preliminary Steps NOTE: ^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags. ^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see Figure 1). 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with step 4 below. Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer 4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor. ^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information. 5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2). ^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat. 6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2. ^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position. Page 3683 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated/missing band clamp(s). ^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed. Page 3246 12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) INSTALLATION 1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. 2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed). - Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. 3. Install the front cover as follows: a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block. b. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Page 6904 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 10604 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: - Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics CAUTION: - The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function". Page 5111 Case 10 Page 413 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only) - Front wipers - Tail, parking, and license lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab) INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE - When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto Page 7515 Components Inspection FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer assembly or around it. Page 1749 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 6780 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 1014 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 9668 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2204 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 4695 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 2253 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 13045 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 13592 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 8874 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6450 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 13167 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 10904 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 5276 Case 10 Page 10993 Page 6735 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 13264 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 3568 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4567 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 4139 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 4385 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Service and Repair Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Release fuel pressure. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 4. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (right bank and left bank). CAUTION: ^ While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining. ^ Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose. 6. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly. Page 12791 Page 8215 Page 9072 ^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as shown. ^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have. ^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the harness. 68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first. 69. Reset the radio station presets. 70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST]. Final Quality Checks 71. Check the air bag light operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON. b. Observe the air bag warning light. c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out. 72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly. Page 3422 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11101 Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Page 3053 Image Symbols Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft using Tool. Tool number: EM03470000 (J-8037) Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed onto bottom dead center. Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install. Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. Install connecting rod cap. Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with those on the cylinder cap to install. Tighten connecting rod bolts using Tool. Page 4722 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2464 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 8744 e. Remove the front pillar finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. NOTE: With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts. f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body. Page 1307 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12007 Figure 12 24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat track (see Figures 11 and 12). Figure 13 25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13). Figure 14 26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85 in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm). 27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm). Page 14299 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1464 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10080 Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12247 Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 2491 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster CAMBER AND CASTER Components Page 3746 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1) Page 2335 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing without tightening to specification. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. 10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact. 12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16. Refill rear final drive oil. Page 9467 3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. 7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Horn Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4050 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 3684 Page 13826 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 3442 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7421 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Engine Control Component Parts Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 8515 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1479 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Tests ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 1942 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4897 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11135 2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove rear door speaker. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Tweeter FRONT TWEETER Removal 1. Remove front tweeter grille. 2. Remove front tweeter screws (A). 3. Disconnect connector and remove front tweeter. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door Tweeter REAR DOOR TWEETER Removal 1. Remove rear door finisher. 2. Remove rear door tweeter screws and remove rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect rear door tweeter connector. Installation Page 8033 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 9579 Page 7600 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13908 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1213 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 11324 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6510 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil. 3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds Page 2220 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10300 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10510 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Page 1299 19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb). 20. Re-connect the battery cables. 21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details. 22. Re-program the radio presets. 23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for details. Page 3745 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 12989 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12427 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12811 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check Page 9887 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 (0.012 - 0.024 in) 7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. 10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Page 7816 e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay". 8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8): a. Make sure: ^ CONSULT-II is OFF. ^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II. ^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II. ^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port. b. Turn CONSULT-II ON. c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN". NOTE: If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8. d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC. Page 8957 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 277 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12354 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14113 - If reusing the existing window assembly, clean the opening and assembly, then apply new butyl to the window assembly. - If installing a new window, clean the opening and remove the plastic liner from the butyl on the new window assembly. Rear window assembly nuts 3.0 N·m (0.31 Kg-m, 27 in-lb) 4. Connect the rear window defogger. 5. Lower the window and install the rear window glass bolts. Rear window glass bolts 6.0 N·m (0.61 Kg-m, 53 in-lb) 6. Install the sealing screen. 7. Install the headliner. SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following operations are performed the limit switch must be reset. - Motor operation when not installed in the vehicle. - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between butyl adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 12735 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1458 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5917 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13475 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6681 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 10205 1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2. ^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing. Page 8122 2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15). NOTE: ^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery. ^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.) 3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15). ^ A reading above 12 volts confirms; a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle, b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following may be the cause: a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it is not working). b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight). c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins). d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11). CAUTION: ^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts. ^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15). 4. Continue with Section 4. Section 4 Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming 1. Press [BACK] two times. Page 12535 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8221 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5211 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 7819 VERY IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector. ^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly. CAUTION ^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set. ^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector pin damage may result. ^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the ABS/VDC system can occur. 4. Continue with Section 2 Section 2 Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs. CAUTION: It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before performing the remaining sections of this procedure. 1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure 12). 3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)] 4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle systems: ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIRBAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) Page 5049 Inspection Between TCM And Differential Lock Control Unit (Step 4) Inspection Between TCM And Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit (Steps 1 - 2) Page 8510 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11247 Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (King Cab) Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 3443 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10600 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2806 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 9035 vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. TABLE OF CONTENTS REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS REPAIR OVERVIEW SERVICE PROCEDURE Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed. Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67 campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being serviced. Page 13277 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 11045 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 38 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512 Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Classification: BR06-007 Reference: NTB06-040 Date: May 12, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) equipped with VDC IF YOU CONFIRM A customer reports: ^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking. * This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated. ACTIONS ^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 12541 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10027 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 12047 - DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is needed. - This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. - The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Figure 1 NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1615 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9365 1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. ^ Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and bearing assembly for this procedure. 2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. ^ Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. 4. Support lower link using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint and discard the cotter pin. 6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. ^ Perform ball joint inspection. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components" for tightening torques. CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut. Page 609 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 12471 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9596 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10034 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 7327 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 11397 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List - Work Support Display Item List CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 13934 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1) Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change Engine Mount: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change Classification: EM09-008 Reference: NTB10-034 Date: March 1, 2010 2004-2009 ARMADA & TITAN; ENGINE MOUNTING BOLT SIZE CHANGE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) and Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If for any reason one of the Old P/N engines listed in the Parts Information table above needs to be ordered, note that Service Files have or will be created for these engines. Page 1163 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 6473 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5160 Case 13 A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 2700 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid Checking A/T Fluid 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any fluid leaks. 3. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt. 4. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30° to 50°C (86° to 122°F) using the "COLD" range on the ATF level gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the "P" position. c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the ATF level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. CAUTION: When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a cloth. e. Re-insert the ATF level gauge into the charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe as shown. CAUTION: To check fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position. f. Remove the ATF level gauge and note the fluid level. If the fluid level is at low side of range, add fluid to the transmission through the charging pipe. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with fluid. 5. Drive the vehicle to increase the ATF temperature to 80°C (176°F). Page 12432 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 12059 Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 3651 ^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration. Page 698 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Exhaust System Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION: ^ Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the engine stops. ^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge. REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. ^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using Tool. Tool number A: - (J-43897-18) B: - (J-43897-12) ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new one. ^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. ^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them. ^ Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises. Page 7111 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing without tightening to specification. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. 10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact. 12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16. Refill rear final drive oil. Page 10460 Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. If NG, replace intake sensor. Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 9750 Page 2077 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 15 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 780 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13646 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 9628 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 1 - 3) Page 4142 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 4056 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 3082 Available Piston Available Piston Piston Ring Piston Ring Piston Pin Piston Pin Page 358 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3986 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Fuse and Relay Box Page 14026 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 182 NOTE: This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes. CAUTION: You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data": ^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or ^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit. For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped with VDC are listed below. ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS 6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete: Page 8009 Image Symbols Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other Page 3549 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7771 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 12748 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Page 161 Page 675 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 12163 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12135 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 2486 Page 4943 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 9517 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6964 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Page 13899 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9824 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8456 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1796 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 8542 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13531 Page 7440 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 14148 ^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together. ^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. 3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue. Disclaimer Page 169 2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed on the cable). a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port". b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port. 4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows: (This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.) a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II. b. Touch [SUB MODE] c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2). 1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d. 2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d. d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2). 1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5. 2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5. IMPORTANT NOTE ^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5. ^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming". This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming. DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card) Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 79 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8050 Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove lower instrument panel. 2. On models with floor shift, remove center console. 3. Remove floor trim. 4. Remove adjusting nut. 5. Remove the lock plate from the front cable. 6. Remove front cable retaining bolts and nut. 7. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. 8. Disconnect right and left rear cables from equalizer. 9. Remove rear disc rotors. 10. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. 11. Remove right and left rear cables retaining bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. ^ Adjust parking brake. Page 5031 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Page 2593 Disclaimer Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and confirm: ^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt and ^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming. 4. Remove intake duct and engine cover. 5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6. 6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual for removal procedure. 7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist. 8. Remove front right wheel. 9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure. 10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts). 11. Check the pulley alignment as follows: Page 1783 Optional Splice Page 3823 Page 9043 ^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the tube. ^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6. 10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7). ^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7. 12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch). Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement Classification: BR10-005 Reference: NTB10-081 Date: June 25, 2010 2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body or brake pads, ACTION: Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service. NOTE: The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed brake pad removal procedures. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Partially drain the brake fluid. ^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual. 2. Remove the front wheels. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal. Page 9541 REMOVAL 1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. 4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B: ST36230000 (J-25840-A) 6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep]. CAUTION: ^ Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft. ^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft surface. Page 5257 Case 10 Page 6246 Page 13880 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Step 3) Page 8920 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results Display Item List Page 11579 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel: ^ pull handle cover ^ power window switch assembly (if equipped) Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal instructions. 2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel surface. 3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface. 4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse. 5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean. Page 12717 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10570 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12352 Page 1948 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4272 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 2068 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1412 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 1108 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Automatic Air Conditioner Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1282 Power Mirror Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 1) Page 3401 ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder. 12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. Page 10739 Page 9278 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 12522 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 11882 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 14069 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 9780 Blower Speed Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). Page 14085 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 1538 Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 7 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257B or B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis. COMPONENT INSPECTION Ambient Sensor Page 7319 Page 13482 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2839 Page 10388 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9170 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Calibration of Decel G Sensor Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor Calibration of Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 5902 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3319 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped. 3. Drain engine oil. WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 4. Remove the oil cooler. 5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator. 6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly. 7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool. 8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position aside. 9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. 10. Remove upper radiator hose. 11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator. 12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan. 13. Disconnect the following connectors. - Harness ground - Power steering switch - A/C compressor - Oil pressure switch 14. Remove generator and generator bracket. 15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside. 16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool. 17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only). 18. Remove the steering gear. 19. Remove the oil pressure switch. 20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool. Page 14159 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14296 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8015 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert piston into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body. Page 14242 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5395 Component Parts Location Page 2169 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 13911 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8805 Optional Splice Page 3740 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6301 Optional Splice Page 3311 EM-5 Page 6652 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 551 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10862 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 401 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1800 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3741 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5456 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic Page 9511 ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance) Page 5183 Case 5 Page 7240 REMOVAL 1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. 4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B: ST36230000 (J-25840-A) 6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep]. CAUTION: ^ Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft. ^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft surface. Page 13389 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11723 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 10359 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4499 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Tightening Torques & Sequences Intake Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences Intake Manifold ^ Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown. Exhaust System Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System EXHAUST SYSTEM CAUTION: ^ Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the engine stops. ^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge. REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. ^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using Tool. Tool number A: - (J-43897-18) B: - (J-43897-12) ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new one. ^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. ^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them. ^ Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises. Page 12100 a. Starting at the top of the seat back board pull the top down and away from the seat back. See Figure 2. b. Pull the middle part of the seat back board away from the seat back to disengage the middle 2 tabs. c. Pull bottom of the seat back board away from the seat back. NOTE: A trim tool can be used to assist in the removal of the 2 bottom clips. 8. Install the seat back board: a. Install 2 new clips at the bottom and push the seat back board in until it clicks into place. b. Locate the 2 tabs at the top and push in the seat back board until it is securely in place. c. Press in the seat back board at the 2 tabs located on the side until it clicks into place. Module B (for hard seat backs) 1 Move / adjust the right front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position. 2. Remove the right front hard seat back board as follows: NOTE: The seat back board is held on with: Page 10409 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10036 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 5328 Case 9 Page 12647 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 11832 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7879 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 12528 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 475 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11047 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12417 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4062 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 136 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5263 Case 16 Page 6207 Page 9807 Optional Splice Page 7270 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to "Snap Ring". See: Specifications/Snap Ring NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the propeller shaft joint flex effort specification. Propeller shaft joint flex effort: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) or less Page 4359 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 11836 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 1245 Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 12240 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8881 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 3473 Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 8914 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 11035 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7933 Image Symbols Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 6945 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 731 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1068 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8499 Page 9673 Components Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts. Page 14023 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1114 Page 6785 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 9150 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 10041 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10329 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 118 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10503 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 12765 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 2242 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5859 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3024 ^ Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque. ^ Measure the inner diameter of the camshaft bracket. Standard: 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 1.0244 inch) Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (camshaft journal diameter) Standard: 0.030 - 0.068 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 inch) ^ If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly. Camshaft End Play ^ Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) ^ If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again. ^ If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head. ^ Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008 - 1.2027 inch) - Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal Standard: 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953 - 1.1963 inch) ^ If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head. Camshaft Sprocket Runout Page 13981 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 8670 In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG) 3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening. ^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the corrugated tube - Update Kit. ^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness. Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube) 1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1). 2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1). 3. Cut both clips off of the harness. NOTE: These clips will not be reused. 4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1). IMPORTANT: Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door grommet. Page 10853 Page 5114 Case 13 Case 14 Page 13635 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8570 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4776 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 9164 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 4464 Body Control Module: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11745 Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 13075 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8788 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 3219 EM-1 Page 7268 ^ While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play: 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) or less ^ Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Model 2F1310 DISASSEMBLY Journal Page 394 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4223 concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C (1,292 - 1,472 degrees F). HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 3713 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 9758 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3590 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3738 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1619 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8615 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 14089 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5) Page 13571 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 837 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 10088 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 9543 4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. ^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch). ^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and seat. CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct direction. 5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. ^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point. 6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. 10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor. Axle Bearing Removal and Installation The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 4222 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst Page 355 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13650 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12257 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 12507 4. Touch "BUZZER" or "BCM". 5. Select "DATA MONITOR", "ACTIVE TEST" or "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results Display Item List NOTE: If "CAN communication [U1000]" is displayed, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System". Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 1198 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 11556 NOTE: Use the lower locating hole (see Figure 12). 17. Reinstall upper door latch grey cable clip into door (See Figure 12. 18. Reinstall handle release cable into upper door latch white cable clip. Page 11065 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 232 Traction Control Module: Description and Operation TCS CONTROL UNIT Description The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Calibration of Decel G Sensor Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor Calibration of Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 2217 Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6731 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 934 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 12022 Figure 15 28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure the distance has not changed (see Figure 15). - If N/G, adjust. Figure 16 29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16). - Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm) Figure 17 30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17). Page 12983 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8608 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6999 Shift Cable: Adjustments Adjustment of A/T Position 1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in "P" position. 3. After pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 Nm (1 kg-m, 2.2 ft. lbs.), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut: 14.5 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Page 11039 Page 5703 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13409 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13468 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3094 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT NOTE: ^ Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter. ^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. 1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. ^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: ^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness. ^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Shackle: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises Classification: RA09-006 Reference: NTB10-011 Date: January 20, 2010 TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60) APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522 APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009 IF YOU CONFIRM: A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs. ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings. ^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this bulletin. ^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin. ^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will resolve the incident, if it should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. PARTS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 4045 Page 364 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9838 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 5339 Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 5201 Case 7 Page 6654 Page 4804 Page 10350 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10885 Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (King Cab) Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1) Page 6314 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 13865 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 7812 5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3). Specifications Page 5103 Case 2 Page 6782 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9842 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11372 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4357 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 3206 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection Inspection OIL LEVEL ^ Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. ^ Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. ^ If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. OIL APPEARANCE ^ Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination. ^ If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair the broken parts. Page 6227 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 3598 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5961 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 6077 Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in) - Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-562, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2138 CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Page 311 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 747 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 3064 ^ Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing cap, and tighten the main bearing bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed. ^ Remove bearing cap and bearings. Measure plastigage width using the scale on the plastigage bag. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that described in "Method of Measurement". CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ^ When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Standard: There must be crush height ^ If standard is not met, replace main bearings. MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT DIAMETER ^ Check for bolts (M9 and M12) installed from lower side using the following procedure. NOTE: ^ Side bolt (M10) is outside the target. ^ Figure shows M12 bolt. ^ Measure bolt diameter "d1" from tip of the bolt to dimension "a". ^ Measure bolt diameter "d2" from the dimension between tip of the bolt and dimension "b" as base station to dimension "c". NOTE: If a narrower part in the threads is determined by visual check, measure "d2" at that point. ^ Calculate the difference between "d1" and "d2". M9 bolt Dimension "a": 9 mm (0.35 inch) Dimension "b": 15 mm (0.59 inch) Dimension "c": 20 mm (0.79 inch) Limit: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch) M12 bolt Dimension "a": 12 mm (0.47 inch) Dimension "b": 55 mm (2.17 inch) Dimension "c": 20 mm (0.79 inch) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^ Replace applicable bolts if outside the limit. Page 3809 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 476 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity ................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 L (2 1/8 qt., 1 3/4 Imp qt.) Page 13210 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 1152 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 12925 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4814 Page 432 Page 1936 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4751 Page 13001 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6542 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 2366 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8985 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 882 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4075 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1515 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2559 Available Valve Lifter Page 8888 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Locations Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 11145 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9735 8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6. ^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900 Page 14232 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 497 Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status - When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. Page 10592 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 8007 Image Symbols Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle. 3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body. NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and caliper from torque member. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts if removed and tighten to specified torque. Refer to BR-24, "Components". Page 4595 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1392 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1013 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11325 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12979 Optional Splice Page 3538 9. Remove A/T oil cooler bolts and oil cooler from radiator and position aside. 10. Lift up and remove the radiator. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant. ^ Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant and A/T fluid. Page 7821 2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15). NOTE: ^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery. ^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.) 3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15). ^ A reading above 12 volts confirms; a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle, b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following may be the cause: a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it is not working). b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight). c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins). d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11). CAUTION: ^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts. ^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15). 4. Continue with Section 4. Section 4 Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming 1. Press [BACK] two times. Page 1898 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Page 3326 8. Remove access cover 9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft. Tool number: ( - ) J47245 a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool. - Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in). 10. Remove the front cover. a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. Page 5318 Check Sheet Part 2 Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 1726 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 7490 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Clean off the bolt area(s) where oil has leaked out. 2. Torque all three bearing retainer bolts (see picture below): ^ 19.6 - 23.5 Nm (1.2 - 2.4 Kg-m, 14.5 - 17.3 ft-lb). ^ If any of the bolts are missing, replace the transfer case assembly. CAUTION: Do NOT remove any of the bolts. Bearing damage may occur. 3. Add Nissan Matic "D" ATF to the transfer case as needed. Page 5574 7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs. Disclaimer Page 11919 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10045 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14389 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1139 Optional Splice Page 1089 Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 13979 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 4530 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST. Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If Page 12212 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3) Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 4) Page 3930 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 12880 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 4712 a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits). NOTE: This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different. b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check. C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet(s). d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the connections. ^ Both sides of the eyelet ^ Eyelet mounting surface NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Nut/bolt threads. Page 5136 Case 5 Page 8877 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 3536 Radiator: Service and Repair RADIATOR Image Symbols WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Page 5062 Case 2 Page 14450 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7567 Components REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device. Page 12513 Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 5060 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 7954 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear On-vehicle Inspection PAD WEAR INSPECTION - Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard thickness: 12.13 mm (0.478 inch) Repair limit thickness: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1272 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock System Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 11717 Page 4512 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2) Page 3725 Page 12436 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 10361 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7518 Components Replacement DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and gasket. Drain the fluid. Page 5479 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 12055 - Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment NOTE: You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset. Disclaimer Page 14267 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 9853 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection In-vehicle Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor is located on cluster lid D. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Page 13936 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 8445 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8410 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS", or see "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 11230 Navigation Module: Service and Repair NAVI CONTROL UNIT Removal CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat. 3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5. Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove NAVI control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7110 2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. 4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 10802 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 12225 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 4) Page 13925 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5) Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location VDC/TCS/ABS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 6989 Shifter A/T: Testing and Inspection Checking of A/T Position NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers. 1. Place selector lever in "P" position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure selector lever can be shifted to other than "P" position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make sure selector lever can be shifted from "P" position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the transmission body 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the figure. 6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the "R" position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against "R" position in the "P" or "N" position. 7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. 8. Make sure transmission is locked completely in "P" position. Page 6124 Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent). ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for connecting the fuel pressure gauge. 2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test". ^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure. ^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test. ^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test. > If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and repair information. > If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3. 3. Replace the fuel pump. ^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the appropriate Service Manual. ^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal. 4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed. Page 8342 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 6854 Optional Splice Page 1797 Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8527 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4698 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: - Power windows - Power door locks - Remote keyless entry system - Power sunroof - Rear window wiper Page 10392 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12132 Optional Splice Page 2172 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10331 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 886 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 6492 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6539 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1929 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 6005 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Page 4976 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 5664 Page 139 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10859 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2826 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 10515 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 9639 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 24 - 25) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Page 5438 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 11357 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3613 Temperature Gauge: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 303 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1742 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12086 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3) Page 9039 1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light: ^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3. ^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2). ^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the warning light before proceeding. 2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge) 1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area. 2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube: ^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits. Page 4984 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5583 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 5212 Case 1 Page 12854 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7840 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Page 3453 Page 4205 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3324 Page 4508 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications CRANKSHAFT END PLAY ^ Move the crankshaft fully forward and backward and measure the clearance between the thrust bearings and crankshaft arm using suitable tool. Standard: 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 inch) Limit: 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch) ^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the thrust bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the repair limit, replace crankshaft also. CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER ^ Measure diameter of crankshaft journals. Standard: 63.940 - 63.964 mm (2.5173 - 2.5183 inch) ^ If measurement is out of standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use the undersize bearing. CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER ^ Measure diameter of crankshaft pin using suitable tool. Standard: 53.956 - 53.974 mm (2.1243 2.1250 inch) ^ If measurement is out of standard, measure connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing. OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT ^ Measure dimensions at four different points as shown on each journal and pin. ^ Out-of-roundness is indicated by the difference in dimension between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B". ^ Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between "A" and "B" at "X" and "Y". Limit Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch) Taper (Difference between "A" and "B"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch) ^ If measured value exceeds the standard, correct or replace crankshaft. ^ If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected journal or pin. Then select the main bearing or connecting rod bearing. CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT Page 12857 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5273 Case 7 Page 5595 Page 2288 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13532 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8621 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 18 Page 6307 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4040 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1880 Door Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9178 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5158 Case 11 Page 2130 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2071 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 10021 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9581 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 9657 Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 6 - 9) Page 5845 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 3965 Page 14260 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 13897 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 14080 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10865 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7041 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 8688 28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover. 30. Remove the D-ring bolt. Page 2011 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 11175 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1784 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3006 NOTE: See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover: CAUTION: ^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover. ^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover. Page 3937 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 5857 Page 14479 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5862 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 622 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 4290 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3976 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 14480 Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11604 Hood Latch: Adjustments HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the front grille. 2. Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock center (when viewed from vehicle front). 3. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N, 7lb). CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or higher. 4. After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified torque. 5. Install the front grille. Page 1441 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14095 Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 12812 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 1510 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10310 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9092 c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts. ^ Left side is shown, right side not shown b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle. 8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console: a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly. b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then c. Remove the glove box assembly. Page 1662 Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 14403 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7612 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 6558 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 369 Optional Splice Page 1928 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1202 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 577 Attachment General Procedure Page 4694 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 6761 Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 3388 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 6455 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 9295 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9936 Figure D-11 9. Press and smooth all parts of protector 3. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan motor. - Pay special attention to the area shown in Figure D-11. Make sure there is good adhesion in this area. NOTE: The large support ribs on the fan shroud are labeled 1 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, and 11 o'clock for reference when installing parts on to the fan shroud. 10. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the fan shroud between the 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock ribs (see Figure D-12). - Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag. 11. Install Protector 4 on the fan shroud. a. Remove 1 of the 4 sections from protector 4 adhesive backing. b. Stick the 1st section next to the 5 o'clock support rib. Page 197 e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay". 8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8): a. Make sure: ^ CONSULT-II is OFF. ^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II. ^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II. ^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port. b. Turn CONSULT-II ON. c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN". NOTE: If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8. d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC. Page 12999 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8305 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7210 Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using ONLY ONE of the operations shown. Disclaimer Page 13070 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 13973 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3935 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 11160 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 217 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8972 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11807 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10257 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13550 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 10712 2. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly. - On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor. 3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector. Installation - Crew Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first. - Make sure seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation. Page 929 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8368 Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation PNP SWITCH Component Description When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP switch signal to the ECM via combination meter. Page 399 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512 Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179 Classification: BR06-007 Reference: NTB06-040 Date: May 12, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) equipped with VDC IF YOU CONFIRM A customer reports: ^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or ^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking. * This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated. ACTIONS ^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown. Page 14452 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 14376 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8524 Page 11834 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6747 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY) 1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks. 2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket. Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit. Page 2162 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8969 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4161 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 10872 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 13275 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 2305 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 719 Page 10370 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 8389 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6429 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10642 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 1814 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 2055 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13528 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3093 ^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. 11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder. 12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary. Page 4706 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 9179 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 3368 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 9565 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14208 Page 2223 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 2070 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 11161 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13593 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 2078 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6963 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 4969 Optional Splice Page 10476 Optional Splice Page 13735 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5093 Case 7 Page 4792 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 481 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1446 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8892 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13036 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8332 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1907 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3) Service and Repair Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair Foam Repair During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. FILL PROCEDURES 1. Fill procedures after installation of service part. - Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Install service part. - Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. 2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. - Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. - Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. Page 8470 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information Technical Service Bulletin # 09-025 Date: 090325 Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information Classification: BT09-007 Reference: NTB09-025 Date: March 25, 2009 FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The front seat belt buckle needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Route the replacement buckle harness as shown in the SERVICE PROCEDURE below. NOTE: The routing of the replacement buckle wiring harness is different than the original. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Service Procedure FRONT LH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). ^ Wait at least 3 minutes after battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any SRS components. 3. Remove LH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM for removal procedure. Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking Classification: RA09-005 Reference: NTB10-032 Date: February 26, 2010 2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3849 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 4260 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 4052 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 6965 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Fitting Inspection Page 3579 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 7659 9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. Page 10695 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 11195 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10121 1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2. ^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing. Page 7125 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking) Checking Final Drive Oil Checking Final Drive Oil COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. Page 14377 Optional Splice Body - Windshield Cracking Information Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information Classification: BT09-052 Reference: NTB09-091 Date: August 25, 2009 WINDSHIELD CRACKING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America (NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles. Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas: 1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass. 2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface. 3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues. CLAIMS INFORMATION Part Return Process Reminder Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to highlight the area damaged. 1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass. Cracks from objects striking the glass Page 3063 Main bearing cap bolts in order of 1 to 10 ........................................................................................... ........................................................................ 40° Main bearing cap sub bolts in order of 11 to 20 .......................................................................................................................................................... 30° Side bolts in order of 21 to 30 .............................................................................................................................................. 49 Nm (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft. lbs.) Rotate crankshaft by hand after bolts are tightened. Check if it rotates smoothly. MAIN BEARING HOUSING INSIDE DIAMETER ^ Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. ^ Measure inside diameter of main bearing housing. Standard: 68.944 - 68.968 mm (2.7143 2.7153 inch) ^ If out of the standard, replace cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly. NOTE: These components must be replaced as a single unit, because they were processed together. MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE Method of Measurement ^ Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing cap. Measure the main bearing inside diameter with the bearing cap bolts tightened to the specified torque. (Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of main bearing) - (Crankshaft journal diameter) Standard: No. 1 and 5 journals: 0.001 - 0.011 mm (0.00004 - 0.0004 inch) No. 2, 3 and 4 journals: 0.007 - 0.017 mm (0.0003 0.0007 inch) Limit: No.1 and 5 journals: 0.021 mm (0.0008 inch) No. 2, 3 and 4 journals: 0.027 mm (0.0011 inch) ^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing inside diameter and crankshaft journal diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Method of Using Plastigage ^ Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and surfaces of each bearing completely. ^ Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Page 6054 NOTE: ^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis. ^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB. Disclaimer Page 391 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6755 3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown. Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY) 1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown. Page 11531 19. Connect latch switch connector (see Figure 13). 20. Reinstall latch switch connector onto door. 21. Reinstall gray anti-rattle foam. 22. Test upper door latch operation: a. Use your thumb to push upper door latch into the closed position (see Figure 14). Page 7603 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 13823 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking) Checking Final Drive Oil Checking Final Drive Oil COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. Page 11804 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Timing Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service Classification: EM10-011 Reference: NTB10-099 Date: August 19, 2010 ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been updated to no longer require engine removal and installation. Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Page 9009 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 8126 a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20. You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back ON. Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen. b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21). ^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference. 7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF. 9. Continue with Section 5. Section 5 Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly stored DTC(s). 1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). ^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically. ^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF. Page 6350 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type) NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Page 11297 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 918 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1708 c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip. d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab. e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump. ^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector. f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing. CAUTION: DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 639 Page 13147 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1669 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1) Page 9929 Figure C-22 b. Install 3 screws at the front of the fender protector. - Driver side only. Figure C-23, Figure C-24 c. Install and Torque 2 bolts at each of the 3 bumper brackets as shown (see Figures C-23 and C-24). Page 14178 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8041 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly With ABS DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly CAUTION: ^ Master cylinder cannot be disassembled. ^ Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder sub-assembly body. Assembly CAUTION: ^ Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. ^ Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet. 2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly. With ABLS or VDC DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly CAUTION: ^ Master cylinder cannot be disassembled. ^ Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary. 1. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder subassembly body. 2. Remove master cylinder front and rear pressure sensors. Assembly CAUTION: ^ Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. ^ Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet. 2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly. 3. Install master cylinder front and rear pressure sensors. Page 7432 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... .......................... 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt) Page 4427 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402) 6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. ^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. - If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. 7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Page 11427 5. Remove clips from license lamps and remove lamps. 6. Release clips and remove upper step pads. 7. Remove rear chrome bumper. 8. Disconnect harness clips from black steel bumper. 9. Remove rear bumper reinforcement. 10. Remove sonar sensor retainers from rear chrome bumper, if equipped. 11. Remove sonar sensors and harness from rear chrome bumper, if equipped. - Disconnect sonar sensors from harness. 12. Remove license lamp harness from rear chrome bumper. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Apply sealant to clips securing upper step pad during installation. Page 2303 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2382 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 630 Page 12656 Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 5512 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1993 Engine Control Component Parts Location Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 09-063 Date: 090727 Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis Classification: EL09-019 Reference: NTB09-063 Date: July 27, 2009 BLUETOOTH(R) PHONE SYSTEM; INITIAL DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with factory equipped Bluetooth(R) phone system SERVICE INFORMATION If a vehicle comes to the dealer with a Bluetooth(R) phone system related concern, use this bulletin for initial diagnosis. ^ This bulletin will help reduce unnecessary diagnosis and parts replacement. Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section below, and QUICK REFERENCE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. Make sure the customer's Bluetooth(R) related concern is understood. a. Customer comment(s) _______________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 2. Verify the customer's concern(s). NOTE: The customer's phone may be required, depending upon their concern(s). 3. Write down the customer's cell phone brand, model number, and service provider. Brand (Motorola, Blackberry, etc.) _________________________________ Model (Razr, Pearl, etc.) _________________________________ Model Number (V3m, 8120, etc.) _________________________________ Service Provider (Verizon, Sprint, etc.) _________________________________ ^ It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers. 4. Go to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/. a. Using the website's search engine, find out if the customer's phone is on the approved list. b. Put the correct application in "Vehicle", "Year", "Equipped With" (as applicable), "Phone Manufacturer", and then click on "Search". c. If the phone is NOT on the approved list: ^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE. ^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident. ^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident. ^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident. ^ The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth(R) phone that is on the approved list before any further action. d. IF the customer's phone is on the approved list, click on the picture of the phone. Page 8912 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12235 9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for reassembly. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation The optical sensor is located in the top center of the instrument panel. Page 13112 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 11762 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4) Page 3153 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 4448 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 11749 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 3) Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4) Page 1856 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 177 VERY IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector. ^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly. CAUTION ^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set. ^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector pin damage may result. ^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the ABS/VDC system can occur. 4. Continue with Section 2 Section 2 Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs. CAUTION: It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before performing the remaining sections of this procedure. 1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II. 2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure 12). 3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)] 4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle systems: ^ ENGINE ^ A/T ^ ABS ^ AIRBAG ^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable) ^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan) ^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable) Page 1891 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3) Page 1735 Page 3913 Attachment General Procedure Page 12733 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 12947 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 14061 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 13232 1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. 4. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear combination lamp mounting bolts : 14.2 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 126 in-lb) Page 3831 Page 14019 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8987 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 5190 Case 12 Page 5047 2. For the selected possible causes, it is expected that malfunctions have been found in the past. With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 2046 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 13848 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13372 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 12088 Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 5852 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119 Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement Classification: EL07-038B Reference: NTB08-039B Date: January 19, 2010 2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only IF YOU CONFIRM The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch. WARNING: ^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip of the seat bottom cover. ^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS performance. ^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure Page 12958 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 6276 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid Changing A/T Fluid 1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt. 4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill with the same volume as the drained fluid and use the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^ To flush out the old fluid from the coolers, pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. ^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new fluid, flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity For Transmission fluid type and capacity, See: Specifications CAUTION: ^ Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. ^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. ^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust manifold. ^ Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. Drain plug: Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 5. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 6. Check the fluid level and condition. If the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. 7. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 8. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components Page 14042 Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 3265 ^ Clean all gasket mating surfaces, do not reuse gaskets. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown. ^ Install the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve connector with it facing front of engine. ^ Tighten the electronic throttle control actuator bolts of the electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps. ^ After installation perform procedure in EM-20, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION". ^ Install the water hose so that its overlap width for connection is between 27 mm (1.06 inch) and 32 mm (1.26 inch) (target: 27 mm 1.06 inch). Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube Install quick connector as follows (the steps are the same for quick connectors on both engine side and vehicle side except for the quick connector cap). 1. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around tube and quick connector, and they are not damaged. 2. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube from tip end to the spool end. 3. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ^ Insert until the paint mark for engagement identification (white) goes completely inside quick connector so that you cannot see it from the straight side of the connected part. Use a mirror to check this where it is not possible to view directly from the straight side, such as quick connector on vehicle side. ^ Insert fuel tube into quick connector until top spool is completely inside quick connector, and 2nd level spool exposes right below quick connector on engine side. CAUTION: ^ Hold "A" position in illustration when inserting fuel tube into quick connector. ^ Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to O-ring inside quick connector. ^ Insert until you hear a "click" sound and actually feel the engagement. ^ To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step. 4. Pull quick connector by hand holding "A" position. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube. Page 921 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13557 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11157 Alarm Horn Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1718 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 8611 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1591 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6405 Page 1421 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 4676 Page 9748 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 9878 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Magnet Clutch Circuit SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor. Page 5898 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 9609 Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: - Front air control. - Air mix door motors (Driver, Passenger, and rear) - PBR (built-into air mix door motors) - In-vehicle sensor - Ambient sensor - Optical sensor - Intake sensor Page 9163 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 4529 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 10655 Page 1037 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 992 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 2816 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 2436 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 3320 b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper). Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper). 21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps. a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. Page 12 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 10719 4. Remove one screw and seat cushion outer finisher. 5. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle. 6. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan to remove buckle assy. from seat. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Operation CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Schematic Crew Cab Headliner: Service and Repair Crew Cab HEADLINING Removal and Installation Page 11748 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 13910 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3328 c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. Then install the front cover. d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All except the above e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. 4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows: - Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown. D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C) that cannot be seen after attaching the cover. b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown. - A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) Page 3639 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove the water cut valve. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. ^ The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the thread. ^ Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. ^ After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Installation of Thermostat ^ Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber ring as shown. ^ Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings, then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation holes. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of the engine coolant. ^ Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13998 Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4) Page 6829 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3), and then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. Page 4841 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 9167 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 5289 Case 6 Page 11835 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12237 12. Remove and replace the switch. 13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan. 14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto the seat frame. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9. ^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9. WARNING: Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance. 15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs. 16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8 Kg-m, 20 ft-lb). 17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan. 18. Re-attach the lower flap cover. Page 11924 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3922 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 10711 Installation - King Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Crew Cab SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt Removal - Crew Cab 1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". Page 1941 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 8345 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3036 - Position No. 1 camshaft bracket close to the mounting position, and then install it to prevent from touching liquid gasket applied to each surface. - Temporarily tighten the front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown. 4. Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows: Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12): 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8): 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3 (all bolts): 5.9 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4 (all bolts): 10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.) CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket from the parts listed below. ^ Mating surface of rocker cover ^ Mating surface of front cover Page 6519 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8587 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14098 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1) Page 6334 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Locations Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Page 6567 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1833 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 5497 Page 507 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 1391 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7373 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 1019 Page 3526 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10660 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11422 Front Bumper: Service and Repair Plastic Bumper PLASTIC BUMPER Removal 1. Remove radiator grille. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove skid plate or front under cover 3. Remove fog lamp, if equipped. 4. Remove screws and fasteners and remove plastic fascia assembly. - Remove fog lamp assembly, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly. - Remove fog lamp opening finisher, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly. Page 12797 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 6861 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 6670 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 12567 Inspection/Compass And Thermometer INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER Calibration Procedure for Compass The difference between magnetic North and geographical North can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. In order for the compass to operate accurately in a particular zone, it must be calibrated using the given procedure. CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS The direction display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the direction is not shown correctly, carry out initial correction. INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS 1. Pushing the mode switch for about 10 seconds will enter the initial correction mode. The compass display will begin to flash. 2. Turn the vehicle slowly in an open, safe place. The initial correction is completed in approximately one and a half turns. NOTE: In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed, the initial correction may start automatically. Page 13009 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Specifications Valve Dimensions Page 6398 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7811 2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II. 3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed on the cable). a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port". b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port. 4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows: (This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.) a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II. b. Touch [SUB MODE] c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2). 1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d. 2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d. d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2). 1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5. 2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5. IMPORTANT NOTE ^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5. ^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming". This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming. DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card) Page 13909 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 11959 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 3) Page 2206 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 11423 5. Remove clips and energy absorber from retainer bracket. 6. Remove retainer bracket. 7. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11367 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 7506 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine. Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD" position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6. Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2424 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 11914 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13030 Page 2137 Optional Splice Page 700 Page 12266 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4) Page 324 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Manual Air Conditioner COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor (front), mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature control dial are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air conditioner system. Page 8554 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Page 10430 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection In-vehicle Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle Sensor The in-vehicle sensor is located on cluster lid D. It converts variations in temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into the front air control. Page 6601 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. Page 8189 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor bolt. 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification. CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^ Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number: ST30031000 ( - ) Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. Page 3751 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 11608 4. Install the cable securely to the lock. 5. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood opener operation. Page 7946 Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 10419 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Locations A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 7580 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5735 ECM Inspection Table Part 2 Page 9985 Torque for bolts on brackets 1, 2, & 3: 9.6 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 85 in-lb) Figure C-25 d. Install and torque 2 bolts for the front bumper side bracket. - Driver side only. Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb) 15. Install the grill. Figure C-26 IMPORTANT: Make sure all 7 clips are properly located in the grill before installing. If you have installed a new fan, skip steps 16 - 19 and go to Procedure E. 16. Reconnect the Negative battery cable. 17. Reset the radio station presets. 18. Reset the clock. 19. Go to Procedure F. Procedure D - Install Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness (Only for Type 2-90 Wat-Fan Motors That Tested OK) Page 4558 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6938 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 11091 Component Parts Location Page 1161 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 3575 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3310 EM-4 Page 7067 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 227 Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1204 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 5418 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7517 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Replacement TRANSFER FLUID Components Page 2143 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11742 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3851 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 13669 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 11285 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 6529 4. Remove bolts and detach control device. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply petroleum jelly. 2. Install transfer control device. a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod. b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. Page 7937 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Do not damage piston boot. - Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. REMOVAL 1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. NOTE: Do not disconnect brake hose unless removing the cylinder body. 3. Remove bolts (2) as shown, and cylinder body (3). - (1): Brake hose NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to BR-30, "Components". CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body with new copper washer and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-30, "Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 5. Install tires to the vehicle. Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. Page 1133 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8732 28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover. 30. Remove the D-ring bolt. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10280 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8218 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7501 Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 9736 Blower Motor: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 6324 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 7754 CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. ^ Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts. 5. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. 6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). 7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ^ Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. ^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 8. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 4242 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9058 28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover. 30. Remove the D-ring bolt. Page 6484 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 5720 ECM Inspection Table Part 5 Page 12307 Disclaimer Service Procedure 1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed. Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place. 2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate. ^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward. NOTE: When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides. CAUTION: The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with the lids snapped closed. 3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops. ^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench. Page 11038 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3481 Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 8 - 9) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE Page 5321 Case 2 Page 13458 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 8124 4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18). NOTE: If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *. * This is found in ASIST under: CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info. CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING: ^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur. ^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming. ^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during reprogramming. * You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1. 5. Press [START]. See Figure 18. ^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear. ^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF. ^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started. Page 9047 b. Disconnect the electrical connectors. c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle. 7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup holder: a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat. a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts. b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. Page 411 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results Display Item List Page 11187 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 2383 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9789 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner Front Blower Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts - Front air control - Front blower switch Page 3525 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 8656 Page 290 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 542 ^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap). e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet. 4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under the dash): a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly (cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3). b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads. C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners. 5. Clean the negative battery cable connections. a. Write down all the radio presets. b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection. c. Clean the following items: ^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides) ^ Body connection bolt (head and threads) ^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap) NOTE: Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so may cause corrosion/rust. ^ Battery negative post ^ Negative cable battery terminal d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery). e. Reprogram the radio presets. 6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs. Page 2282 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13096 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 10367 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Front Final Drive Oil Capacity .................................................................................................................................................. 1.6 l (3 3/8 pt, 2 7/8 imp pt) Rear Rear Final Drive Oil Capacity ................................................................................................................................................ 2.01L (4 1/4 pt, 3 1/2 imp pt.) Crew Cab Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Crew Cab REAR DOOR - CREW CAB Removal 1. Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harness connector. 2. Remove pull handle cover. - Remove screws behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove pull handle escutcheon. - Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove armrest. - Remove screws behind armrest. 6. Remove step lamp. - Disconnect harness connector. 7. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Refer to "REAR DOOR LOCK". - Disconnect speaker connector. 8. Remove door lock knob. 9. Remove rear door tweeter. Page 13092 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5943 ^ Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). ^ Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number : J-43879-12 : J-43897-18 CAUTION: ^ Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 9918 If the fan motor is No Good: a. Replace the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C. b. Install the Max Fuse - Procedure E. c. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F. Procedure C - Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Turn the ignition OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable. - Wait at least 3 minutes before working with any airbag components. 3. Remove the front grill. Figure C-1 a. Use a long screwdriver to twist and release 7 clips shown in Figure C-1. Page 5892 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7463 CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. ^ Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts. 5. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. 6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position connector (A). 7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ^ Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them in their original positions. ^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. 8. Remove adjuster lock plates. Page 12566 Compass: Testing and Inspection Trouble Diagnoses Preliminary Check For Thermometer PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER Page 7466 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing without tightening to specification. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number: - (C-4164) 9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. 10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact. 12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16. Refill rear final drive oil. Page 12694 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Page 6599 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. Page 14251 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1364 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 14198 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9166 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 1102 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 10821 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 13956 Page 5131 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 14487 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 1261 Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 13255 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 4443 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3989 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 5099 Case 14 Case 15 NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 4467 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 4589 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13316 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6319 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 6856 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13843 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12862 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6738 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Locations Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components Automatic Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner Magnet Clutch Circuit SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Page 10445 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 1616 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 4076 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. Page 8700 e. Remove the front pillar finisher. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. NOTE: With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts. f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body. Page 1973 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5754 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 7279 Commercial Service Tools Page 8735 38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips. 39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body. 40. Pull the harness through the body. For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51 Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or differential lock 41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall. 42. Disconnect the control unit(s). 43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall. Page 10047 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 599 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 12604 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 13506 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 9631 - Defroster door motor does not operate normally. Inspection Flow INSPECTION FLOW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Defroster door control system components are: - Front air control - Defroster door motor - PBR (Built into defroster door motor) - In-vehicle sensor - Ambient sensor - Optical sensor - Intake sensor Page 10850 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2425 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 429 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 13155 Page 12070 7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate. 8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3. Page 4345 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 4668 Page 8536 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12440 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD Brake Switch ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Page 6168 Page 9913 Figure B-3 5. Before connecting to the vehicle battery, make sure the Fan Motor Tester is switched OFF. Switched to OFF 6. Connect the Fan Motor Tester and the Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter (using the fluke meter test leads) as follows (see Figure B-4): - Connect Fan Motor Tester harness connector to the condenser fan. - Connect Fan Motor Tester to the vehicle battery; Red clamp to + (positive) / Black clamp to (negative). - Connect the Fluke 73 digital multimeter to the MOTOR VOLTAGE test ports on the Fan Motor Tester; V+ red probe to POS / COM black probe to NEG. Figure B-4 NOTE: When connected as above with the Fan Motor Tester switched OFF, the LED on the switch will illuminate green; this indicates the tester has battery power. Front Axle Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 5. For 4WD model, perform the following: ^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. ^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. 6. Remove wheel sensor. ^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged. ^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness. 7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8829 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 12312 CAUTION: Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle. Page 8785 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 6166 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6344 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 29 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 903 Optional Splice Page 3227 EM-10 Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 1477 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 10068 - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area Page 8720 c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area. 6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit. Sub Woofer-under driver's seat a. Disconnect the electrical connector b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts. c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle. Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts. Page 13850 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5421 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9439 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 12814 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). Page 3416 2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. 3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the cooling system. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. 5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ^ Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level Vacuum gauge reading 0 - 100 m (328 ft.): 28 inches of vacuum 300 m (984 ft.): 27 inches of vacuum 500 m (1,641 ft.): 26 inches of vacuum 1,000 m (3,281 ft.): 24 - 25 inches of vacuum 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Page 8110 Disclaimer Parts 1-4 Descriptions There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order. Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis. ^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure. Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card. ^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card. ^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure. Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST). ^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure. Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be used for standard ECU reprogramming. ^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure. NOTE: These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician. Part 1 Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis. 1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis. ^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2. ^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step. 2. Turn the ignition OFF. Page 9592 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Specifications Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake Control Page 7238 ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. ^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation Page 7976 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 5035 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Page 5302 Case 2 Page 13797 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 4902 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8003 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 8228 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 10015 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6274 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. Page 5167 Case 3 Page 825 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 9015 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10843 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2685 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant Type Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant. Page 5034 System Diagram - Type 17 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 11012 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9610 System Operation The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver side, passenger side, and rear. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door. In AUTO mode the air mix, intake, mode door, and defrost door positions are set by the front air control which determines the proper position based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature selected by the driver and front and rear passengers. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new door position data is returned to the front air control. Air Mix Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motors Page 7616 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1610 The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Electrical Load Page 8680 h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console. i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and remove 2 screws. j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments. Page 10124 8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6. ^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900 Page 1812 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12222 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 6672 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 9302 ^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace the socket. Tool number: (J-44372) ROTATING TORQUE ^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3 - 25 inch lbs.) AXIAL END PLAY ^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 ft. lbs.) to the ball stud axially Use a dial gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less ASSEMBLY 1. Install the inner sockets. Page 1652 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6949 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations Location of Electrical Parts Location of Electrical Parts Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1448 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 13122 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3565 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7423 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3072 CRANKSHAFT Page 14003 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 6866 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7725 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14094 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 #1 cylinder Page 8446 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12539 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 7800 4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18). NOTE: If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *. * This is found in ASIST under: CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info. CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING: ^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur. ^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming. ^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during reprogramming. * You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1. 5. Press [START]. See Figure 18. ^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear. ^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF. ^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started. Page 1632 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 1215 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12430 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 881 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4324 Optional Splice Page 12859 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover and oil pump drive spacer. INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new front oil seal. 2. Install the front oil seal. ^ Install the front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. ^ Press-fit until the height of the front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool. CAUTION: ^ Do not damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. ^ Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal. 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9094 h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console. i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and remove 2 screws. j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments. Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flexplate Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 88.2 Nm (9.0 kg-m, 65 ft. lbs.) Page 13388 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 14472 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14222 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 3133 Page 11158 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7601 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4929 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 2780 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) OIL Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition - Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: MAX position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77 degrees to 86 degrees F)] - Intake position: Recirculation - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the oil quantity according to the table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Page 13027 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10656 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13624 Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set Classification: EC06-009B Reference: NTB06-095B Date: September 2, 2008 2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004 Armada (TA60) This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made. IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS: All applied vehicles: Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan: Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin. AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada: Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9056 22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below. 23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet. 24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor. Page 4869 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Automatic Air Conditioner Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing. Page 13813 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 13825 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 8219 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 5182 Case 4 Page 5259 Case 12 Page 10304 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13282 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 13846 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1148 Page 14420 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6683 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. NOTE: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4679 Page 1267 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Power Window System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9138 Page 495 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Basic Operation CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". Page 6258 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 6477 Page 10495 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 1968 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 10673 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 7073 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Page 14316 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 4748 Page 12193 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 7367 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 6961 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Page 13926 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 14405 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 1569 Page 12722 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 5194 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 1127 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8231 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3912 Page 1834 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13563 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 9994 - Use new bolts from the Fan Protector Kit. Bolt torque: 4.5 N.m (0.45, kg-m, 40 in-lb) Figure D-16 - Mount the harness connector and clip the harness in place. 14. Attach 3 tie-wraps as shown in Figure D-17. - Use 7 1/2 inch (19.5 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit. - Use the large 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock ribs for reference. Figure D-17 Page 8363 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 1736 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 202 2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15). NOTE: ^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery. ^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.) 3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15). ^ A reading above 12 volts confirms; a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle, b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following may be the cause: a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it is not working). b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight). c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins). d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11). CAUTION: ^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts. ^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming. ^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15). 4. Continue with Section 4. Section 4 Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming 1. Press [BACK] two times. Page 7123 COMPONENTS NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal Page 7417 Page 11557 19. Connect latch switch connector (see Figure 13). 20. Reinstall latch switch connector onto door. 21. Reinstall gray anti-rattle foam. 22. Test upper door latch operation: a. Use your thumb to push upper door latch into the closed position (see Figure 14). Page 10238 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Page 9976 Figure C-6, Figure C-7 b. Remove the 4 bumper bolts shown. c. Lift the bumper OFF of the locating tabs; both sides. For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper), do the following: Page 96 Navigation Module: Service and Repair NAVI CONTROL UNIT Removal CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat. 3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5. Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove NAVI control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12451 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4273 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Power Mirror Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative Classification: BT06-005 Reference: NTB06-074 Date: October 30, 2006 2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced. ACTION ^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly. ^ Replace only the door mirror actuator. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13733 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13732 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 1665 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4) Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12926 Optional Splice Specifications Timing Chain: Specifications INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. ^ In the same way as for the LH bank, inspect the timing chain and associated parts on the RH bank. Page 1214 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION Page 13829 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 509 6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST. Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See: Application and ID 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7668 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 6667 Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal and Installation The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 9840 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7721 - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. Page 291 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5982 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2362 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11415 2. Remove screw and remove end cap. - Remove reinforcement from end cap. 3. Release clips and remove step pad from running board. 4. Remove nuts and bolts and remove running board brackets. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 417 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Part 1 Part 2 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored. 5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch STOP. Page 12583 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 12501 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 819 ECM Inspection Table Part 9 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. CAN Communication Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7823 4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18). NOTE: If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *. * This is found in ASIST under: CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info. CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING: ^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur. ^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming. ^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during reprogramming. * You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1. 5. Press [START]. See Figure 18. ^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear. ^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF. ^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started. Page 255 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 8444 Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5305 Case 5 Page 9422 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. Page 5325 Case 6 Page 1994 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 22 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 794 The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. Page 11548 Disclaimer Service Procedure 1. Record all radio presets. 2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 3. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first) and wait for at least 3 minutes. Page 7418 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green Page 10414 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information. Page 12951 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3448 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8348 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1859 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 13622 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 253 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11725 Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4) Page 8346 - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Control Unit Circuit Test Page 59 Description and Operation Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows "EVAP Control System" diagnosis. Page 9004 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 13576 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 864 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13537 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6614 Control Unit: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3. Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. 5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 1296 9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan. WARNING: Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for reassembly. Page 2470 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 4533 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster. 3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. Installation Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure". Automatic Air Conditioner Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 502 ITEMS OF EACH PART Display Item List - Work Support With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 10992 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13151 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5897 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness - Body Harness (King Cab Models) - Body Harness (Crew Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models) - Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models) To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10806 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 8739 55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only). ^ Open the side bolt covers. ^ Remove the 2 bolts. 56. Remove the dome lamp. a. Remove the clear lamp cover b. Remove the 2 screws. c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector. Page 5607 Page 8867 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11716 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 14176 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 8967 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10363 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 12344 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5781 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13472 Engine Control Component Parts Location Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Battery Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored Classification: EC06-001A Reference: NTB06-009A Date: March 31, 2006 MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM The MIL is "ON" with ^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR ^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit, and There are no drivability incidents. DETERMINE IF This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure. ACTIONS If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections: ^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections. ^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection. ^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left side instrument stay assembly. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection CHECKING RADIATOR CAP Inspect the radiator cap. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. ^ Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. ^ Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. Component Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 10314 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13541 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 12060 Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair FRONT GRILLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Release plastic clips and remove front grille. 2. Remove LH and RH front bumper filler panels. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7731 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 8485 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Electrical Units Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 10095 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11805 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Page 10184 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. 5. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5095 Case 9 Page 6887 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 7617 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1693 3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5): CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly. a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap in place. ^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down (it should not move). b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip. ^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib. c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab. d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6). e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place. Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6884 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 2818 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14029 Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2399 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3) Page 5423 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 10705 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 13136 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. Page 4861 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 2549 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Standard type ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................................. PLFR4A-11 Cold type .......................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. PLFR6A-11 Gap ...................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.) Torque ................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.) Page 6650 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2400 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5) Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2) Page 591 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Rear Window Glass and Molding Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Window Glass and Molding REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING Removal and Installation FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS Removal 1. Remove the rear pillar finishers. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. Page 3850 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8287 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6114 Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. Page 8302 voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD Page 9964 Figure A-1 1. Look in the lower bumper area and locate the condenser fan motor. Figure A-2 Page 1374 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console or center seat as required. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5412 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the given illustration. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Service and Repair Tie Rod: Service and Repair INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary. Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as an assembly if necessary. Outer Socket and Inner Socket SWING TORQUE ^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace the socket. Tool number: (J-44372) ROTATING TORQUE ^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3 - 25 inch lbs.) AXIAL END PLAY ^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 ft. lbs.) to the ball stud axially Use a dial gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less Page 6987 Column Shift Models Page 7055 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. Calibration of Decel G Sensor Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor Calibration of Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 3685 ^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above. Page 6395 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 9653 Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 4 - 5) DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Defroster Door Motor Circuit Defroster Door Motor Circuit SYMPTOM: - Defroster door does not change. - Defroster door motor does not operate normally. Page 8948 Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3838 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 12940 Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9412 2. Install upper spring insulator (3) with studs located in line with lower shock mount and in lower seat step. The lower seat step (2) in the shock absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle. ^ <-: Front 3. Tighten the piston rod lock nut to specification. Refer to "Components". ^ Use a new piston rod lock nut for assembly. Page 8384 Optional Splice Page 3316 EM-11 Page 2734 2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. 3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 3910 Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 10870 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP (FRONT) NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. Removal 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock. 2. Pull the bulb to remove from the socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1422 - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL Page 1110 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9061 38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips. 39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body. 40. Pull the harness through the body. For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51 Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or differential lock 41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall. 42. Disconnect the control unit(s). 43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall. Page 7610 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6264 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. Page 278 - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. Page 9181 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Page 5399 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6787 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 5764 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 6847 ^ Do not reuse the oil pan gasket. ^ Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket from the oil pan gasket mating surfaces and holes. ^ Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing. ^ Be sure the oil pan drain plug hole is located to the rear of the transmission assembly. ^ Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of the gasket. ^ Be careful not to pinch harnesses. 3. Tighten new oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts: 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch lbs.) 4. Install drain plug in oil pan with new gasket. CAUTION: Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 5. Refill the transmission assembly with fluid. Page 14062 BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2325 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 Removal and Installation A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation Navigation System Component Parts Location Page 13694 Checking Equipment CAUTION: - Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping. - If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. - If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when CONSULT-II is started. NOTE: - The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require loading (Initialization) procedure. - Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen. Page 5076 Case 3 Page 458 The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3091 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection Valve Clearance INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. 6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. 7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) face outside. ^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. 8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated with black arrow). ^ <- : Engine front ^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center ^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center ^ A: RH ^ B: LH ^ C: Exhaust Page 6317 Page 12074 19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb). 20. Re-connect the battery cables. 21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details. 22. Re-program the radio presets. 23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for details. Page 5338 Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics ECM Circuit Inspection TCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) TCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 2041 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 8602 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5419 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8336 Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6873 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Heat Sensitive Page 4982 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3 Page 10847 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Page 7211 Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ^ Measure side clearance between the connecting rod and crankshaft arm using suitable tool. Standard: 0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 inch) Limit: 0.40 mm (0.0157 inch) ^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the connecting rod bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the repair limit, replace the crankshaft also. CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ^ Check connecting rod alignment using suitable tool. Limit: Bend: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch) length Torsion: 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch) length ^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. Page 7043 - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5247 Check Sheet Part 3 Check Sheet Results (Example) CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) Page 8578 Engine Control Component Parts Location Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Windshield Washer Reservoir: Customer Interest Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir Classification: EL06-009 Reference: NTB07-002 Date: January 9, 2007 2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank. ACTION Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE